Operacion CNC MAZAK

OPERATING MANUAL
for
MAZATROL MATRIX
(for Machining Centers)
OPERATING NC UNIT AND PREPARATION
FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION
MANUAL No. : H740S30040E
Serial No. :
Before using this machine and equipment, fully understand the contents of this
manual to ensure proper operation. Should any questions arise, please ask the
nearest Technical Center or Technology Center.
IMPORTANT NOTICE
1. Be sure to observe the safety precautions described in this manual and the contents of the
safety plates on the machine and equipment. Failure may cause serious personal injury or
material damage. Please replace any missing safety plates as soon as possible.
2. No modifications are to be performed that will affect operation safety. If such modifications are
required, please contact the nearest Technical Center or Technology Center.
3. For the purpose of explaining the operation of the machine and equipment, some illustrations
may not include safety features such as covers, doors, etc. Before operation, make sure all
such items are in place.
4. This manual was considered complete and accurate at the time of publication, however, due to
our desire to constantly improve the quality and specification of all our products, it is subject to
change or modification. If you have any questions, please contact the nearest Technical Center
or Technology Center.
5. Always keep this manual near the machinery for immediate use.
6. If a new manual is required, please order from the nearest Technical Center or Technology
Center with the manual No. or the machine name, serial No. and manual name.
Issued by Manual Publication Section, Yamazaki Mazak Corporation, Japan
03. 2006
PART 3
OPERATING NC UNIT AND
PREPARATION FOR
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
(for Machining Centers)
H740S30040E
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Preface
Safety precautions relating to the CNC unit (in the remainder of this manual, referred to simply as
the NC unit) that is provided in this machine are explained below. Not only the persons who
create programs, but also those who operate the machine must thoroughly understand the
contents of this manual to ensure safe operation of the machine.
Read all these safety precautions, even if your NC model does not have the corresponding
functions or optional units and a part of the precautions do not apply.
Rule
1. This section contains the precautions to be observed as to the working methods and states
usually expected. Of course, however, unexpected operations and/or unexpected working
states may take place at the user site.
During daily operation of the machine, therefore, the user must pay extra careful attention to
its own working safety as well as to observe the precautions described below.
2. Although this manual contains as great an amount of information as it can, since it is not
rare for the user to perform the operations that overstep the manufacturer-assumed ones,
not all of “what the user cannot perform” or “what the user must not perform” can be fully
covered in this manual with all such operations taken into consideration beforehand.
It is to be understood, therefore, that functions not clearly written as “executable” are
“inexecutable” functions.
3. The meanings of our safety precautions to DANGER, WARNING, and CAUTION are as
follows:
: Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life.

DANGER
: Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human

life or body.
WARNING
: Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious

machine damage.
CAUTION
HGENPA0041E S-1
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Basics
! After turning power on, keep hands away from the keys, buttons, or switches of the
operating panel until an initial display has been made.
WARNING ! Before proceeding to the next operations, fully check that correct data has been entered
and/or set. If the operator performs operations without being aware of data errors,
unexpected operation of the machine will result.
! Before machining workpieces, perform operational tests and make sure that the machine
operates correctly. No workpieces must be machined without confirmation of normal
operation. Closely check the accuracy of programs by executing override, single-block, and
other functions or by operating the machine at no load. Also, fully utilize tool path check,
solid check, and other functions, if provided.
! Make sure that the appropriate feed rate and rotational speed are designated for the
particular machining requirements. Always understand that since the maximum usable feed
rate and rotational speed are determined by the specifications of the tool to be used, those
of the workpiece to be machined, and various other factors, actual capabilities differ from
the machine specifications listed in this manual. If an inappropriate feed rate or rotational
speed is designated, the workpiece or the tool may abruptly move out from the machine.
! Before executing correction functions, fully check that the direction and amount of
correction are correct. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if a correction
function is executed without its thorough understanding.
! Parameters are set to the optimum standard machining conditions prior to shipping of the
machine from the factory. In principle, these settings should not be modified. If it becomes
absolutely necessary to modify the settings, perform modifications only after thoroughly
understanding the functions of the corresponding parameters. Modifications usually affect
any program. Unexpected operation of the machine will result if the settings are modified
without a thorough understanding.
Remarks on the cutting conditions recommended by the NC
! Before using the following cutting conditions:

- Cutting conditions that are the result of the MAZATROL Automatic Cutting Conditions
WARNING Determination Function
- Cutting conditions suggested by the Machining Navigation Function
- Cutting conditions for tools that are suggested to be used by the Machining Navigation
Function
Confirm that every necessary precaution in regards to safe machine setup has been taken –
especially for workpiece fixturing/clamping and tool setup.
! Confirm that the machine door is securely closed before starting machining.
Failure to confirm safe machine setup may result in serious injury or death.
S-2
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Programming
! Fully check that the settings of the coordinate systems are correct. Even if the designated
program data is correct, errors in the system settings may cause the machine to operate in
unexpected places and the workpiece to abruptly move out from the machine in the event
WARNING
of contact with the tool.
! During surface velocity hold control, as the current workpiece coordinates of the surface
velocity hold control axes approach zeroes, the spindle speed increases significantly. For
the lathe, the workpiece may even come off if the chucking force decreases. Safety speed
limits must therefore be observed when designating spindle speeds.
! Even after inch/metric system selection, the units of the programs, tool information, or
parameters that have been registered until that time are not converted. Fully check these
data units before operating the machine. If the machine is operated without checks being
performed, even existing correct programs may cause the machine to operate differently
from the way it did before.
! If a program is executed that includes the absolute data commands and relative data
commands taken in the reverse of their original meaning, totally unexpected operation of
the machine will result. Recheck the command scheme before executing programs.
! If an incorrect plane selection command is issued for a machine action such as arc
interpolation or fixed-cycle machining, the tool may collide with the workpiece or part of the
machine since the motions of the control axes assumed and those of actual ones will be
interchanged. (This precaution applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.)
! The mirror image, if made valid, changes subsequent machine actions significantly. Use
the mirror image function only after thoroughly understanding the above. (This precaution
applies only to NC units provided with EIA functions.)
! If machine coordinate system commands or reference position returning commands are
issued with a correction function remaining made valid, correction may become invalid
temporarily. If this is not thoroughly understood, the machine may appear as if it would
operate against the expectations of the operator. Execute the above commands only after
making the corresponding correction function invalid. (This precaution applies only to NC
units provided with EIA functions.)
! The barrier function performs interference checks based on designated tool data. Enter the
tool information that matches the tools to be actually used. Otherwise, the barrier function
will not work correctly.
! The system of G-code and M-code commands differs, especially for turning, between the
machines of INTEGREX e-Series and the other turning machines.
Issuance of the wrong G-code or M-code command results in totally non-intended machine
operation. Thoroughly understand the system of G-code and M-code commands before
using this system.
Sample program Machines of INTEGREX e-Series Turning machines

–1
S1000M3 The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min . The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
S1000M203 The turning spindle rotates at 1000 min–1. The milling spindle rotates at 1000 min–1.
S-3
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
! For the machines of INTEGREX e-Series, programmed coordinates can be rotated using
an index unit of the MAZATROL program and a G68 command (coordinate rotate com-
mand) of the EIA program. However, for example, when the B-axis is rotated through 180
degrees around the Y-axis to implement machining with the turning spindle No. 2, the plus
side of the X-axis in the programmed coordinate system faces downward and if the
program is created ignoring this fact, the resulting movement of the tool to unexpected
positions may incite collisions.
To create the program with the plus side of the X-axis oriented in an upward direction, use
the mirror function of the WPC shift unit or the mirror imaging function of G-code command
(G50.1, G51.1).
! After modifying the tool data specified in the program, be sure to perform the tool path
check function, the solid check function, and other functions, and confirm that the program
operates properly. The modification of tool data may cause even a field-proven machining
program to change in operational status.
If the user operates the machine without being aware of any changes in program status,
interference with the workpiece could arise from unexpected operation.
For example, if the cutting edge of the tool during the start of automatic operation is present
inside the clearance-including blank (unmachined workpiece) specified in the common unit
of the MAZATROL program, care is required since the tool will directly move from that
position to the approach point because of no obstructions being judged to be present on
this path.
For this reason, before starting automatic operation, make sure that the cutting edge of the
tool during the start of automatic operation is present outside the clearance-including
workpiece specified in the common unit of the MAZATROL program.
! If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected

for each axis, movements to the ending point will not usually become linear. Before using
these functions, therefore, make sure that no obstructions are present on the path.
CAUTION
S-4
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Operations
! Single-block, feed hold, and override functions can be made invalid using system variables
#3003 and #3004. Execution of this means the important modification that makes the
corresponding operations invalid. Before using these variables, therefore, give thorough
WARNING
notification to related persons. Also, the operator must check the settings of the system
variables before starting the above operations.
! If manual intervention during automatic operation, machine locking, the mirror image
function, or other functions are executed, the workpiece coordinate systems will usually be
shifted. When making machine restart after manual intervention, machine locking, the
mirror image function, or other functions, consider the resulting amounts of shift and take
the appropriate measures. If operation is restarted without any appropriate measures being
taken, collision with the tool or workpiece may occur.
! Use the dry run function to check the machine for normal operation at no load. Since the
feed rate at this time becomes a dry run rate different from the program-designated feed
rate, the axes may move at a feed rate higher than the programmed value.
! After operation has been stopped temporarily and insertion, deletion, updating, or other
commands executed for the active program, unexpected operation of the machine may
result if that program is restarted. No such commands should, in principle, be issued for the
active program.
! During manual operation, fully check the directions and speeds of axial movement.
! For a machine that requires manual homing, perform manual homing operations after
CAUTION turning power on. Since the software-controlled stroke limits will remain ineffective until
manual homing is completed, the machine will not stop even if it oversteps the limit area.
As a result, serious machine damage will result.
! Do not designate an incorrect pulse multiplier when performing manual pulse handle feed
operations. If the multiplier is set to 1000 times and the handle operated inadvertently, axial
movement will become faster than that expected.
S-5
BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT
BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT
Limited Warranty
The warranty of the manufacturer does not cover any trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its
non-intended purpose. Take notice of this when operating the unit.
Examples of the trouble arising if the NC unit is used for its non-intended purpose are listed
below.
1. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available software
products (including user-created ones)
2. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any Windows operating systems
3. Trouble associated with and caused by the use of any commercially available computer
equipment
Operating Environment
1. Ambient temperature
During machine operation: 0° to 50°C (32° to 122°F)
2. Relative humidity
During machine operation: 10 to 75% (without bedewing)
Note: As humidity increases, insulation deteriorates causing electrical component parts to
deteriorate quickly.
Keeping the Backup Data

Note: Do not attempt to delete or modify the data stored in the following folder.
Recovery Data Storage Folder: D:\MazakBackUp
Although this folder is not used when the NC unit is running normally, it contains important data
that enables the prompt recovery of the machine if it fails.
If this data has been deleted or modified, the NC unit may require a long recovery time. Be sure
not to modify or delete this data.
S-6 E
CONTENTS
Page
1 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION ............................... 1-1
1-1 Preparation Steps for Automatic Operation ........................................................1-1
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 2-1
2-1 Name of the Components of Each Display.........................................................2-1
2-2 Types of Displays ...............................................................................................2-3
2-3 Configuration of Displays....................................................................................2-4
2-3-1 DISPLAY MAP display............................................................................................ 2-6
2-4 Windows.............................................................................................................2-7
3 DATA SETTING METHODS................................................................. 3-1
3-1 Setting Data and Address...................................................................................3-2
3-2 Selecting Menu Data ..........................................................................................3-3
3-3 Erasing Data.......................................................................................................3-3
3-4 Modifying Data ...................................................................................................3-4
3-5 Incremental Input................................................................................................3-4
3-6 Saving Data onto the Hard Disk .........................................................................3-4
3-7 Naming Machining Programs .............................................................................3-5
4 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL

STATUS................................................................................................ 4-1
4-1 POSITION Display..............................................................................................4-1
4-1-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 4-1
4-1-2 Data registration ..................................................................................................... 4-5
C-1
4-1-3 Display operations .................................................................................................. 4-6
4-2 TRACE Display...................................................................................................4-7
4-2-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 4-7
4-2-2 Displaying machining shape and tool tip ................................................................ 4-8
4-2-3 Plane select ............................................................................................................ 4-9
4-2-4 Change of scale values ........................................................................................ 4-10
4-2-5 [Counter Erase]..................................................................................................... 4-11
4-3 AUTO MEASURE Display ................................................................................4-12
4-3-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 4-12
4-4 EIA MONITOR Display .....................................................................................4-14
4-4-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 4-14
4-4-2 EIA/ISO monitor function ...................................................................................... 4-15
4-4-3 Editing functions ................................................................................................... 4-15
4-4-4 Restart 2 unmodal function................................................................................... 4-16
4-5 MACHINING - MONITORING Display..............................................................4-17
4-5-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 4-17
4-5-2 Selecting graphs to be displayed.......................................................................... 4-18
4-5-3 Setting the display time scale ............................................................................... 4-20
4-6 DRILL - MONITOR Display ..............................................................................4-22
4-6-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 4-22
4-6-2 Setting the threshold............................................................................................. 4-23
4-6-3 Scale change ........................................................................................................ 4-24
4-6-4 Setting the display time scale ............................................................................... 4-25
C-2
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP ................................. 5-1
5-1 SET UP RECORD Display .................................................................................5-1
5-1-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 5-1
5-1-2 Data saving/reading................................................................................................ 5-3
5-2 TOOL LAYOUT Display (Tool Layout Mode)......................................................5-5
5-2-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 5-5
5-2-2 Tool layout procedure ............................................................................................. 5-6
5-2-3 Clearing pocket numbers...................................................................................... 5-11
5-2-4 Specifying a spare tool ......................................................................................... 5-11
5-2-5 Erasing spare tool data......................................................................................... 5-12
5-2-6 Erasing procedures for registered tool data.......................................................... 5-12
5-2-7 Other functions ..................................................................................................... 5-13
5-3 TOOL LAYOUT Display (Visual Tool Management Mode)...............................5-15
5-3-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 5-15
5-3-2 Display modes ...................................................................................................... 5-18
5-3-3 NECESSARY TOOL display section .................................................................... 5-19
5-3-4 STOCK TOOL display section .............................................................................. 5-20
5-3-5 Tool layout for the necessary tools ....................................................................... 5-22
5-3-6 Other functions for display operation .................................................................... 5-28
5-4 WORK OFFSET Display ..................................................................................5-30
5-4-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 5-30
5-4-2 Data registration ................................................................................................... 5-31
5-4-3 Display operations ................................................................................................ 5-33
C-3
5-5 MACRO VARIABLE Display .............................................................................5-34
5-5-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 5-35
5-5-3 Display operations ................................................................................................ 5-36
5-6 ADDITIONAL WPC Display ..............................................................................5-38
5-6-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 5-38
5-6-3 Address setting ..................................................................................................... 5-39
5-6-4 Considerations to measurement........................................................................... 5-40
5-7 SPINDLE LOAD GRAPHIC DISPLAY Display .................................................5-41
5-7-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 5-41
5-7-2 Displaying spindle load data ................................................................................. 5-42
5-7-3 Display mode selection......................................................................................... 5-42
5-7-4 Displaying additional data related to spindle load................................................. 5-44
5-8 MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT Display ................................................5-45
5-8-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 5-45
5-8-2 Displaying data ..................................................................................................... 5-47
5-8-3 Display modes ...................................................................................................... 5-47
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION.............................. 6-1
6-1 PROGRAM Display ............................................................................................6-1
6-2 TOOL PATH CHECK Display .............................................................................6-2
6-2-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 6-2
6-2-2 Basic display operation........................................................................................... 6-3
6-2-3 Restarting tool path check ...................................................................................... 6-4
C-4
6-2-4 Block skip................................................................................................................ 6-4
6-2-5 Window function (MONITOR window) .................................................................... 6-4
6-2-6 Changing over the TOOL PATH CHECK display to other displays ........................ 6-4
6-2-7 Virtual Machining .................................................................................................... 6-4
6-2-8 Checking for collision.............................................................................................. 6-5
6-3 SHAPE CHECK Display .....................................................................................6-6
6-3-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 6-6
6-3-2 Display operations .................................................................................................. 6-7
6-4 PROGRAM FILE Display....................................................................................6-8
6-4-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 6-8
6-4-2 Program name setting ............................................................................................ 6-9
6-4-3 Work number change ........................................................................................... 6-10
6-4-4 Program erasure................................................................................................... 6-10
6-4-5 Program copy ....................................................................................................... 6-11
6-4-6 Program editing .................................................................................................... 6-12
6-4-7 Opening the shape drawing window..................................................................... 6-12
6-4-8 Directory change................................................................................................... 6-13
6-4-9 Program transfer................................................................................................... 6-14
6-4-10 Rearranging programs.......................................................................................... 6-15
6-4-11 Changing a reference folder ................................................................................. 6-16
6-4-12 Program management functions........................................................................... 6-17
6-5 PROCESS CONTROL Display.........................................................................6-18
6-5-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 6-18
6-5-2 Process-number search........................................................................................ 6-19
6-5-3 Other functions ..................................................................................................... 6-19
C-5
6-6 PROGRAM LAYOUT Display ...........................................................................6-20
6-6-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 6-20
6-6-2 Priority number setting.......................................................................................... 6-21
6-6-3 Delay priority designation ..................................................................................... 6-21
6-6-4 Priority number assignment .................................................................................. 6-21
6-6-5 Priority number movement.................................................................................... 6-22
6-6-6 Erasure of all priority numbers .............................................................................. 6-23
6-6-7 Store ..................................................................................................................... 6-23
6-6-8 Program write ....................................................................................................... 6-24
6-6-9 Simultaneous use of functions.............................................................................. 6-24
6-6-10 Changing the display mode .................................................................................. 6-24
6-6-11 Program reference window................................................................................... 6-25
6-7 MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT Display ..............................................6-26
6-7-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 6-26
6-7-2 Displaying data ..................................................................................................... 6-29
6-7-3 Display modes ...................................................................................................... 6-29
6-7-4 Modifying the cutting conditions............................................................................ 6-32
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS ....................................................... 7-1
7-1 TOOL DATA Display ..........................................................................................7-1
7-1-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 7-1
7-1-2 Tool length list......................................................................................................... 7-7
7-1-3 Registering the tools to be used (for MAZATROL programs) ................................. 7-8
7-1-4 Manual measurement of the tool lengths.............................................................. 7-13
7-1-5 Other functions (for MAZATROL programs) ......................................................... 7-15
C-6
7-1-6 Setting tool data (for EIA/ISO programs) .............................................................. 7-17
7-1-7 Setting tool group numbers................................................................................... 7-19
7-1-8 Other functions (for EIA/ISO programs)................................................................ 7-20
7-1-9 MAZATROL tool data “INVALIDATION” (Option) ................................................. 7-20
7-1-10 Manual measurement of tool lengths (Setting tool length offset data using
the LENG-OFS TEACH menu function) ............................................................... 7-23
7-2 TOOL FILE Display ..........................................................................................7-24
7-2-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 7-25
7-2-2 Registering milling tool data.................................................................................. 7-27
7-2-3 Erasing a part of the registered data .................................................................... 7-31
7-3 TOOL OFFSET Display....................................................................................7-32
7-3-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 7-32
7-3-2 Tool-compensation data setting procedures......................................................... 7-34
7-3-3 Setting the current position ................................................................................... 7-36
7-3-4 EIA/ISO tool length measurement ........................................................................ 7-37
7-4 Input Error Prevention Function........................................................................7-40
7-4-1 Outline .................................................................................................................. 7-40
7-4-2 Data display .......................................................................................................... 7-40
7-4-3 Display data description........................................................................................ 7-40
7-4-4 Data items to be checked ..................................................................................... 7-40
7-4-5 Related parameters .............................................................................................. 7-41
7-5 Changed Data Check Function ........................................................................7-42
7-5-1 Outline .................................................................................................................. 7-42
7-5-2 Operation .............................................................................................................. 7-42
C-7
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS ........................................... 8-1
8-1 CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. Display...........................................8-1
8-1-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 8-1
8-1-3 Read and Write of text file ...................................................................................... 8-3
8-2 CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP/FR Display ........................................................8-5
8-2-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 8-5
8-3 CUTTING CONDITION LEARN Display.............................................................8-9
8-3-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 8-9
8-3-2 Menu functions ..................................................................................................... 8-10
8-4 USER PARAMETER Display ...........................................................................8-11
8-4-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 8-11
8-5 MACHINE PARAMETER Display .....................................................................8-13
8-5-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 8-13
8-6 PLC PARAMETER Display ..............................................................................8-14
8-6-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 8-14
8-7 CUTTING LEVEL SELECT Window.................................................................8-15
8-7-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 8-15
8-7-2 Selecting a cutting level ........................................................................................ 8-15
9 DISPLAY RELATED TO DATA STORAGE .......................................... 9-1
9-1 DATA I/O Display ...............................................................................................9-1
9-1-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 9-1
C-8
9-1-2 DATA I/O operations (CARD) ................................................................................. 9-2
9-1-3 DATA I/O operations (HARD DISK)........................................................................ 9-6
9-1-4 DATA I/O operations (USB) .................................................................................. 9-10
9-1-5 DATA I/O operations (CMT) ................................................................................. 9-14
9-1-6 DATA I/O operations (TAPE) ................................................................................ 9-16
9-1-7 DATA I/O operations (FLOPPY) ........................................................................... 9-20
9-1-8 Saving CAM data.................................................................................................. 9-24
9-1-9 Data input/output in text file format ....................................................................... 9-26
9-1-10 Saving programs additionally................................................................................ 9-26
9-1-11 MAZATROL program loading ............................................................................... 9-27
9-2 Program Transfer from the Host PC to the Memory Card ................................9-28
9-2-1 Outline .................................................................................................................. 9-28
9-2-2 Detailed description .............................................................................................. 9-28
9-3 DATA I/O PARAMETER Display ......................................................................9-34
9-3-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 9-34
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS.............................................. 10-1
10-1 DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM Display ............................................................10-2
10-1-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 10-2
10-2 DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM HISTORY Display ...........................................10-6
10-2-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 10-6
10-2-2 Output of an alarm history text file ........................................................................ 10-8
10-2-3 Viewing the alarm history text file on the screen .................................................. 10-8
10-2-4 EXCLUDE ALARM function................................................................................ 10-10
10-3 DIAGNOSIS (USER) - PLC SIGNAL Display .................................................10-11
C-9
10-3-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 10-11
10-4 MAINTENANCE CHECK Display ...................................................................10-14
10-4-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 10-14
10-4-2 Data display for long-term check items (1500 and 3000 hours check items) ..... 10-15
10-4-3 Display operations .............................................................................................. 10-16
10-4-4 Entry of the check items to be displayed ............................................................ 10-16
10-5 RUNNING CONTROL Display .......................................................................10-19
10-5-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 10-19
10-5-2 Display period setting ......................................................................................... 10-20
10-5-3 Display of detailed data ...................................................................................... 10-21
10-5-4 Display for each work number ............................................................................ 10-22
10-5-5 Spindle load display............................................................................................ 10-23
10-5-6 Alarm list display................................................................................................. 10-24
10-5-7 Other functions ................................................................................................... 10-25
10-6 DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) - VERSION Display ...................................................10-28
10-6-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 10-28
10-7 DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) - DIAGNOSIS MONITOR Display..............................10-29
10-7-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 10-29
10-7-2 Display operations .............................................................................................. 10-30
10-8 DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) - OPTION Display......................................................10-34
10-8-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 10-34
11 OPTION .............................................................................................. 11-1
11-1 Function Relating EIA/ISO Program (Option) ...................................................11-1
11-1-1 Setting method...................................................................................................... 11-1
C-10
11-1-2 Configuration of displays ...................................................................................... 11-1
11-1-3 POSITION display ................................................................................................ 11-4
11-2 Geometry Compensation Function ...................................................................11-6
11-2-1 Function general ................................................................................................... 11-6
11-2-2 Detailed description .............................................................................................. 11-9
11-2-3 Hold status.......................................................................................................... 11-15
11-2-4 Notes .................................................................................................................. 11-16
11-2-5 Parameters ......................................................................................................... 11-16
11-2-6 Appendix............................................................................................................. 11-17
11-3 Hard Disk Operating Function ........................................................................11-20
11-3-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 11-20
11-3-2 Preparation for HD operation.............................................................................. 11-20
11-3-3 Selection of operation mode ............................................................................... 11-20
11-3-4 Program selection for HD operation ................................................................... 11-22
11-3-5 Restart in the HD operation mode ...................................................................... 11-23
11-3-6 Format for HD operation programs ..................................................................... 11-24
11-4 IC Memory Card Operating Function..............................................................11-26
11-4-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 11-26
11-4-2 Preparation for CARD operation......................................................................... 11-26
11-4-4 Program selection for CARD operation .............................................................. 11-28
11-4-5 Restart in the CARD operation mode ................................................................. 11-29
11-4-6 Format for CARD operation programs ................................................................ 11-29
11-5 Ethernet Operating Function ..........................................................................11-32
C-11
11-5-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 11-32
11-5-2 Preparation for ENET operation ......................................................................... 11-32
11-5-4 Program selection for ENET operation ............................................................... 11-35
11-5-5 Restart in the ENET operation mode.................................................................. 11-36
11-5-6 Format for ENET operation programs ................................................................ 11-36
11-6 Inch/Metric Unit System Change Simplifying Function ...................................11-38
11-6-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 11-38
11-6-2 Data concerned .................................................................................................. 11-39
11-6-3 Operating procedure........................................................................................... 11-39
11-6-4 Internal management of data.............................................................................. 11-40
11-7 DYNAMIC OFFSET Display ...........................................................................11-41
11-7-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 11-41
11-7-2 Data registration ................................................................................................. 11-43
12 DISPLAYS RELATED TO SIMULATION............................................ 12-1
12-1 Tool Model Setting Display...............................................................................12-1
12-1-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 12-1
12-2 INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD......................................................................12-7
12-3 3D MONITOR Display ....................................................................................12-12
12-3-1 Data display ........................................................................................................ 12-12
12-3-2 3D monitor menu ................................................................................................ 12-14
12-4 3D SETUP Display .........................................................................................12-16
12-4-1 3D SETUP display .............................................................................................. 12-16
12-4-2 3D setup initial menu .......................................................................................... 12-17
C-12
12-4-3 3D setup functions .............................................................................................. 12-17
12-4-4 Material model setting......................................................................................... 12-20
12-4-5 Fixture model setting .......................................................................................... 12-27
12-4-6 Manual arrangement of the material and fixture models .................................... 12-33
12-5 Editing the Database ......................................................................................12-34
12-5-1 Editing the material database ............................................................................. 12-34
12-5-2 Editing the fixture database ................................................................................ 12-38
12-6 Managing the Material/Fixture Models............................................................12-39
12-6-1 Managing the material models............................................................................ 12-39
12-6-2 Managing the fixture models............................................................................... 12-44
12-7 3D Display Operation .....................................................................................12-45
12-8 VIRTUAL MACHINING Display ......................................................................12-52
12-8-1 Outline ................................................................................................................ 12-52
12-8-2 Data display ........................................................................................................ 12-52
12-8-3 Work simulation .................................................................................................. 12-55
12-8-4 Machine simulation ............................................................................................. 12-63
12-8-5 Display of material, tool, and fixture.................................................................... 12-68
13 OTHER FUNCTIONS ......................................................................... 13-1
13-1 Voice Advisor ...................................................................................................13-1
13-1-1 Outline .................................................................................................................. 13-1
13-1-2 Change settings.................................................................................................... 13-1
13-1-3 Greeting Message ................................................................................................ 13-3
13-1-4 Exclusion of alarms from warning......................................................................... 13-3
C-13
13-2 Custom Menu Function ....................................................................................13-4
13-2-1 Outline .................................................................................................................. 13-4
C-14 E
PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION 1
1 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION
To machine workpieces, you must mount the tools for machining to the magazine and prepare
fixtures. Then, programs and other various data for automatic operation must be set to the NC.
This chapter describes procedures to be carried out before automatic operation.
1-1 Preparation Steps for Automatic Operation

Supposing that the tooling and adjustment of each part for operation have already been
completed, the subsequent operational steps are described below.
Tool data setting
- Coordinates data setting for the tools

- Registration of the tool shape and the conditions of its usage
Program creation
- Program data setting (See the Programming Manual.)

- Machining shape check
- Tool path check
- Confirmation of the process layout
Data setting for set-up job
- Setting of the program zero-point

- Check of cutting and machine operation in simulated form on the VIRTUAL
MACHINING display
Automatic operation
For execution procedure for automatic operation, see the Part 4, AUTOMATIC OPERATION.
H740S3A040E 1-1
1 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION
- NOTE -
1-2 E
DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
2-1 Name of the Components of Each Display

The liquid crystal display unit of the operation panel presents a specific display according to the
particular requirements. All displays are composed of the display areas shown below.
2 1
3
7
8 16 12 10 11
13 14 15 4 5
D740S0100
No. Name No. Name

1 Title area 9 Menu display area
2 Icon display area 10 Date display area
3 Menu bar display area 11 Time display area
4 Message display area 12 Display area of the number of TPS points
5 Data input area 13 Rapid traverse override display area
6 Data display area 14 Spindle speed override display area
7 Cursor (reversed in blue) 15 Cutting feed override display area
8 Alarm display area 16 Spindle rotational direction display area
1. Title area
The current display title is displayed.
2. Icon dipslay area
An image abstractly presenting the current display.
3. Menu bar display area
Functions common to all displays (Print, Window etc.) can be selected here in general. The
menu bar, in particular, can also provide functions proper to specific displays.
H740S3B040E 2-1
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
4. Message display area

Directions for operation and data descriptions are displayed in inquiry form.
The character strings displayed here are referred to as “messages”.
5. Data input area
Data that has been set using address/numeric data keys is displayed.
6. Data display area
Data that has been input, data that the NC unit has processed, and other informations
specific to the current display are displayed.
7. Cursor
This is a marking which can be moved in the data display area vertically or horizontally.
You can set data at the position where the cursor is displayed, or modify or erase the data
displayed at the cursor position.
8. Alarm display area
If erroneous operations are carried out or if machine or NC unit trouble occurs, details of
those operations or trouble will be displayed here as an “alarm”.
If an alarm is displayed, you must remove the cause.
Refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-code List for further information on
alarms.
9. Menu display area
The functions of the ten keys (menu keys) located directly below the LCD are displayed.
The entire character string displayed here is referred to as a “menu”.
Each time a menu changes over, the functions of each menu key also change.
10. Date display area
11. Time display area
Date and time of the current day are displayed respectively.
The contents of these areas, however, differ from the above to provide special indications
proper to some displays.
12. Display area of the number of TPS points.
Number of tool stop positions currently stored by the TPS function.
For details of the TPS function see Section 5-2 in Part 4.
13. Rapid traverse override display area
Indication of the current rapid traverse speed in percentage (0 to 100) with respect to the
maximum value preset in parameter M1.
For details of the rapid traverse override see Section 3-1 in Part 4.
14. Spindle speed override display area.
Indication of the current spindle speed. Indication of the current spindle speed either in
percentage (0 to 150) with respect to the programmed value during automatic operation, or
in number of revolutions per minute during manual operation.
For details of the spindle speed override see Section 3-3 in Part 4.
15. Cutting feed override display area
Indication of the current feedrate either in percentage (0 to 200) with respect to the
programmed value during automatic operation, or in actual value during manual operation.
For details of the cutting feed override see Section 3-2 in Part 4.
2-2
DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
16. Spindle rotational direction display area
Indication of the current spindle rotational direction. REV appears to indicate the reversed
rotation of the spindle during program flow.
For normal rotation: For reverse rotation:
2-2 Types of Displays

To manufacture a product, you must register various information, such as tool data, machining
program data, etc., in the NC unit in advance. You must also check registered information and
the movements of each section of the machine during operation.
The NC unit provides the following types of displays to allow for a variety of jobs that are required
for machine operation:
1. Displays related to the machine operational status
These displays allows you to check the movements of each section of the machine and the
machining status.
2. Displays related to program creation
Use these displays to create, check, and/or edit a program appropriate for the type of
product to be machined.
3. Displays related to tools
Call these displays to register type and compensation data for the tool you are going to use.
4. Displays related to machining set up
These displays allows you to carry out data registration required for executing a machining
program, and other jobs.
5. Displays related to parameters
These displays are used to register the control elements (parameters) of the NC unit or
machine and the data for automatic decision of cutting conditions.
Data that YAMAZAKI MAZAK recommends is displayed; you can add or change data as
required. Refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for further details.
6. Displays related to data transference between the NC unit and an external hardware unit
Use these displays to check the registration status of machining programs or to transfer
machining program data or other data between the NC unit and an external hardware unit.
7. Displays related to diagnosis
These displays are presented for diagnosis and maintenance of the NC unit or machine.
2-3
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
2-3 Configuration of Displays

Configuration of displays
MONITOR PART SHAPE WORK No.

POSITION
RESTART HANDLE COMPARISON
INTERRUPT STOP∗
EIA ADDITIONAL
TRACE WORK OFFSET MEASURE MACRO
MONITOR WPC
VARIABLE
∗ ∗
WORK No. WORK No. POSITION POSITION
PART SHAPE MONITOR
DYNAMIC STRAIGHTNESS
RESTART RESTART OFFSET GRAPH
COMPARISON COMPARISON ∗ ∗
STOP∗ STOP∗
WORK No. TOOL FILE

PROGRAM
TOOL DATA
(MAZATROL)
WORK No.
PROGRAM
(EIA)∗
MONITOR
TOOL PATH SHAPE PROCESS PROGRAM PROGRAM
CHECK CHECK CONTROL LAYOUT FILE
PROGRAM PART SHAPE

MACHINING
VIRTUAL
NAVIGATION-
MACHINING
PREDICTION
TOOL FILE
TOOL DATA ACCUMULATED
DIAGNOSIS TIME
(USER)
DATA ERASE
TOOL FILE TOOL OFFSET

∗ DIAGNOSIS RUNNING
(MAKER) CONTROL
POSITION
USER
PARAMETER
LADDER
MONITOR
MACHINE PLC
PARAMETER PARAMETER
2-4
DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
DATA I/O
WORK No.
MACHINING
AUTO MACHINING-
NAVIGATION- 3D SETUP 3D MONITOR
MEASURE MONITORING
RESULT
WORK No.
TOOL
LAYOUT
VISUAL TOOL
MANAGEMENT
WORK No.
CUTTING
CONDITION
CUTTING
CONDITION
LEARN
Main display
Sub-display
Window
SPINDLE LOAD
MAINTENANCE GRAPHIC
GRAPHIC ∗ Optional
CHECK MAINTENANCE
DISPLAY
The displays connected by the
line can be called up mutually by
pressing the menu key.
D740S3001
2-5
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
2-3-1 DISPLAY MAP display

Function:
The names of the displays that the NC unit can create are listed here.
Remarks:
- This display gives a grouped list of display names which can be displayed on the following eight
displays:
! POSITION ! PROGRAM ! TOOL DATA
! WORK OFFSET ! USER PARAMETER ! DATA I/O
! CUTTING CONDITION ! DIAGNOSIS (USER)
- Any of the name-listed displays can be directly selected from this display.
<Data display>
[6]
[1] [3]
[2] [4] [7]
[5]
[8]
D740S0102E
<Display data description>
No. Item Unit Data description
[1] POSITION — List of the displays related to the machine operation
[2] WORK OFFSET — List of the displays related to machining set up
[3] PROGRAM — List of the displays related to programs
[4] USER PARAMETER — List of the displays related to parameters
[5] CUTTING CONDITION — List of the displays related to cutting conditions
[6] TOOL DATA — List of the displays related to tools
[7] DATA I/O — List of the displays related to input/output of the various dara
[8] DIAGNOSIS (USER) — List of the displays related to machine maintenance
2-6
DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
1. Display operations
Selection of the DISPLAY MAP display makes the [DISPLAY MAP] menu item and the name of
the immediately previous display assume a reverse display status. For a display whose name is
not displayed, however, the name of the display immediately previous to that display changes
into reverse display status.
Any of the name-listed displays can be directly selected from this display.
(1) Make the name of the display to be selected assume a reverse display status.
- Press the cursor key and move the cursor to the name of the display to be selected.
(2) Press the [DISPLAY MAP] menu key.
" The display the name of which is highlighted will be selected.
- The intended display can also be selected by pressing the INPUT key, instead of the
[DISPLAY MAP] menu key.
2-4 Windows
1. Concept of windows
The windows of this NC unit refer to boxes that display operational aid information during the
selected display mode.
2. How to display a window

Two types of windows can be displayed: a type that can be displayed by pressing menu key, and
a type that can be displayed by selecting through “Window” on the menu bar.
Thus, only the appropriate window can be displayed on each display.
1. Windows opened by pressing menu key
Windows appearing when the corresponding menu key, such as WORK No. and RESTART,
is pressed.
2. Windows selected through “Window” on the menu bar
Windows appearing when the window key is pressed and an option is selected from
the listing under “Window” on the menu bar.
3. Erasing windows
Basically, windows that have been displayed by the selection from the menu bar or by pressing
the corresponding menu key can be erased by repeating the same selection from the menu bar
or by pressing that menu key once again, respectively.
Note: Several certain windows will be auto-erased if a menu key or the display selector key is
pressed or if numeric data is set.
2-7
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
4. Window list
Displays on which the

Window name Description of window display
window can be displayed
WORK No. A list of program work numbers registered in the NC unit. - POSITION
Notes: - PROGRAM
1. If the display of the above data spans over mulitiple pages, the next - DATA I/O
page or the previous page can be displayed by pressing the page key - EIA MONITOR
or , respectively. - TRACE
2. The format of the list can be changed by clicking the button displayed at
the upper right corner of the window.
3. Display data in the window will not be changed even if a work number is
input in the NC unit using data input/output operation while this window
is displayed.
PART SHAPE For the POSITION display, the machining shape of the program for which a - POSITION
work number searching operation has been performed is displayed only on - PROGRAM FILE
one XY plane. For the PROGRAM FILE display, the desired program can - EIA MONITOR
be drawn only on one XY plane.
- SET UP RECORD
MONITOR The contents of a program for which a work number searching operation - POSITION
has been performed are displayed (that is, for a MAZATROL program, - TOOL PATH CHECK
program layout is displayed, or for an EIA/ISO program, program data is
displayed).
Also, during automatic operation with the POSITION display remaining on
the monitor, the section currently being executed is displayed in highlighted
form.
During the tool path check mode, the section currently being checked is
displayed in reverse status.
RESTART Indication of restart position and modal information that corresponds to the - POSITION
restarting section existing during the restart mode after EIA/ISO searching - TRACE
has been completed. - EIA MONITOR
HANDLE Amount of interruption existing during manual pulse interruption - POSITION
Calculator Provides functions of a pocket calculator.
TOOL DATA Data on the tools registered in the NC unit - PROGRAM

Note: (MAZATROL)
Registered tool data can be displayed only during creation of MAZATROL
programs, and only the tool data appropriate for the sequence section
indicated by the cursor will be displayed.
If the display of the above data spans over multiple pages, the next page or
the previous page can be displayed by pressing the page key or
, respectively.
POSITION Display of the current position, machine position, work number, tool - MACRO VARIABLE
number, etc. - WORK OFFSET
- TOOL OFFSET
PROGRAM Display of the MAZATROL program of the unit where the cursor remains - PROGRAM LAYOUT
TOOL FILE Tool data that has been registered in the NC unit - PROGRAM
(MAZATROL)
- Pressing the page key displays the next page.
- TOOL DATA
- Pressing the page key displays the previous page.
Note:
Only tool file data for milling tools are displayed on the PROGRAM
(MAZATROL) or the TOOL DATA display.
2-8
DISPLAY OVERVIEW 2
Displays on which the
Window name Description of window display
window can be displayed
NOM-φ SELECT Display of a list of standards for unified/pipe threads - PROGRAM
(MAZATROL)
- TOOL DATA
- TOOL LAYOUT
Note:
- CUTTING CONDITION
This window can only be displayed in the MAZATOL programming while
LEARN
the cursor remains set at the required position for input of the nominal
diameter for a tapping tool.
ALARM Display of alarm remedial information upon occurrence of alarms - Any display
NAVIGATION A parameter (bit 1 of F80) is provided for the selection of whether this
window is to be displayed automatically upon occurrence of an alarm.
Manual display of the window can be done by the selection through “Help”
on the menu bar in any display as well as by pressing the [ALARM NAVI.]
menu key on the GRAPHIC MAINTENANCE display.
Notes:
1. One alarm is described on one page. For multiple simultaneous alarms,
use the page keys and to display the next and previous
pages, repectively.
2. Use the vertical and horizontal scroll bars if the window area is not large
enough to display the information in its entirety.
3. Remedial information is only provided for the alarms No. 200 to No. 399
and No. 1200 to No. 1399.
4. The contents of the window remaining opened will not be cleared
together with clearence of the alarm itself.
2-9
2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW
- NOTE -
2-10 E
DATA SETTING METHODS 3
3 DATA SETTING METHODS
Registration of data in the NC unit is accomplished by setting data in each item displayed on the
LCD unit.
This chapter describes general methods of setting, erasing and modifying data, and related
precautions.
More specific methods of setting data are described in each section for operating display. Refer
to the relevant section. You will only need to use the following eight types of keys when setting,
erasing or modifying data:
5 5
4 7 6 8 7
3
D740S0020
No. Name No. Name

1 Menu keys 5 Shift key
2 Cursor keys 6 Clear key
3 Page keys 7 Input key (Return key, EOB key, INPUT key)
4 Address/numeric data keys 8 Data cancel key (Delete key, CANCEL key)
The NC unit has the feature that it uses interactive input. That is, the operator can set data in
sequence just by responding to inquiry messages issued by the NC unit. When setting data,
check the message display area to ensure that the data you are going to set is exactly what you
want to set. Usually, messages are displayed in one of the following two formats:
1) “************?”
2) “******** <MENU>?” ******* : Details of the data to be set
Set data if the message is displayed in format 1) above.
Select data from the menu if the message is displayed in format 2) above.
H740S3C031E 3-1
3-1 Setting Data and Address

Set data and address using this procedure:
(1) Place the cursor on the intended item.
- Press one of the cursor keys and move the cursor to the intended item.
- If the cursor does not appear on the screen, press one of the cursor keys and then when
the cursor is displayed, move it to the intended item.
Pressing the cursor key or displays the cursor at the first item on the screen
where you can set data.
Pressing the cursor key or displays the cursor at the last item on the screen
where you can set data.
(2) Specify data with address/numeric data keys.
Example: To set data of “6.02”:
Press 6 ! 0 2 in that order.
" The selected data is displayed in the data input area.
6.02 Data input area
- If you have carried out wrong key operations and non-intended data has been displayed in
the data input area, press the clear key to erase the data, and then specify the intended
data.
(3) Press the INPUT key.
" The data that has been selected in step (2) above is displayed in the item position
where you have set the cursor.
Note 1: Address data setting
Address data and various characters can be set by either pressing the address data
keys directly, or after pressing the shift key .
Characters shown in the lower part of a key can be set just by pressing the key directly.
Characters shown in the upper part of a key must be set by pressing the key after
pressing the shift key .
Example: To enter an equal sign, press the key.

To enter a positive sign, press the and keys in that order.
Note 2: Unless data is displayed at the corresponding item within the data display area, the
data will not be registered in the NC unit. After data selection using data keys, therefore,
the data must be registered by pressing the INPUT key.
3-2
3-2 Selecting Menu Data

Use this procedure to set non-numeric/alphabetic data:
(1) Place the cursor on the intended item.
- See the description of step (1) in Section 3-1 above.
(2) Select data item from the menu displayed.
" Selected data item is displayed at the position where the cursor has been placed.
Note 1: In the remainder of this manual, selecting data from a menu will be called “menu data
selection”.
For the NC unit, all data can be set by “numeric/alphabetic data setting” or “menu data
selection”, or by combined use of these two methods.
Note 2: After selection from the menu, some specific types of data (such as exponents on the
MACRO VARIABLE display) may be displayed in the data input area, not directly at
the cursor position. If such is the case, the INPUT key must be pressed following
execution of step (2).
Note 3: The menu consists of the following three types of terms:
Terms on display selection
Data
Terms that represent a function
Pressing the menu key corresponding to a term representative of a function displays
that term in reverse form. Re-pressing the same menu key clears the reverse status of
the term.
A reverse display status indicates that the corresponding function is valid.
A normal display status indicates that the corresponding function is invalid.
Example:
Reverse display status
SHAPE Function valid SHAPE Function invalid

ERASE ERASE
3-3 Erasing Data

Erase data as follows:
(1) Place the cursor in the position where the data to be erased is displayed.
- See the description of step (1) in Section 3-1.
(2) Press the CANCEL key.
" The data at the cursor position is erased (or cleared to 0).
Note: You may be able to erase data line-by-line or to erase the entire displayed data at one
time.
Some types of data, however, cannot be erased by using the CANCEL key.
3-3
3-4 Modifying Data

Modify data as follows:
(1) Place the cursor in the position where the data to be modified is displayed.
- See the description of step (1) in Section 3-1.
(2) Set new data.
" The data at the cursor position is overridden with the new data.
3-5 Incremental Input

During data setting, you may see the function name [INCRMENT INPUT] in a menu.
Using this function, you can set desired data just by selecting an incremental or decremental
value for the original data.
Effectively use this function when increasing or reducing displayed data.
The procedure for using the incremental input function is as follows:
(1) Press the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu key.
" The display of [INCRMENT INPUT] changes to reverse display status.
(2) Select an incremental or decremental value for the original data.
Example: To reduce the data of “12.05” by –0.1:
– 0 ! 1
Press in in that order.
" The selected value is displayed in the data input area.
" The original data changes by the value that was selected in step (2) above.
In the example shown above, the original data changes to “11.95” (= 12.05 − 0.1).
3-6 Saving Data onto the Hard Disk

This NC unit is designed so that machining programs are saved onto the hard disk. If the NC unit
is accidentally turned off by a sudden power interruption or other events, entered data may not
be saved. During data entry, therefore, perform the following operations as appropriate for data
storage:
Press the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu key or change the PROGRAM display to another one
even halfway to save the machining program as far as it is prepared.
If, moreover, the NC unit should be turned off during the operation of the hard disk, saved data
may be damaged. Store machining programs, therefore, onto IC memory cards or other media.
# Never fail to back up and store every machining program of importance onto an IC memory
card, an external memory or other media.
The machining programs saved on the hard disk may not be restored if the hard disk
CAUTION
should fail in function.
3-4
3-7 Naming Machining Programs

Machining programs can be specified by a name (or a work number) composed of up to 32
characters. For the use of numerals only, however, a program name may be up to eight digits
long (from 1 to 99999999).
- Characters available
Letters (capital and small: A to Z and a to z), numerals, and the following symbols:
“+” “–“ “_” and “.”
It should be noted here that no distinction is made between capital and small letters. That is, a
new program cannot be named “aBC” if a program with the name “ABC” already exists in the
storage area concerned. Moreover, the program name must not begin with a period (.).
3-5
- NOTE -
3-6 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS 4
4 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL STATUS
4-1 POSITION Display

Function:
This display shows various types of information about the operational status of the machine and
the workpiece-machining status.
Remarks:
When the POSITION display is selected, the various functions required for manual operation or
automatic operation will be displayed at the menu display area. The usage of each such menu is
described in chapters related to manual operation and automatic operation.
4-1-1 Data display
1. Displayed data with the [COMMAND] menu item in normal display
[2]
[1] [3] [3]
[4]
[5] [5]
[6] [7] [8]

[6] [7] [8] [12] [13]
[9]
[10]
[11] [15]
[10] [10] [14]
D740S3002E
H740S3D040E 4-1
2. Displayed data with the [COMMAND] menu item in highlighted display
[22]
[23] [23] [23]
[16] [18] [20]
[24]
[17] [19] [21]
D740S3003E
3. Display data description

Current X, Y, Z, mm (in.) Current position of the tool tip on each axis in the workpiece coordinate
[1]
position A, C degrees system
Work number of the program being executed
WNo. a b
( a’ b’)
a
Work numbers
[2] WNo. — a’
b Identification of MAZATROL program or EIA/ISO program
b’
(For data items a’ and b’, data is displayed only during execution of
subprograms.)
- If the program being executed is a MAZATROL program:
UNo. a - b
a : Unit number
b : Sequence number
[3] UNo. —
- If the program being executed is an EIA/ISO program:
UNo. a - b
a : Sequence number
b : Block number
- Number of the tool being mounted on the spindle
[4] TNo. — TNo. a
a : Number of the tool being mounted on the spindle
Actual quantity of machined workpieces and the preset number of
workpieces to be machined (Parts count)
[5] PC Pieces PC a ( b )
a : Actual quantity of machined workpieces
b : Preset number of workpieces to be machined
4-2
- Number and name of the tool currently mounted on the spindle
- If an eight-digit T-command code is set, the number of the tool being
used will be displayed at TNo. The group number will be displayed in
parentheses in that case.
[6] TNo. — TNo. a
( b )
a : Number of the tool currently mounted on the spindle
b : Name of the tool currently mounted on the spindle
(or group number for an eight-digit T-code format)
- Number and name of the standby tool
- If an eight-digit T-command code is set, then among the entire
corresponding command group, only the number of the tool to be
used will be displayed at TNo.
[7] TNo. — TNo. a
( b )
a : Number of the standby tool
b : Name of the standby tool
(or group number for an eight-digit T-code format)
Number of the indexed magazine pocket and name of the tool
MAGAZNPKNo. a
[8] MAGAZNPKNo. — ( b )
a : Number of the indexed magazine pocket
b : Name of the tool
[9] UNIT — Name of the program unit currently being executed
Number and amount of tool offsetting
T-OFFSET D# ( a ) b
H# ( a’ ) X
Y c’
[10] T-OFFSET Z
a : Number of the tool diameter offset
a’ : Number of the tool length offset
b : Amount of the tool diameter offset
c’ : Amount of the tool length offset in X-, Y- and Z-axis direction
[11] — — Graphic presentation of the tool being mounted on the spindle
[12] ( ) — Selected spindle gear number
min–1
(rpm) Number of revolutions per minute of the spindle
[13] M. SPDL
m/min
(feet/min) Peripheral speed of the spindle
mm/min
(in./min) Current rate of feed per minute
[14] FEED mm/rev

(in./rev) Current rate of feed per revolution
°/min Rate of feed of the rotation axis

[15] Load meter % Load status of each axis
X, Y, Z, mm (in.) Current position of the tool tip on each axis in the workpiece coordinate
[16] POSITION A, C degrees system
X, Y, Z, mm (in.)
[17] MACHINE degrees Current position of the machine in the machine coordinate system
A, C
X, Y, Z, mm (in.)
[18] BUFFER degrees Moving distance of each axis in the next block to be executed
A, C
X, Y, Z, mm (in.) The remaining distance of movement of each axis that exists in the
[19] REMAIN A, C degrees block currently being executed
NEXT COMMAND
[20] — G-, M-, T- and B-codes preset in the next block to be executed
G, M, T, B
4-3

X, Y, Z, mm (in.)
[21] WPC Workpiece zero-point position in the machine coordinate system
A, C degrees
Work number and name of the program being executed
WNo. a b c
( a’ b’ ) ( c’ )
[22] WNo. — The meaning of data a, b, a’ and b’ is the same as for [2].
c, c’: Name of the program (display of the leading 16 characters)
(Items a’, b’ and c’ are displayed only during execution of sub-
programs.)

UNo. a - a’ - a’’
a : Number of the unit being executed
a’ : Number of the sequence being executed
[23] UNo. — a’’ : Number of the block being executed
UNo. a - a’
a : Number of the sequence being executed
a’ : Number of the block being executed
- Display of modal information
<MODAL>
[24] — - Title and data of G codes which belong to group 15 and 20 are not
S, F, B, M, G
displayed.
Note 1: The data items [18] BUFFER and [20] NEXT COMMAND are not displayed for the block
succeeding such blocks as follows:
- Block including G28 or G30
- Block consisting of EOB (End of Block) code only
During execution of a MAZATROL program, the data items are not displayed when the
internal control commands are equivalent to the commands above.
Note 2: Commands which do not exist in the program can be displayed for outer corner
machining with diameter offsetting, etc. because a connecting tool path is auto-
inserted.
Note 3: The BUFFER [18], REMAIN [19], and POSITION [16] distances, whose standard display
refers to the machine coordinate system (composed of orthogonal axes of mechanical
motion), can be given in values of the programming coordinate system (established in
accordance with the angular positions of the A- and C-axes) by setting bit 1, 2, and 3 of
parameter SU153 to “1,” respectively.
4-4
4-1-2 Data registration
On the POSITION display, the following data can be registered:
1. Parts count
A. Number of machined workpieces (a, item [5])

After machining, the total number of machined workpieces will be calculated and displayed at a
of item [5], if “1” (counting valid) is set in the NUMBER item of the end unit in the program.
B. Target number of workpieces to be machined (b, item [5])

This value is used for quantitative restriction of workpieces to be machined.
When the total number of machined workpieces reaches the value set here, the machine will
stop.
(1) Place the cursor on the PC data item.
PC 5 ( 10)
↑ ↑
a b
- To change the number of machined workpieces, move the cursor to position a.

- To set the target number of workpieces to be machined, move the cursor to position b.
(2) Set new data.
- Key in new data using the numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key to register the
data.
2. Counter setting
The area on the screen where the coordinates of the various axes are displayed is referred to as
counter, and modification of the coordinates displayed on the counter is referred to as counter
setting.
During the manual operation mode, the coordinates of each axis displayed on the current
position counter, item [1] , can be freely changed as required.
(1) Select the manual operation mode.
(2) Place the cursor on the coordinate data to be changed.
X 0. WNo.
Y 0. UNo.
Z 0. TNo.
A 0. PC
- After calling up the cursor on the screen with the cursor key, move the cursor to the data
you want to change.
(3) Set new coordinate data.
4-5
4-1-3 Display operations
1. Work number selection

Any of the work numbers displayed on the POSITION display (that is, the work numbers of the
programs which can be used for automatic operation) can be selected.
The procedure is as follows:
(1) Press the [WORK No.] menu key.
! The menu item changes to a reverse display status and a work number listing window
is displayed.
(2) Set a work number.
! The work number of the program which can be used for automatic operation will be
selected.
2. Command display
Machine positions and modal information can be displayed. To check further details, see the item
in Subsection 4-1-1 “Data display” above.
(1) Press the [COMMAND] menu key.
! The menu item changes to a reverse display status and commands are displayed.
- Pressing the menu key once again releases the reverse status of the menu item and
creates the normal display.
3. Shape drawing
The shape data in the selected program can be displayed in the window.
See the Section 2-4 “Windows” for further details.
4-6
4-2 TRACE Display

Function:
- This display can be used for displaying the operational status of machine in graphic form.
- This display is useful for displaying the tool movements synchronized with actual machine
actions including an ATC action.
- Machining shape and path of the tool tip can be displayed on this display. Even in the locked
status of machine, the movement of the tool indicated on this display will continue. The running
status of the machining program can therefore be checked without actually operating the
machine.
Remarks:
- A plane to be used to display machining shape and path of the tool tip can be designated.
- Scale values used for machining shape display and the tool tip path display can be changed.
- Machining shape display and the tool tip path display can be stored.
4-2-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[7]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[2]
[1]
[6]
D740S3004E
4-7

Machining shape that has been defined by the program. (For point-
(Shape) — machining, this data is displayed with a purple line. For line- or face-
[1] machining, this data is displayed with a green line.)
Path of the tool tip (The path of the tool tip is displayed with a white line,
(Tool path) —
and the tool tip itself is displayed with a red ▼ mark.)
X, Y, Z, mm (in.) Current position of the tool tip with respect to the machine origin (or to the
[2]
A, C degrees workpiece origin with the [POSITION DISP] menu function selected).
WNo. — Work number of the program currently being executed.
[3] If a subprogram is currently being executed, the work number of that
( ) —
subprogram will be displayed in parentheses.
[4] UNo. — Number and name of the program unit currently being executed.
[5] TNo. — Number and name of the tool mounted on the spindle
Integral time elapsed during automatic cutting (for checking the actual
[6] TIME h: m’ s”
automatic operation time of the machining program.)
0 Scale value of graphic form (automatically determined on the initial display
[7] mm (in.)
according to the machining shape)
Note: The color of the ▼ mark for the tool tip can be changed by parameter SU14, as
detailed in the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-code List.
4-2-2 Displaying machining shape and tool tip

(1) Press the [WORK No.] menu key.
! The display status of [WORK No.] will then be reversed.
(2) Press the numeric key(s) that corresponds to the work number of the program to be
executed, and then press the INPUT key.
! The input work number will then be displayed in the WNo. item (date portion [3]) and
the reverse-display status of [WORK No.] will be cleared.
(3) Press the [PART SHAPE] menu key.
! This will cause the display status of [PART SHAPE] to reverse and the machining
shapes to be displayed continuously. After displaying the machining shapes, the
reverse-display status of [PART SHAPE] will be cleared.
Note 1: If the procedure described below in Subsection 4-2-3 “Plane select” is carried out, then
it becomes possible to select the plane or 3-D view on which machining shapes are to
be displayed.
Note 2: If the procedure described below in Subsection 4-2-4 “Change of scale values” is
carried out, it becomes possible for available machining shapes to be displayed in
enlarged or reduced size.
If no steps of this procedure are carried out, the available machining shapes will be
displayed with the scaling factor which has been automatically determined.
Note 3: The indication of the coordinates during display of the machining shape is always given
with respect to the machine origin, irrespective of the selection of the [POSITION
DISP] menu function.
4-8
(4) Press the [POSITION DISP] menu key.
! The display status of [POSITION DISP] will be reversed and the title of the data column
COORDINATE changed to POSITION.
The indication of the coordinates will then be given with respect to the workpiece origin.
Otherwise (with the [POSITION DISP] menu function cancelled and the menu item
displayed normally) it is given with respect to the machine origin.
Note: The selection of the [POSITION DISP] menu function (or reverse display of the menu
item) is not simply cancelled by a display changeover.
(5) Press the start button.
! The lamp of the start button will light up and the path of the tool tip (marked with ▼)
synchronized with the machine action will be displayed.
- After the entire path of the tool tip has been displayed (i.e., after execution of the program
has been completed), the lamp of the start button will go out.
Note 1: The machining shape that has been displayed in procedural step (3) above can be
erased by pressing the [SHAPE ERASE] menu key.
Note 2: The path of the tool tip can be erased by pressing the [PATH ERASE] menu key.
Note 3: If [STORE] is displayed reversely by depression of the [STORE] menu key, the shape
data will be preserved permanently to prevent its destruction due to display change-
over.
4-2-3 Plane select

Follow the procedure below to select the plane or 3-D view on which the machining pattern is to
be displayed.
One plane Two planes Three planes

3-D view
XY XZ YZ XY-XZ YX-YZ XZ-XY XY-XZ-XY
" # # # # — — #
": The plane selected initially

#: Selectable —: Not selectable
(1) Press the [PLANE CHANGE] menu key.

! The following menu will then be displayed in the menu display area:
XY XZ YZ XZ-XY XY-XZ YX-YZ 3-D

1 PLANES 1 PLANES 1 PLANES 2 PLANES 2 PLANES 2 PLANES
(2) Press the menu key that corresponds to the plane or 3-D view to be selected.
! The selected plane or 3-D view will then be displayed in the data display area.
- The particular machining shape or the path of the tool tip will be erased from the screen if
plane or 3-D view changeover is carried out when the machining shape and the path of the
tool tip are on the display.
! The available machining shapes will be continuously displayed on the selected plane
or 3-D view.
4-9
4-2-4 Change of scale values

The particular machining shape can be displayed in enlarged or reduced size.
1. If a plane has been selected

(1) Press the [SCALE CHANGE] menu key.
! This will cause the display status of [SCALE CHANGE] to reverse and the cursor to
appear in nearly the center of the screen.
(2) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the central position of that portion to be enlarged
or reduced.
If this portion is to be
enlarged or reduced, move
the cursor as indicated by the
arrow.
D735S1008
Note: This operation is not required if the entire machining shape is to be enlarged or
reduced.
(3) Specify new scale data with the appropriate numeric data key(s), and then press the INPUT
key.
! This will cause the reverse-display status of [SCALE CHANGE] to be cleared and the
input scale data to be displayed in the scale display area (data portion [7]). Sub-
sequently, the machining shape and the path of the tool tip will be erased auto-
matically.
! The available machining shapes will be displayed continuously at the new scaling
factor.
2. If 3-D view has been selected

If the [3-D] menu key has been pressed during plane-select operation, the 3-D display viewpoint
can be changed. In addition, the entire machining shape can be displayed in enlarged or reduced
size. However, partial enlargement or reduction of the machining shape is not possible.
! This will cause the display status of [SCALE CHANGE] to reverse and a cubic to be
displayed in nearly the center of the screen.
(2) If the 3-D view is to be enlarged or reduced, carry out step (3) of 1. above.
- Proceed as follows if a change is to be made to the 3-D display viewpoint.
(3) Press the cursor key that corresponds to the direction in which the viewpoint is to be
changed.
! This will cause erasure of the machining shape and tool-tip path that are currently
being displayed.
4-10
- Each time the key is pressed, the cubic rotates as if the viewpoint was shifted
upward by five degrees.
- Each time the key is pressed, the cubic rotates as if the viewpoint was shifted
downward by five degrees.
- Each time the key is pressed, the cubic rotates as if the viewpoint was shifted to the
right by five degrees.
- Each time the key is pressed, the cubic rotates as if the viewpoint was shifted to the
left by five degrees.
! The cubic display will then be cleared. In addition, the reverse-display status of
[SCALE CHANGE] will be released and a new viewpoint registered.
! The machining shapes existing after the viewpoint has been changed will be displayed
continuously.
4-2-5 [Counter Erase]

Select the [Counter Erase] item under [Setup] on the menu bar to hide the digital items (WNo.,
UNo., TNo., COORDINATE or POSITION, and TIME).
4-11
4-3 AUTO MEASURE Display

Function
This display displays the measurement result existing when a workpiece measurement unit
(WORK MES) in the program has been executed.
4-3-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[7]
[5] [8]
[1] [3]
[9]
[10]
[2] [4] [6] [11]
[12]
[14]
[13]
[15]
[16]
D740S3005E

X, Y, Z, mm (in.) Current position of the tool tip on each axis in the workpiece
[1] POSITION
A, C degrees coordinate system
X, Y, Z, mm (in.)
[2] MACHINE Current position of the machine in the machine coordinate system
A, C degrees
X, Y, Z, mm (in.)
[3] BUFFER Moving distance of each axis in the next block to be executed
A, C degrees
X, Y, Z, mm (in.) The remaining distance of movement of each axis that exists in the
[4] REMAIN
A, C degrees block currently being executed
NEXT COMMAND
[5] — G-, M-, T- and B-codes preset in the next block to be executed
G, M, T, B
X, Y, Z, mm (in.)
[6] WPC Workpiece zero-point position in the machine coordinate system
A, C degrees
4-12
WNo. a b c
( a’ b’ ) ( c’ )
a, a’ : Work number
[7] WNo. —
b, b’ : Identification of MAZATROL or EIA/ISO program
c, c’ : Name of the program (in the leading 16 characters)
(Items a’, b’ and c’ are displayed only during execution of sub-
programs.)
UNo. a - a’
[8] UNo. —
UNo. a - a’
Measurement target data that has been specified in the measurement
X, Y, Z, mm (in.)
[9] TARGET DATA
degrees unit (The data is displayed upon the start of execution of the
C
measurement unit)
MEASURED X, Y, Z, mm (in.)
[10] Measurement data calculated by measurement point
DATA C degrees
The machine position where the sensor actually turned on, and the
corresponding axis name. #1 and #2 denote the first and second
measurement positions, respectively.
MEASURE #1 mm (in.)
[11] MEASURE POINT #1 a b
POINT #2 degrees
#2 a b
a: Axis name
b: Measurement point
X, Y, Z, mm (in.)
degrees Wear offset data of the tool
OFFSET C
[12]
AMOUNT LENGTH
mm (in.) Length or diameter offset data for the tool
ACT-φ
TOLERANCE +/X Upper-limit of the tolerance as specified in the measurement unit

[13] mm (in.)
LIMIT -/Z Lower-limit of the tolerance as specified in the measurement unit
Number and name of the sensor tool
TNo. a b c d
[14] SNS-TOOL — a: Tool number

b: Tool name
c: Nominal diameter/nominal size
d: Suffix
Number and name of the tool to be offset
TNo. a b c d
[15] OFS-TOOL — a: Tool number
b: Tool name
c: Nominal diameter/nominal size
d: Suffix
[16] MMS — ON/OFF status of the touch sensor
4-13
4-4 EIA MONITOR Display

Function:
- The currently active block is displayed in a reverse-display status on the program list.
- During block stop, the program section that succeeds the block just completed can be edited.
- The program can be restarted by specifying its starting position using the cursor on the
program list. Existing modal information, however, becomes invalid.
Remarks:
- This display is a special one for EIA/ISO programs.
- EIA/ISO function is an optional function.
- This display is not displayed when the machine is not provided with the EIA/ISO option.
4-4-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[2] ( [3] )
[1]
D740S0107E

Data of the EIA/ISO program.
[1] EIA/ISO program —
The currently active block is displayed in a reverse-display status.
[2] Work number — Work number of the EIA/ISO program.
[3] Program name — Name of the program displayed on the item [2].
4-14
4-4-2 EIA/ISO monitor function
1. The EIA/ISO program that has been selected on the POSITION display are listed on this
display.
During automatic operation, the currently active block is displayed in a reverse-display
status (the program scrolls as operation progresses, and the active section is continually
displayed on the screen).
N0200 G00 X100. Z10.

N0210 G01 Z-40. Active block
N0220 X120. Z-60.
N0230 X125. Z-73.
N0240 X150.
2. Monitoring of subprogram
If the subprogram is an EIA/ISO program, display will change over to the subprogram.
If the subprogram is a MAZATROL program, during execution of the MAZATROL program
the block which calls subprogram of the main program will remain displayed in a reverse-
display status.
4-4-3 Editing functions

(1) Bring the machine to a block stop during automatic operation (for example, press the feed
hold button).
(2) Press the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu key.
! The line of the block just completed will be displayed in violet, and the cursor will
appeare at the beginning of the next line. (The area from the cursor position to the end
of the program can now be edited.)
Cursor appears here.
M
N0010 G01 X100. Z2. Line of the block just completed.
N0020 X99. Z0. (displayed in violet)
N0030 X90. Z-10.
N0040 X93.5 Z-15.3
N0050 X100. Z-40.
N0060 G00 X102.
N0070 Z2.
N0080 X70.
N0090 G28 U0. W0.
M
(3) Edit the program.

- Similar editing operations to EIA/ISO program editing operations can be carried out.
Refer to the EIA/ISO Programming Manual for further details. However, two programs
cannot be edited simultaneously on the EIA MONITOR display.
(4) Press the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu key.
(5) Execute automatic operation (by pressing the start button).
Note 1: Operation will progress according to the edited program.

Extra care is therefore required during program editing.
4-15
Note 2: An alarm will result if the start button is pressed during program editing on this display.
Before pressing the start button, be sure to terminate the program editing operation by
pressing the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu key.
4-4-4 Restart 2 unmodal function

(1) Move the cursor to the block line to be selected.
- The position to be selected can be searched for using the [SEARCH] menu function as
required. Refer to the EIA/ISO Programming Manual for the usage of the menu function.
…
N0010 G01 X100. Z2.
Cursor N0020 X 99. Z0.
N0030 X 90. Z-10.
(2) Press the [RESTART2 NONMODAL] menu key.

! The line where the cursor is present will change to a reverse-display status and the
starting position will be set.
…
N0010 G01 X100. Z2.

Highlighted N0020 X 99. Z0.
display N0030 X 90. Z-10.
(3) Execute automatic operation (by pressing the start button).

! Automatic operation will restart from the reverse-display section.
Note 1: To cancel the selection, press the RESET key. The selection cannot be cancelled by
changing over the display.
Note 2: To change the selection, repeat steps (1) and (2) above once again.
Note 3: The restart function and the restart 2 unmodal function differ as follows:
Restart function Restart 2 unmodal function

- Program data is calculated from the head of the The entire program data before the designated block is
program up to the designated block, and during this ignored, and the program is restarted from that block,
time, modal information setting, program error based on the modal information currently valid. Therefore,
checking, etc. are performed. modal data should be previously designated.
- Also, since the coordinates present before the Before executing step (1) described above, set required
designated block have been stored, positioning at modal data using the MDI mode.
those coordinates is performed before the designated See the description on MDI for further details.
block is executed.
4-16
4-5 MACHINING - MONITORING Display

Function:
- Displaying the changes in the machining load of the spindle and each axis, in the spindle speed,
and the output characteristics of the spindle.
4-5-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [1]
[4] [4] [4] [4]
[2]
[4] [4]
[4] [4] [4] [4]
[3] [3] [4] [4]

[3] [3]
[3] [3]
[3] [3]
D740S3006E

- Work number of the program being executed
WNo. a b ( c )
[1] WNo. — a: Work number
b: Program type (MAZATROL or EIA/ISO)
c: Program name
X, Y, Z, mm (in.) - Current position of the tool tip on each axis in the workpiece
[2] POSITION
A, C degrees coordinate system
- Peak and average load values for the monitoring data currently
displayed.
( a )
%
PEAK b
[3] LOAD or
AVERAGE c
kW
a: Number of the corresponding graph
b: Peak value
c: Average value
4-17

- Graphic display of spindle output characteristics or changes in
machining load of the spindle and feed axes.
( a ) b
c e
d
a: Graph number
b: Graph title
1. For a graph of spindle output characteristics
c: Spindle output (kW)
d: Spindle speed (min–1)
[4] Graphic display — e: Spindle output characteristic curve (in red) with respect to
the spindle speed.
The output peak and average output (for the displayed data
samplings) are indicated respectively by a red disk $ (in a
position of the abscissa corresponding to the spindle speed
for the output peak) and a white triangle ∆.
2. For a graph of changes in machining load of the spindle and
feed axes
c: Load (%)
d: Sampling time (sec)
e: The load values applied during rapid traverse and cutting
feed are respectively displayed in light blue and green lines.
White and red lines refer to the average load and peak load
during cutting feed.
4-5-2 Selecting graphs to be displayed

Two or four graphs can be displayed at the same time on the MACHINING - MONITORING
display.
- Four-graph display mode
Four graphs are displayed squarely at the same time. Process monitoring data from the past of
a maximum of 80 seconds to the present is displayed in this mode.
- Two-graph display mode
Two graphs are displayed vertically on the display at the same time. Process monitoring data
from the past of a maximum of 160 seconds to the present is displayed in this mode.
Note: Peak and average values displayed are those calculated from the monitoring data
currently being displayed graphically.
4-18
The following data can be displayed graphically in this mode. The selectable items vary from
model to model.
Display item Display example Description

- Output characteristics of the spindle.
Red line:
Spindle output characteristics against the spindle
speed.
Yellow line:
Maximum rotational speed for the current tool
MILLING (only displayed for a valid setting [> 0]).
1 SPINDLE 1 Red disk $:
OUTPUT Crossing point of the maximum output value and
the corresponding spindle speed (within the
displayed data samplings).
White triangle ∆:
Crossing point of the average output value of the
displayed data samplings and the current spindle
speed.
- Changes in the machining load of the spindle.
Light blue line:
Load value applied during rapid traverse.
Green line:
Machining load values applied during cutting feed.
MILLING
2 Red line:
SPINDLE 1 LOAD
Maximum machining load value applied during
cutting feed.
White line:
Average machining load value applied during
cutting feed.
- Changes in the machining load of the controlled
axes (displayed in the same manner as for the
X-AXIS LOAD
load of the spindle).
Y-AXIS LOAD
3 Z-AXIS LOAD
A-AXIS LOAD
C-AXIS LOAD
(1) Press the [2 GRAPH] (or [4 GRAPH]) menu key.

! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the following dialogue box for graph
selection will appear:
(A) 2-graph display mode (B) 4-graph display mode
4-19
(2) Using the Tab key and the cursor keys, select the type of graph for each display section.
- Move the focus to the item corresponding to the desired display area by using the Tab key,
and then select the type of the desired graph by using the cursor keys.
Item with the

focus

! The dialogue box for graph selection will be closed, the reverse display of the menu
item cleared and the graphic display will be made now in each section according to the
settings.
Note 1: The same data cannot be displayed on multiple graph sections. The setting for such a
display will cause the alarm 401 ILLEGAL FORMAT to be given.
Note 2: Selection of graph type can be repeated as often as required in the same display
mode.
4-5-3 Setting the display time scale

The time scale for graphic display can be changed in steps as required for an overview or an
enlarged view in detail.
(1) Press the [CHANGE TIME] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the following dialogue box for time
scale selection will appear:
(2) Using the cursor keys, select a time scale as required.

- The knob displayed in the dialogue box can be moved by pressing a cursor key. Moving
the knob to the right (LONG) or the left (SHORT) prolongs or shortens the time which
corresponds to the right end of the abscissa for the graphs concerned.
Increasing the time scale Decreasing the time

for an enlarged view scale for an overview
4-20
- The display time can be selected from among eight or seven steps as shown below:
Step 2-graph display mode 4-graph display mode

LONG 1 160 80
2 80 40
3 40 20
4 20 10
5 10 5
6 5 2.5
7 2.5 1.3
SHORT 8 1.3
Unit: sec

! The dialogue box for time scale selection will be closed, the reverse display of the
menu item cleared and the graphic display will be made now in each section according
to the settings.
4-21
4-6 DRILL - MONITOR Display

Function:
- Setting the threshold for the cutting-load detection type of drill auto-pecking cycle.
4-6-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1]
[5] [6] [7] [8]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[9]
[10]
[11]
D740S3007E

WNo. a b
( c )
[ a’ b’ ]
( c’ )
a
Work numbers
[1] WNo. — a’
b
Identification of MAZATROL program or EIA/ISO program
b’
c
Name of the program
c’
* For data items a’ and b’, data is displayed only during execution of
subprograms.
4-22
UNo. a - a’
[2] UNo. —
UNo. a - a’
Name of the program unit currently being executed

[3] UNIT — UNIT: a
a : Name of the unit
Current X, Y, Z, mm (in.) Current position of the tool tip on each axis in the workpiece coordinate
[4]
position A, C degrees system
[5] TNo. — Number of the tool being used
[6] TOOL — Name (type) of the tool being used
[7] NOM-φ/NOM. mm (in.) Nominal diameter or nominal size and suffix of the tool being used
[8] MAT. — Material of the tool being used
[9] PEAK N%m Peak value of the machining torque
[10] THRESHOLD N%m Threshold for pecking by a drill (Note 1)
Graphic display of the machining torque of the milling spindle.
a
c
b
[11] Graphic display —
a: Machining torque (N%m)
b: Sampling time (sec)
c: Machining torque of the spindle is displayed in a green line.
Red and yellow lines refer respectively to the peak value (for the
displayed data samplings) and the threshold for pecking by a
drill.
Note 1: Threshold is only displayed when a drill is currently mounted on the spindle.
Note 2: The unit “N%m” denotes the torque (torsional moment) of the axis. If a disk with radius of
1 meter, for example, is rotated at a force of 1 newton, a torque of 1 N%m will be
imposed on the axis of rotation.
4-6-2 Setting the threshold

On the DRILL - MONITOR display, the pecking threshold level for the cutting-load detection type
of drill auto-pecking cycle can be set monitoring the machining torque of the spindle. This drill
auto-pecking cycle will execute the pecking process only when the machining torque exceeds
the threshold level. The setting procedure is as follows:
(1) Drill an actual workpiece using the tool for which the threshold is to be set.
- Select a drilling hole depth that does not cause clogging with any chips. The drilling hole
depth should not exceed the value of [3 × tool diameter of the drill].
(2) Press the [BORDER VALUE] menu key.
(3) Enter the desired threshold seeing the graph-displayed machining torque and peak torque.
! The entered pecking threshold level is displayed in a yellow solid line on the graph.
! The same value is set in the corresponding item on the TOOL DATA display.
4-23
Note 1: Even if the threshold is changed during execution of the cutting-load detection-type drill
auto-pecking cycle, that new value will not become valid until the machining cycle is
completed.
Note 2: Do not perform the cutting-load detection type of drill auto-pecking cycle if the drill has
a tool diameter of 4 mm or less or is made of a material other than high-speed steel.
Otherwise, tool damage may result since the machining torque cannot be detected
accurately under those conditions.
4-6-3 Scale change
1. Automatic vertical scale change

When a new drill is mounted onto the milling spindle, the scale for the vertical axis of the cutting
torque graph is changed automatically. The cutting resistance is calculated theoretically from the
tool diameter of the drill and then the optimum scale is selected automatically from nine types (1,
2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 200 and 500 N%m).
Note 1: The scale will not be changed if a non-drilling tool is mounted onto the spindle.
Note 2: If automatic scale change has not occurred in the past, 10 N%m will be selected as the
initial value.
2. Manual vertical scale change

The scale for the vertical axis of the cutting torque graph can be changed to the desired value in
manual mode. The procedure is as follows:
(2) Enter the desired scale.
- The data that can be entered ranges from 0 to 655.35 N%m.
! The graph is cleared and then a new one is displayed with the new scale.
! During automatic operation, the graph is cleared temporarily and monitoring com-
mences from the beginning of the graph with the new scale.
4-24
4-6-4 Setting the display time scale
The time scale for graphic display can be changed in steps as required for an overview or an
enlarged view in detail.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the following dialogue box for time
scale selection will appear:
(2) Using the cursor keys, select a time scale as required.

- The knob displayed in the dialogue box can be moved by pressing a cursor key. Moving
the knob to the right (LONG) or the left (SHORT) prolongs or shortens the time which
corresponds to the right end of the abscissa for the graphs concerned.
Increasing the time scale Decreasing the time

for an enlarged view scale for an overview
- The display time can be selected from among eight steps.
Step Display time (sec)

LONG 1 160
2 80
3 40
4 20
5 10
6 5
7 2.5
SHORT 8 1.3

! The reverse display of the menu item will be cleared and the graphic display will be
made now in each section according to the settings.
4-25
- NOTE -
4-26 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP 5
5 DISPLAYS RELATED TO MACHINING SET UP
5-1 SET UP RECORD Display

Function
Various data required for program execution set-up is displayed.
Remarks
- Printer output of this display allows next set-up to be readily executed.
- Display items of free setting are machine name, workpiece part number, and comment.
5-1-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
A. Workpiece information page
[1] [2]
[3] [6]
[4]
[5] [7]
[8]
[10]
D740S3008E
H740S3E040E 5-1
B. Tool information page
[2]
[9] [9]
[9] [9]
[9] [9]
[10]
D740S3009E

Identification of whether the displayed data is the data within the NC unit
[1] NC or FILE —
or data that has been loaded from file
[2] WNo. — Work No. of the program being selected in the foreground mode.
[3] DATE Y/M/D The date when the program was last edited
[4] MACHINE — Name of the machine
[5] MATERIAL — Material name of the workpiece to be machined
[6] No. — Part number of the workpiece
[7] MEMO — Comments about the set-up
[8] PART SHAPE — Shape view
[9] Tool information — Information on the tools to be used for the machining
Page number being displayed and the total number of pages existing
a/b
a: Page number being displayed
[10] Page — b: Total number of pages existing
The information on the workpiece is given on the first page, that on the
tools given from the second page on so many pages as required for the
number of the tools used for the particular program.
5-2
5-1-2 Data saving/reading
Data on the SET UP RECORD display can be saved on the file.
1. Data saving
(1) Press the [FILE SAVE] menu key.
! The Save File dialogue will be displayed.
(2) Set the desired file name and click the [OK] button.
! Data on the SET UP RECORD display will be saved on the file.
2. Data reading
(1) Press the [FILE LOAD] menu key.
! The Load File dialogue will be displayed.
(2) Set the desired file name and click the [OK] button.
! The data saved on the file will be read into the NC unit. After all the data has been
loaded, the display presents the data sent from the file. On the item [1], FILE is
displayed.
Note: If the display is changed to another display, the data from the file is cleared and the
data of the foreground program is displayed.

The following data items can be set on the SET UP RECORD display:
1. Machine name
(1) Place the cursor on the MACHINE data item.
- Use the cursor keys to call up the cursor and to move it to the desired item.
(2) Enter the name of the machine, and then press the INPUT key.
- Use the alphanumeric data keys to key in the data.
! The entered machine name will be registered and the cursor shifted to the No. data
item.
2. Part number
Part number registration will facilitate the management of the printed data of this display.
(1) Place the cursor on the No. data item.
(2) Enter the part number of the workpiece and then press the INPUT key.
! The entered part number will be registered and the cursor shifted to the MEMO data
item.
5-3
3. Comment
Comments (in one to two lines) about set-up will be quite useful in performing the next job for the
same program.
(1) Place the cursor on the MEMO data item.
(2) Enter comments about the set-up and then press the INPUT key.
! The entered comments will be registered on the first line and the cursor shifted to the
second line. Continue to make comments as required.
5-4
5-2 TOOL LAYOUT Display (Tool Layout Mode)

Function:
- This display mode is used for assigning pocket numbers to the tools to be used for machining
or erasing the registered tool names.
Remarks:
- The operation of assigning pocket numbers to the tools to be used is referred to as tool layout.
- The TOOL LAYOUT display can be used only when executing a MAZATROL program.
The TOOL LAYOUT display provides two operation modes: Tool Layout mode for assigning
pocket numbers to the tools used, and Visual Tool Management mode for foreseeing the tools to
be provided (as an additional or a spare tool) for the particular machining program and number of
workpieces to be machined.
Deselect the [VISUAL TOOL MNG] menu function (by pressing the corresponding menu key to
cancel the highlighting of the menu item) as required to select the Tool Layout mode. Use the
menu selector key as required to display the menu item concerned.
5-2-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [5] [6] [7]
D740S3010E
5-5

[1] CURRENT: PKNo. — Pocket number for the current tool
[2] CURRENT: TOOL — Tool name for the current tool
CURRENT: NOM-φ mm (in.) Nominal diameter of the current tool
[3]
— Suffix (code that identifies tools) for the current tool
[4] STAT. — Status of the current tool (tool life is reached or tool is broken)
[5] NEXT: PKNo. — Pocket number for the next tool
[6] NEXT: TOOL — Tool name for the next tool
NEXT: NOM-φ mm (in.) Nominal diameter of the next tool
[7]
— Suffix (code that identifies tools) for the next tool.
[8] WNo. — Work number of the specified program
Note 1: The CURRENT display section specifies the tools to which the pocket number is
already assigned. That is, the CURRENT display section indicates the current status of
tool registration as it is on the TOOL DATA display.
Note 2: The NEXT display section enumerates all the tools necessary for the execution of the
specified machining program.
5-2-2 Tool layout procedure

(1) Call up the TOOL LAYOUT display on the screen.
! The names and nominal diameters of the tools which have already been registered will
be indicated in the CURRENT display section. (The display section will be blank if no
tools have been registered.)
- The [WORK No.] item will have already been placed in a reverse-display status by the
time that the display is called on the screen.
(2) Using the numeric keys, specify the work number of the machining program to be executed.
Then, press the INPUT key.
! This will cause the reverse-display status of [WORK No.] to be cleared and the
specified work number to be displayed in the WORK No. item [8].
! The names and nominal diameters of all the tools to be used under the program whose
work number has been input will be indicated in the NEXT display section. Under the
PKNo. item, 0 will be displayed for any tool name.
(3) Subsequent operations differ according to several factors such as the registration status of
the tools which are already registered in the CURRENT display section. However, separate
or combined use of the three methods described below makes it possible in any cases to
assign pocket numbers to all the tools to be used. Select the most appropriate method
according to the particular tool-registration or other status.
A. Pocket-number shift
B. Automatic pocket-number assignment
C. Manual pocket-number assignment
5-6
A. Pocket-number shift
If there are the same tools as those which are already registered in the CURRENT display
section among the tools enumerated in the NEXT display section, it is no longer necessary
then to assign pocket numbers manually to such tools. The relevant pocket numbers can be
shifted as they are. This method is referred to as pocket-number shift. Once a pocket-
number shift operation has been carried out, it suffices just to assign pocket numbers to the
remaining tools.
(A-1) Press the [PKNo. SHIFT] menu key.
! This will cause the display status of [PKNo. SHIFT] to reverse.
(A-2) Press the INPUT key.
! If there are the same tools as those which are already registered in the CURRENT
display section among the tools enumerated on the NEXT display section, then the
pocket numbers already assigned under PKNo. of the corresponding tool names will
be shifted automatically to the NEXT display section and will be indicated in reverse-
display status.
Example: If the following data is displayed when the work number of a machining
program has been input in the procedural step (2) above:
CURRENT NEXT WNo.123
PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ STAT. PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ
1 FCE MILL 80. A 0 FCE MILL 80. A
2 END MILL 10. A 0 END MILL 10. A
3 TAP M8. 0 CTR-DR 20.
4 CHAMFER 20. A 0 DRILL 10.
5 0 DRILL 7.
6 0 TAP M8.
Of the tools being indicated in the NEXT display section, a face-mill with a nominal
diameter of 80 mm, end-mill with a nominal diameter of 10 mm, and a tap with a
nominal diameter of 8 mm are already registered in the CURRENT display section (in
dotted line). Here, if procedural steps (A-1) and (A-2) are carried out, then the display
will change as follows:
5 0 DRILL 7.
6 3 TAP M8.
The pocket numbers in the CURRENT display section will shift automatically and the
display status of the pocket numbers in the NEXT display section will be reversed.
! Subsequently, the reverse-display status of [PKNo. SHIFT] will be cleared.
Note: In the above example, when pocket numbers are assigned to all the remaining
tools (that is, a spot drill with a nominal diameter of 20 mm, a drill with a nominal
diameter of 10 mm, and a drill with a nominal diameter of 7 mm) by method B. or
C. described below, the pocket-number assignment procedure for all the tools will
be completed.
5-7
B. Automatic pocket-number assignment

This method is one in which, among the tools enumerated in the NEXT display section, all
those with pocket numbers of 0 (undetermined) are automatically assigned serial pocket
numbers, starting with the top tool name on the display first.
Note: In this method, the data being indicated in the CURRENT display section will be
disregarded.
(B-1) Press the [PKNo. ASSIGN] menu key.
! This will cause the display status of [PKNo. ASSIGN] to reverse.
(B-2) Press the INPUT key.
! Serial pocket numbers will then be automatically assigned to each tool that has a
pocket number of 0 (undetermined), starting with the top one on the display first.
Example 1:
When the names of the tools to be Here, if procedural steps (B-1) and (B-2)
used are being indicated in the NEXT are carried out, then the display will
display section as shown below: change as follows:
NEXT WNo.123 NEXT WNo.123

PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ PKNo. PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ
0 CTR-DR 20. 3 CTR-DR 20.
0 DRILL 10. 4 DRILL 10.
0 TAP M8. 6 TAP M8.
Example 2:
In the example shown below, if pocket Here, if procedural steps (B-1) and (B-2)
numbers are already assigned to the are carried out, then the display will
face-mill with a nominal diameter of change as follows:
80 mm, the end-mill with a nominal
diameter of 10 mm, and the tap with a
nominal diameter of 8 mm (see the
example in the description of “Pocket-
number shift” above):
NEXT WNo.123 NEXT WNo.123

PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ PKNo. PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ
0 CTR-DR 20. 4 CTR-DR 20.
3 TAP M8. 3 TAP M8.
Except the pocket numbers already assigned (i.e., pocket number 1, 2, and 3), serial
ones will be assigned starting with the top tool name on the display first.
! Subsequently, the reverse-display status of [PKNo. ASSIGN] will be cleared.
5-8
C. Manual pocket-number and tool interference data assignment
This method is one in which the tools being indicated in the NEXT display section are
respectively assigned serial pocket numbers and tool interference data one by one.
(C-1) Press the cursor key to call the cursor on the screen.
(C-2) Press the the cursor key to move the cursor to the row of the tool name to which a pocket
number must be assigned is displayed.
Example: If the NEXT display section is presented as shown below (see the example given in
the description of “Pocket-number shift” above) and pocket number 4 and tool inter-
ference data are to be assigned to a spot drill with a nominal diameter of 20 mm:
NEXT WNo.123
PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ
1 FCE MILL 80. A
2 END MILL 10. A
0 CTR-DR 20.
0 DRILL 10.
0 DRILL 10.
3 TAP M8.
Move the cursor to this position.
(C-3) Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the pocket number to be assigned. Then,
press the INPUT key.
! The input pocket number will then be displayed in the position where the cursor is
blinking.
(C-4) Pressing the cursor key moves cursor to the right of the suffix.
! The following menu will then be displayed.
ORDINARY LARGE MAG DIR + MAG DIR - SMALL

DIAMETER L + - S
The menu shows types of intra-magazine interference data:

ORDINARY DIAMETER ......Tool which completely fits into that pocket.
LARGE L .............................Tool which interferes with both next tools in the pocket.
MAG DIR + +........................Tool that interferes with the tool of a larger pocket number.
MAG DIR – – ........................Tool that interferes with the tool of a smaller pocket number.
SMALL S..............................Diameter of a tool which can be placed in a pocket other than
that which interfere with the tool indicated by “MAG DIR +” or
“MAG DIR –”.
5-9
(C-5) Press the menu key that corresponds to the tool interference data you want to set.
! The tool interference data will be displayed at the cursor.
- In the example shown above, press the [LARGE L] menu key.
The display will then change as follows:
NEXT WNo.123

1 FCE MILL 80. A
2 END MILL 10. A
4 CTR-DR 20. L
0 DRILL 10.
0 DRILL 7.
3 TAP M8.
Note: By repeating procedural steps (C-2) to (C-5), it is possible to assign the desired
pocket numbers to all tools whose pocket number display is 0 (undetermined).
However, it is not possible to assign the same pocket number as that which has
already been used in the NEXT display section.
After pocket numbers have been assigned to all the required tools in the NEXT display sec-
tion by one or more of the methods A., B. and C., proceed with the operations described
below.
(4) Press the [LAYOUT FINISH] menu key.

! This will cause the display status of [LAYOUT FINISH] to reverse.
! The names of the tools to which pocket numbers have been assigned in the NEXT
display section will then be indicated in the CURRENT display section in order of
pocket number. The display in the NEXT display section will remain unchanged.
Note: Even if the pocket numbers that have been assigned in the NEXT display section
are already used in the CURRENT display section, the tool names with the former
will govern and those with the latter will be erased.
Example: If the data in the CURRENT and NEXT display sections is as shown below:

5 6 DRILL 7.
6 3 TAP M8.
5-10
Here, if procedural steps (4) and (5) are carried out, the display will change as follows:
4 CTR-DR 20. 5 DRILL 10.
6 DRILL 7. 3 TAP M8.
The chamfering cutter with a nominal diameter of 20 mm that has been registered
under pocket number 4 will be erased automatically (see Note above).
! The reverse-display status of [LAYOUT FINISH] will be cleared.
All the tool layout operations have been finished.
Note: If, after you have pressed the [LAYOUT FINISH] menu key following selection of
intra-magazine interference data, tools that are likely to interfere with other tools or
pockets are found, then the layout operation will stop in the middle and the data
display of the tools that are likely to interfere will be highlighted red.
5-2-3 Clearing pocket numbers

If a wrong pocket number has been assigned during tool layout in the NEXT display section,
carry out the layout operation once again after resetting all the tool pocket numbers to 0 using
the following procedure.
(1) Press the [PKNo. CLEAR] menu key.
! This will cause the display status of [PKNo. CLEAR] to reverse.
! All the pocket numbers that have been assigned in the NEXT display section will be
reset to 0 and the reverse-display status of [PKNo. CLEAR] will be released.
5-2-4 Specifying a spare tool
If the tool data being indicated in the NEXT display section includes the data of the tool which
needs a spare tool, it is possible to specify the spare tool on this display.
(1) Press the cursor key to call the cursor within the NEXT display section.
(2) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the PKNo. data item of the tool which needs a
spare tool.
Example: When the data shown below is indicated in the NEXT display section and a spare
tool is to be specified for the end-mill with a nominal diameter of 10 mm:
NEXT WNo.123
1 FCE MILL 80. A
2 END MILL 10. A
3 CTR-DR 20.
4 DRILL 10.
5 DRILL 7.
Move the cursor to this position
(3) Press the [SPARE T ADDITION] menu key.

! This will cause the display status of [SPARE T ADDITION] to reverse.
5-11

! The data of a spare tool will be displayed directly under the data of the tool which
needs a spare tool.
- In the example above, the display will change as follows:
NEXT WNo.123
1 FCE MILL 80. A
2 END MILL 10. A
0 END MILL 10. A
3 CTR-DR 20.
4 DRILL 10.
5 DRILL 7.
! The reverse-display status of [SPARE T ADDITION] will be released.

Note: The pocket number of a spare tool is displayed as 0 (undetermined), as shown above.
Therefore, a pocket number must be assigned to the spare tool after the above
operation has been carried out.
5-2-5 Erasing spare tool data
Proceed as follows to erase specified spare tool data:
(1) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the PKNo. item of the spare tool data to be
erased.
- First call the cursor on the screen if it is not being indicated in the NEXT display section.
(2) Press the [SPARE T ERASE] menu key.
! This will cause the display status of [SPARE T ERASE] to reverse.
! The spare tool data being indicated in the NEXT display section will be erased, and the
reverse-display status of [SPARE T ERASE] will be released.
5-2-6 Erasing procedures for registered tool data

All or part of the tool data registered in the CURRENT display section of the TOOL LAYOUT
display, (i.e., the tool data that has already been laid out) can be erased.
1. Partial erasure of registered tool data

(1) Press the cursor key to move the cursor (here: reverse display) to the line of the tool data to
be erased.
Example: When tools are registered as shown below and the data of the drill with a
nominal diameter of 10 mm is to be erased:
CURRENT
PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ

1 FCE MILL 80. A
2 END MILL 10. A
3 TAP M8.
4 CTR-DR 20.
5 DRILL 10.
6 DRILL 7.
Move the reverse display onto this line.
5-12
(2) Press the [TOOLDATA ERASE] menu key.
! This will cause the display of [TOOLDATA ERASE] to reverse.
! The data of the tool on the reverse-display line will be erased.
- In the example above, the display will change as follows:
CURRENT
PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ
1 FCE MILL 80. A
2 END MILL 10. A
3 TAP M8.
4 CTR-DR 20.
5
6 DRILL 7.
Tool data has been erased.
! The reverse-display status of [TOOLDATA ERASE] will be released.
2. Total erasure of registered tool data

(1) Press the menu selector key to display [LAYOUT CANCEL].
(2) Press the [LAYOUT CANCEL] menu key.
! This will cause the display status of [LAYOUT CANCEL] to reverse.
(3) Specify −9999 with the numeric data keys and then press the INPUT key.
! The entire tool data that has been registered in the CURRENT display section will then
be erased and the reverse-display status of [LAYOUT CANCEL] will be released.
5-2-7 Other functions
1. Tool name search

Tool names registered on the CURRENT display can be searched.
(1) Press the [TOOL SEARCH] menu key.
! The following menu will be displayed.
(a)
- The following menu will be displayed by pressing the [>>>] menu key.
(b)
(2) From menus (a) and (b), select the menu item that corresponds to the tool name to be
searched for, and press the appropriate menu key.
(3) Using the appropriate numeric data key(s), specify the nominal diameter value of the tool to
be searched for. Then, press the INPUT key.
! If the tool to be searched for is already registered, the line of the tool concerned will be
displayed and highlighted.
5-13
Example: When checking the pocket number under which a drill with a nominal diameter of
40 mm is registered:
After pressing the [DRILL] menu key in procedural step (2), enter “40" and press
the INPUT key in procedural step (3).
This will cause the line concerned to be highlighted as shown below.
This shows that the tool to be searched for is registered under pocket number 11.
- If the INPUT key is pressed following this, the NC unit will check whether another correspond-
ing tool exists in the subsequent area (and further from the top line downwards), and the line of
the tool concerned will be highlighted next.
- If no corresponding tools can be found any more, then the alarm message 407 DESIGNATED
DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.
Note: It is also possible to search for the corresponding tool name just by specifying TOOL
item. In this case, press only the INPUT key after procedural step (2).
5-14
5-3 TOOL LAYOUT Display (Visual Tool Management Mode)

Function:
- This display mode is used for assigning pocket numbers to the tools to be used for machining,
or erasing the registered tool names.
- The display indicates the tools to be provided (as an additional or a spare tool) for the particular
machining program and number of workpieces to be machined.
- It is also used to manage the stocked tools.
Remarks:
- This display is only available for MAZATROL programs.
The TOOL LAYOUT display provides two operation modes: Tool Layout mode for assigning
pocket numbers to the tools used, and Visual Tool Management mode for foreseeing the tools to
be provided (as an additional or a spare tool) for the particular machining program and number of
workpieces to be machined.
Select the [VISUAL TOOL MNG] menu function (by pressing the corresponding menu key to
highlight the menu item) as required to select the Visual Tool Management mode. Use the menu
selector key as required to display the menu item concerned.
Note: The function of this display mode (indexing the necessary tools, among others) cannot
be utilized effectively until the machining program has undergone the tool path check
for the estimation of each tool’s operation time.
5-3-1 Data display
1. Outline
Display of the information of the

tools currently provided on the
magazine
Display of the current

tooling on the magazine
Display section of the tools to be

additionally provided, or those in
stock
D740S3011E
5-15
The VISUAL TOOL MANAGEMENT display consists of four data display sections entitled
PROGRAM LIST, MAGAZINE TOOL, NECESSARY TOOL and STOCK TOOL (the last two
sections can be displayed alternatively). Use the Tab key to select a particular section for
display operation; the current selection is indicated by the reverse display of the title and the
frame in magenta.
- The function of this display can be made valid or invalid by the following parameter:
F82 bit 3 = 0/1: VISUAL TOOL MANAGEMENT display function invalid/valid
2. Displayed data
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[1] [2] [3]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[4] [5]
D740S3012E
5-16
[13]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
[12] [7] [8] [10] [11]
D740S3013E

[1] WNo. – Work number of the specified program
[2] NUM. pcs. Number of workpieces to be machined
The machining time required for the execution of the particular program
[3] TIME H:M’S”
[1] in order to machine the particular number of workpieces [2]. (Note)
[4] Total number pcs. Total number of workpieces to be machined
[5] Total time H:M’S” Total machining time
[6] PKNo. – Number of the tool pocket on the magazine
[7] TOOL – Tool name
NOM-φ mm (in.) Nominal diameter or size of the tool
[8]
– Suffix (Code for identifying tools of the same size).
[9] NECESSARY min Time for which the tool is to be used for machining
[10] REMAIN min Remaining serviceable time of the tool
[11] LIFE TIME min Life time of the tool
[12] ID No. – Identification number of the stocked tool
Graphic representation of the current tooling on the magazine
Current tooling on the
[13] – ◎: Indicates an occupied pocket.
magazine
○: Indicates an empty pocket.
5-17
5-3-2 Display modes
1. Displaying the magazine view

Pressing the [MAGAZINE] menu key will cause the display status of the menu item to be
reversed and the program listing window will be changed to the magazine view. The display
section “MAGAZINE” on the left side has two display modes: General view and Partial enlarged
view. The general view shows the current state of the tool pockets on the magazine (symbols ◎
and ○ indicate respectively an occupied pocket and an empty one), while the partial enlarged
view with its figural representations serves for checking what type of tool is provided in each
pocket.
Use the menu function [MAGAZINE DETAIL] to change the display mode of this section.
[MAGAZINE general view] [MAGAZINE partial enlarged view]
(1) Press the [MAGAZINE DETAIL] menu key with the menu item’s display highlighted in
reverse.
! The reverse display of the menu item will be cleared and the display mode changed to
the partial enlarged view.
(2) Press the [MAGAZINE DETAIL] menu key with the menu item’s display in normal state.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the display mode changed to the
general view.
2. Alternation of the NECESSARY TOOL and STOCK TOOL sections

The lower part on the right side alternatively displays the NECESSARY TOOL and STOCK
TOOL sections.
Use the respective menu functions to alternate the two display sections.
[NECESSARY TOOL section] [STOCK TOOL section]
5-18
(1) Press the [STOCK TOOL] menu key with the menu item’s display in normal state.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the STOCK TOOL section will
appear.
! The reverse display of [NECES. TOOL] will be cleared.
(2) Press the [NECES. TOOL] menu key with the menu item’s display in normal state.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the NECESSARY TOOL section will
appear.
! The reverse display of [STOCK TOOL] will be cleared.
Remark: For a machine having “visual tool ID/data management” functions, the menu item
[MAGAZINE SETUP] is displayed instead of [STOCK TOOL] and [NECES. TOOL].
To use the “visual tool ID/data management” functions together with the STOCK
TOOL function, make the STOCK TOOL function valid using the required parameter.
- F82 bit 5 = 0/1: STOCK TOOL function invalid/valid
5-3-3 NECESSARY TOOL display section

Among the tools to be provided for the particular machining program, “necessary tools” here
denote those which are currently lacking on the magazine, and those which should serve as a
spare for the present tool which is predicted to reach its serviceable life during operation.
1. Indexing the necessary tools

The tools “necessary” for the particular machining program can be indexed by the following
procedure:
(1) Enter the work number in the work number listing window using the numeric data keys and
! The necessary tools will be indicated in the NECESSARY TOOL display section.
- Tools necessary as a spare are indicated by a reverse display in yellow.
- A reverse display in magenta in the MAGAZINE and MAGAZINE TOOL sections refers to
the present tools to be used in the particular machining.
- A reverse display in yellow in the MAGAZINE and MAGAZINE TOOL sections refers to
the present tools whose serviceable life is predicted not to be long enough.
- Pressing the [WORK No.] menu key will display the work number listing window for
selecting the work number.
(2) Set the number of workpieces as required for multiple machining by repeatedly running the
program.
! The display contents will be renovated for the multiple-workpiece machining.
Repeat steps (1) and (2) to index the necessary additional tools simultaneously for multiple
programs. Press the [ALL ERASE] menu key and enter “–9999” to erase all the data in the work
number listing window.
Note: The indication of necessary tools is based upon the results of a continuous tool path
check conducted on the program (specified tools and their estimated operation times).
Before utilizing the function of this display, therefore, a newly created program or a
modified one must be checked beforehand by the [CHECK CONTINUE] menu function
on the TOOL PATH CHECK display. Otherwise an alarm will be caused (425 DATA
MISSING) or false information based on the old data will be given.
5-19
5-3-4 STOCK TOOL display section

The VISUAL TOOL MANAGEMENT display can also be used for saving the data of the tools
removed from the magazine onto the hard disk.
1. Registering the stocked tools

(1) Press the [STOCK TOOL] menu key with the menu item’s display in normal state.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the STOCK TOOL section will
appear.
(2) Use the Tab key as required to select the MAGAZINE TOOL section for display
operation.
(3) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the line of the required tool.
(4) Press the [MOVE] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the following dialogue box will
appear:
Note: The dialogue box appears with an initial value when the tool in question has an ID
number already registered on the TOOL DATA display.
(5) Enter the identification number of the stocked tool using the numeric keys and press the
INPUT key.
! The specified tool data will be removed from the MAGAZINE TOOL section and
registered under the designated ID No. in the STOCK TOOL section.
! The reverse display of the menu item [MOVE] will be cleared and the dialogue box will
disappear.
Example: When the data of the drill with a nominal dia. of 6 mm under PKNo. 3 in the
MAGAZINE TOOL section is to be registered under ID No. 10380:
1) Move the cursor onto the line of PKNo. 3 in the MAGAZINE TOOL section.
MAGAZINE TOOL STOCK TOOL

PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ ID No. TOOL NOM-φ
1 END MILL 10. C 10521 END MILL 8. B
2 10525 END MILL 20. B
3 DRILL 6. B 10382 DRILL 12. B
4 10386 DRILL 20. A
5 FCE MILL 200. BL
6
7 DRILL 10. N
8
9 CTR-DR 20. A
10
Move the curser onto this line.
2) Press the [MOVE] menu key.
5-20
3) Enter “10380” using the numeric data keys and press the INPUT key.
! The required registration will be performed and the display changed as follows:
MAGAZINE TOOL STOCK TOOL

2 10525 END MILL 20. B
3 10382 DRILL 12. B
4 10386 DRILL 20. A
5 FCE MILL 200. BL 10380 DRILL 6. B
6
7 DRILL 10. N
8
9 CTR-DR 20. A
10
2. Setting the folder for data storage

The data of the stocked tools are saved in the folder named “C:\MC_ToolList” (the default folder)
on the hard disk. Change the folder as required for sharing the stocked tools’ data with other
machine tools equipped with the MAZATROL MATRIX and linked on a network.
Note: For a machine having “visual tool ID/data management” functions, the name of the
destination folder “C:\MC_ToolList” cannot be changed.
(1) Press the window key .
(2) Place the cursor on [Folder Setting] under [Setup] on the menu bar.

! The following dialogue box will appear:
(4) Type the folder name as required and press the INPUT key.
- For sharing the data with other computers, set the properties of the storage folder as
“Shared As” and “Full” access type. Use the Explorer for setting the folder.
- Format for designating the folder
- For setting the folder of My Computer
Drive name:\Root folder name\Lower folder name\ . . .
- For setting the folder of another computer on the LAN
\\Computer name\Sharing folder name\Lower folder name\Lower folder name\ . . .
5-21
Example: When there are two machine tools equipped with the MAZATROL MATRIX in the
plant and they are linked on a network to the office computer:
Office
Hub
Plant
Server
Computer name: MAZAK
MAZATROL MAZATROL
MATRIX MATRIX
Machine 1 Machine 2
D740S3014
Proceed as follows to designate the storage folder for the stocked tools of Machines 1 and 2
as “STOCK” under the C drive of the office computer named “MAZAK”:
1) Create a folder named STOCK under the C drive of the office computer.
(Set the properties of the folder as “Shared As” and “Full” access type.)
2) Designate the storage folder for the stocked tools as follows on Machines 1 and 2:
\\MAZAK\STOCK
5-3-5 Tool layout for the necessary tools

After indexing (or drawing the information on) the necessary tools as described above, proceed
as follows for assigning pocket numbers to, and performing other management operations on,
the required tools:
1. Automatic assignment of pocket numbers
(1) Use the Tab key as required to select the NECESSARY TOOL section for display
operation.
(2) Press the [PKNo. ASSIGN] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed.

! The numbers of currently empty pockets will be assigned to the necessary tools.
5-22
Example: When the following data are displayed in the MAGAZINE TOOL and NECESSARY
TOOL sections:
MAGAZINE TOOL NECESSARY TOOL

2 0 END MILL 20. B
4 0 DRILL 20. A
5 FCE MILL 200. BL
6
7 DRILL 10. N
8
9
10
The display in the NECESSARY TOOL section will change as follows upon step (3):
- Pocket numbers 4 and 6 are skipped since the pocket No. 5 is occupied by a large-sized
tool.
NECESSARY TOOL
PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ
2 END MILL 8. B
8 END MILL 20. B
9 DRILL 12. B
10 DRILL 20. A
Note: No assignment will occur if there are no more empty pockets available on the
magazine.
2. Editing the necessary tools’ data

Proceed as follows for manually performing management operations on the “necessary” tools
such as setting of pocket number, interference code and life time:
operation.
(2) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the line of the required tool.
(3) Press the [EDIT] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the NECESSARY TOOL section will
enter the edit mode.
(4) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the required item and enter the data.
(5) After setting all the required items, press the [EDIT] menu key with the menu item’s display
highlighted in reverse.
! The reverse display of the menu item will be cleared and the NECESSARY TOOL
section will return to the list mode.
5-23
Example: When pocket number “6”, interference code for “Large tool” and life time
“100 min” are to be set for the face mill with a nominal diameter of 200 mm in
the NECESSARY TOOL section:
1) Place the cursor on the line of “FCE MILL” with “200” under NOM-φ.
NECESSARY TOOL
PKNo. TOOL NOM-φ NECESSARY REMAIN LIFE
3 END MILL 30. A 10 0
5 DRILL 20. B 13 0
0 FCE MILL 200. B 20 0
0 DRILL 10. 8 0
0 DRILL 15. 5 0
0 TAP M8. 12 0
Move the cursor onto this line.
2) Press the [EDIT] menu key.

! The cursor will be placed in the column of PKNo. on the currently selected line.
NECESSARY TOOL
3 END MILL 30. A 10 0
5 DRILL 20. B 13 0
0 FCE MILL 200. B 20 0
0 DRILL 10. 8 0
0 DRILL 15. 5 0
0 TAP M8. 12 0
3) Enter “6” using the numeric key and press the INPUT key.
! The pocket No. 6 will be assigned to the FCE MILL.
4) Select the desired menu item for the intra-magazine interference code.
! The display will change as follows:
NECESSARY TOOL
3 END MILL 30. A 10 0
5 DRILL 20. B 13 0
6 FCE MILL 200. BL 20 0
0 DRILL 10. 8 0
0 DRILL 15. 5 0
0 TAP M8. 12 0
! The cursor will be shifted to the LIFE item.

5) Enter “100” using the numeric keys and press the INPUT key.
! The life of the FCE MILL will be set to 100 min.
6) Press the [EDIT] menu key with the menu item’s display highlighted in reverse.
! The reverse display of the menu item will be cleared and the NECESSARY TOOL
section will return to the list mode.
5-24
3. Registering the necessary tool’s data into the MAGAZINE TOOL section
The following two methods are available to register the data of the necessary tools (with a
significant pocket number assigned) into the MAGAZINE TOOL section:
1. Registering the necessary tool’s data using “visual tool ID/data management” functions
operation.
(2) Assign the magazine pocket numbers to the necessary tools.
(3) Press the [MAGAZINE SETUP] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed to indicate that the operation is to be
continued using the tool specification display on the display unit of the magazine.
(4) Perform tool mounting/dismounting setup operations while referring to the tool specification
display. Refer to the Operating Manual for the visual tool ID/data management functions for
further details.
! The necessary tools’ data will be registered into the MAGAZINE TOOL section under
the corresponding pocket numbers.
Note: Alarm 400 MEMORY PROTECT (MAGAZINE SETUP) will occur, if editing tool data on
the TOOL DATA display, completing the layout of tools on the TOOL LAYOUT display,
or loading data on the DATA I/O display is attempted with the [MAGAZINE SETUP]
menu item being highlighted.
2. Registering the necessary tool’s data not using “visual tool ID/data management” functions
operation.
(2) Assign the magazine pocket numbers to the necessary tools.
(3) Press the [LAYOUT FINISH] menu key.
! The necessary tools’ data will be registered under the corresponding pocket numbers
in the MAGAZINE TOOL section, and the reverse display of the [LAYOUT FINISH]
menu item will be cleared.
! The “registered” data will be cleared from the NECESSARY TOOL section.
Note: The above-mentioned registration is performed in a rewriting manner. That is, the data
displayed under a pocket number in the MAGAZINE TOOL section will immediately be
replaced by the data of the necessary tool with the same pocket number assigned.
5-25
Example: When the following data are displayed in the MAGAZINE TOOL and NECESSARY
TOOL sections:

2 8 END MILL 20. B
4 0 DRILL 20. A
5 FCE MILL 200. BL
6
7 DRILL 10. N
8
9 CTR-DR 20. A
10
The display in both sections will change as follows upon step (3):
- The data of DRILL with NOM-φ “6” under PKNo. 3 has been replaced by the data of END
MILL with NOM-φ “8”.

1 END MILL 10. C 0 DRILL 20. A
2
3 END MILL 8. B
4
5 FCE MILL 200. BL
6
7 DRILL 10. N
8 END MILL 20. B
9 CTR-DR 20. A
10 DRILL 12. B
4. Registering the stocked tools’ data into the MAGAZINE TOOL section
Proceed as follows for searching the STOCK TOOL section for the necessary tools’ data to be
registered into the MAGAZINE TOOL section:
(1) Press the [STOCK TOOL] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the STOCK TOOL display section
will appear on the screen.
(2) Use the Tab key as required to select the STOCK TOOL section for display operation.
(3) Press the [NECES. SELECT] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the data of those stocked tools which
are the same in type as the necessary tools will selectively be displayed.
(4) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the line of the desired tool.
5-26
(6) Specify the pocket number for the tool using the numeric keys and press the INPUT key.
! The stocked tool’s data will be registered under the specified pocket number in the
MAGAZINE TOOL section, and the reverse display of the [MOVE] menu item will be
cleared.
Note 1: The “moved” data here will always replace the MAGAZINE TOOL data on the line of
the specified pocket number.
Note 2: If there are multiple data entries (with variety of tool application) under the same ID
number as that of the selected tool, all the entries will be moved at once into the
MAGAZINE TOOL section under one and the same pocket No.
For the specified tool, moreover, if F166 bit 2 = 1 (for the use of ID Nos. on the TOOL
DATA display), the ID number used for the registration in the STOCK TOOL section
will be automatically set on the TOOL DATA display.
Example: When the NECESSARY TOOL and STOCK TOOL sections have the following data
provided:
NECESSARY TOOL STOCK TOOL

0 END MILL 8. B 10850 END MILL 8. B
0 END MILL 20. B 10859 END MILL 10. B
0 DRILL 12. B 10552 FCE MILL 200. A
10442 DRILL 12. B
10445 DRILL 30. B
1) Select the STOCK TOOL section for the display operation and press the [NECES.
SELECT] menu key.
! The data of the END MILL with NOM-φ “8”, suffix B and the DRILL with NOM-φ
“12”, suffix B will selectively be displayed in the STOCK TOOL section.
The necessary tool END MILL with NOM-φ “20”, suffix B will have no correspon-
ding data searched for and displayed there.
STOCK TOOL
ID No. TOOL NOM-φ
10850 END MILL 8. B
10442 DRILL 12. B
Proceed further as follows to register the data of the stocked tool END MILL with ID No.
10850 under pocket number 3 in the MAGAZINE TOOL section:
2) Place the cursor on the line of ID No. 10850 and press the [MOVE] menu key.
3) Key in “3” and press the INPUT key.
! The data of the selected tool (END MILL with NOM-φ “8”, suffix B) will be
registered under pocket number 3 in the MAGAZINE TOOL section.
! The moved data will be cleared from the STOCK TOOL and NECESSARY TOOL
sections.
5-27
5. Clearing the pocket numbers

The assignment of pocket numbers to the necessary tools can be totally cleared (reset to “0”) as
follows in case of an erroneous assignment:
operation.
(2) Press the [PKNo. CLEAR] menu key.
! The pocket numbers currently assigned to the necessary tools will all be reset to “0”,
and the reverse display of the [PKNo. CLEAR] menu item will be cleared.
5-3-6 Other functions for display operation
1. Erasing the MAGAZINE TOOL data
(1) Use the Tab key as required to select the MAGAZINE TOOL section for display
operation.
(2) Use the cursor keys to place the cursor on the line of the tool to be erased.
! The data of the selected tool will be cleared from the MAGAZINE TOOL section.
Note: If there are multiple data entries (with variety of tool application) under the same pocket
number as that of the specified tool, all the entries will be erased at once.
2. Erasing the STOCK TOOL data

(3) Use the cursor keys and page keys to place the cursor on the line of the tool to be erased.
! The data of the selected tool will be cleared from the STOCK TOOL section.
5-28
3. Searching for the STOCK TOOL data
(3) Press the [FIND] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the following dialogue box will
appear:
(4) Key in the ID No. of the tool to be searched for.

! The data of the searched tool will be displayed in the STOCK TOOL section, and the
reverse display of the [FIND] menu item will be cleared.
Note: The alarm No. 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed on the screen
if no data corresponding to the specified ID No. are registered in the STOCK TOOL
section.
5-29
5-4 WORK OFFSET Display

Function:
Setting zero-point offset for six workpiece coordinate systems (G54 to G59) for EIA/ISO
programs.
Remarks:
- This type of display is available as an option.
5-4-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [3] [5] [7]
[2] [4] [6] [8]
D740S3015E

X, Y, Z mm (in.) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in G54 workpiece
[1] coordinate system on each axis
A, C degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
5-30
X, Y, Z mm (in.) Shift amount of workpiece zero-point in each workpiece coordinate
[7] system.
A, C degrees
X, Y, Z mm (in.) The same as the MACHINE item on the POSITION display.

[8] See Section 4-1 for details.
A, C degrees

The following data can be registered on the WORK OFFSET display.
1. Offset value of the zero-point of the workpiece coordinate systems G54 to G59 (items [1] to
[6])
Offset value of the workpiece zero-point is the offset value from the machine zero-point to
the workpiece zero-point.
G54 G55 G56 G57

Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate
system 1 system 2 system 3 system 4
Workpiece Workpiece
zero-point 2 zero-point 3
Offset 2 Workpiece zero-point 4

Workpiece Offset 3
zero-point 1 Offset 4
Offset 1
G58
Machine zero-point Workpiece coordinate system 5
Offset 5
Offset 1: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point Workpiece zero-point 5

in the workpiece coordinate system 1
Offset 2: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point
in the workpiece coordinate system 2 G59
Offset 3: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point Workpiece coordinate
in the workpiece coordinate system 3 Offset 6 system 6
in the workpiece coordinate system 4 Workpiece
Offset 5: Offset value of the workpiece zero-point zero-point 6
D735S1013
5-31
2. Shift amount of the workpiece coordinate systems (item [7])

Offset value of the external workpiece zero-point for shifting all the workpiece coordinate
systems G54 to G59.
G54 G55 G56 G57

Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate Workpiece coordinate
system 1 system 2 system 3 system 4
Workpiece Workpiece Workpiece
zero-point 2 zero-point 3 zero-point 4
Offset 3
Workpiece Offset 2
zero-point 1 Offset 4
Offset 1
G58
Workpiece coordinate
Offset 5 system 5
Workpiece
Offset X zero-point 5
G59
Machine zero-point Workpiece coordinate
Offset 6
system 6
Workpiece
zero-point 6
Offset X : Offset value of external workpiece zero-point
D735S1014
1. Procedure for setting offset value of workpiece zero-point
A. If known offset value of workpiece zero-point is to be set

(1) Place the cursor on the axis position of the coordinate system where data setting is
required.
- Press the cursor key to call the cursor on the screen. Then, move the cursor to the
intended position.
(2) Set the offset value.
- Key in the known data using the numeric data keys, and then press the INPUT key.
(3) Repeat the steps (1) and (2) until entire data of the intended axes have been set.
B. If unknown offset value of workpiece zero-point is to be set

If the offset to be set is unknown, the data can be set using the [TEACH] (tool-nose position data
store) function.
(1) Mount a tool whose length has already been registered.
- For information on tool length, see Section 7-1 “TOOL DATA Display.”
5-32
(2) Bring the tool nose to the intended workpiece zero-point.
- Move each axis under manual operation until the tool nose has reached the workpiece
zero-point.
(3) Place the cursor on the intended axis postion of the coordinate system where data setting is
required.
- Press the cursor key to call up the cursor on the screen and move the cursor to the axis
position of the coordinate system where the data is to be set.
(4) Press the [TEACH] menu key.
! Pressing this menu key makes [TEACH] assume a reverse-display status.
(5) Set the distance from the workpiece zero-point to the tool center line (tool nose for Z-axis) in
the intended axis direction.
<Position of the workpiece zero-point>
Coordinate
position Machine zero-point
Workpiece zero-point
+Z
Workpiece
+X
Distance to the workpiece

5 zero-point (Radius of the tool)
M3S035
! The offset value will be set automatically and the reverse-display status of [TEACH]
will be cleared.
2. Setting shift amount of the workpiece coordinate systems

The amount of shifting can be set by setting a workpiece zero-point as shift coordinates, in a
similar manner described previously in the item, “1. Procedure for setting offset value of
workpiece zero-point”.
Note: Using the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu function, desired data can be set by selecting an
incremental or decremental value for the existing data. See Section 7-1 “TOOL DATA
Display” for further details.

Using the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu function, desired data can be set by selecting an
incremental or decremental value for the existing data. See Section 7-1 “TOOL DATA Display”
for further details.
5-33
5-5 MACRO VARIABLE Display

Function:
This display allows macro variables to be set for the user macros.
Remarks:
- Two types of macro variables can be used:
a) Common variables ................................... Can be used for both the main program and the
macro programs that are to be called up from the
main program.
b) Local vairables ......................................... Can only be used in macro programs.
- The macro variable displays consist of the four sub-displays listed below.
a) COMMON VARIABLE display ................. Allows the operator to set the common variables
to be used to execute user macros in the
automatic operation mode.
b) COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) display. Allows the operator to set the common variables
to be used to carry out tool path checks.
c) LOCAL VARIABLE display ..................... Allows the operator to check the local variables to
be used to execute user macros in the automatic
operation mode.
d) LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) display ..... Allows the operator to check the local variables to
be used to carry out tool path checks.
Note: The LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays only list settings
of variables; the data on these two displays cannot be modified.
Refer to the EIA/ISO Programming Manual for further details of user macros.
5-34
5-5-1 Data display
1. Displayed data (COMMON VARIABLE, COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK))
[1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2]
[4]
D740S3016E
2. Displayed data (LOCAL VARIABLE, LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK))
[3] [3]
[1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2]
[4]
D740S3017E
5-35

[1] No. — Variable number
[2] DATA — Registered variable value
[3] NEST — Nesting number
[4] Page — Current page/Total number of pages
1. COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) displays

Only data of variables can be registered on the COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON
VARIABLE (CHECK) displays.
(1) Set the cursor on the data item under DATA of the variable to be set.
- After calling up the cursor on the display by pressing the cursor key, move the cursor to
the data item under DATA of the variable to be set.
(2) Set the desired data as the intended variable.
- Enter data using the numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key.
2. LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays

No data can be registered on the LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK)
displays.
1. COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) displays

1. Pressing the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu key allows the entered data to be added to the
current data.
See Section 7-1 “TOOL DATA Display” for further details.
Select (or put a check-off mark to) the option [Incremental First] displayed under [Setup]
on the menu bar to initially make the [INCRMENT INPUT] menu function valid.
The selection of this option is not simply cancelled by turning-off.

2. Use the [Exp] menu item to set data in exponential form.
Example: To set the data 2 × 10−6, press keys in the following order:
2 [Exp] – 6 INPUT
This displays “2. E–6” under DATA.
5-36
3. The data on the COMMON VARIABLE and COMMON VARIABLE (CHECK) displays have
been registered over multiple pages.
2. LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays

The data on the LOCAL VARIABLE and LOCAL VARIABLE (CHECK) displays have been
registered on nesting levels 1 to 5 per display. The number displayed on the data item [3]
denotes the nesting level of the current data.
- Pressing the page key displays data of the next nesting.
- Pressing the page key displays data of the previous nesting.
3. Display type of variables

The display type of macro variables (within a specific range of their values) can be chosen
between Exponential and Not Exponential.
Select (or put a check-off mark to) the option [Not Exponential Display] displayed under
[Setup] on the menu bar to choose non-exponential display of variables’ values within a specific
range as indicated below:
Example: Display of “0.01”
Exponential display: 1.E–2
Not Exponential display: 0.01
Range of absolute values of variables “Not Exponential Display” “Not Exponential Display”
(ABS var.) selected cancelled
ABS var. < 0.0001 Exponential form
0.0001 ≤ ABS var. < 1 Non-exponential form Exponential form
1 ≤ ABS var. ≤ 99999.9999 Non-exponential form
99999.9999 < ABS var. Exponential form
The selection of this option is not simply cancelled by turning-off.
5-37
5-6 ADDITIONAL WPC Display

Function:
- By using this display, external coordinate data used for the MAZATROL program can be set.
Remarks:
- 10 sets of fundamental coordinates (A through K, except I) (workpiece coordinate system) can
be set.
- 10 sets of data to be used can be specified by the appropriate address A through K using the
fundamental coordinate unit of MAZATROL program.
5-6-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [3] [5] [7] [9]
[2] [4] [6] [8] [10]
D740S3018E

X, Y, Z mm (in.) Distance from the machine zero-point to the zero-point in workpiece
[1] coordinate system A on each axis
th, A, C degrees (Offset of workpiece zero-point)
[2] coordinate system B on each axis
[3] coordinate system C on each axis
5-38
[4] coordinate system D on each axis

[5] coordinate system E on each axis
[6] coordinate system F on each axis
[7] coordinate system G on each axis
[8] coordinate system H on each axis
[9] coordinate system J on each axis
[10] coordinate system K on each axis

Data registration procedure on the ADDITIONAL WPC display does not differ from that on the
WORK OFFSET display. Refer to Subsection 5-4-2.
5-6-3 Address setting

Using the following menu, set the desired address in ADD. WPC item of the fundamental
coordinates unit.
(1) Press the [WPC] menu key on the PROGRAM display.
! The following fundamental coordinate unit will be displayed.
UNo. UNIT ADD. WPC X Y th Z C A

3 WPC-0
(2) Move the cursor to the ADD. WPC item.

! The following menu will be displayed.
G54 G55 G56 G57 G58 G59 A B >>>

(a)
- Pressing the [>>>] menu key changes over to the following menu.
C D E F G H J K >>>
(b)
(3) Press the menu key corresponding to the address to be set.

! The set address is displayed under ADD. WPC.
Note: When an address is set under ADD. WPC, data previously set under X to A will all be
cleared.
5-39
5-6-4 Considerations to measurement
1. Storing the tool tip position into the memory
A. ADDITIONAL WPC display

As with the WORK OFFSET display, the ADDITIONAL WPC display allows the tool tip position
to be stored into the memory. Refer to Subsection 5-4-2.
2. Coordinate measurement
If MMS or MDI-MMS operations are carried out for the fundamental coordinate unit that has an
address set under ADD. WPC, the measured coordinates will be written into that address.
Example: Measurement of X coordinate by MDI-MMS operations
UNo. UNIT ADD.WPC
3 WPC-0 A ∼
(1) Press the [+X SENSOR] menu key.

(2) Enter 0 and press the INPUT key.
(3) Press the cycle start button.
! WPC A
X -356.253 ← This data is written.
Y 0.
th 0.
Z 0.
A 0.
C 0.
Note 1: Even if an address from G54 to G59 is designated for the ADD. WPC item, the modal
information in the EIA/ISO program will not be overridden with that address. The
MAZATROL coordinate systems will also be used in this case.
Note 2: Data setting can only be performed either for the ADD. WPC item or the X to A items in
the WPC unit. If transferring a machining program from an external unit should cause
data setting for both sections in question, the ADD. WPC item will have priority.
5-40
5-7 SPINDLE LOAD GRAPHIC DISPLAY Display

Function:
Displaying the changes in the speed and load of the spindle.
5-7-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1]
[3]
[5]
[4]
[6]
[2]
D740S3019E

[1] Tool number — Numbers of the tools mounted on the spindle
[2] Axis of abscissa sec Period of the graphic display
Axis of ordinate
[3] min–1 Spindle speed
(upper)
Axis of ordinate
[4] % Spindle load
(lower)
Graphic display
[5] — Display of the changes in the spindle speed in a red line.
(upper)
Display of the changes in actual spindle load in a green line.
Graphic display
[6] — The average and peak load values can be additionally displayed
(lower)
respectively in white and red lines for each tool.
5-41
5-7-2 Displaying spindle load data

(1) Start the sampling of the spindle load data.
- Select the POSITION display, press the window key and select [Spindle Load]
through [File] on the menu bar.
(2) Select the display SPINDLE LOAD GRAPHIC DISPLAY.

Note 1: To stop sampling, press the window key once again first. Next after selecting
[File] from the menu bar, clear the check-off mark from [Spindle Load] by selecting
the [Spindle Load] option anew.
Note 2: Selection of this display during sampling, not after stopping it, will show the data that
has been obtained from the start of sampling to the moment of display selection.
Note 3: If sampling is stopped and then started anew, existing data samplings will be erased.
Note 4: Spindle load data can be sampled for a maximum of one hour.
5-7-3 Display mode selection
1. Selecting the spindle

Sampling data on the milling spindles 1, 2, and 3 as well as the turning spindles 1 and 2 can be
listed on the SPINDLE LOAD GRAPHIC DISPLAY display. When this display is made, sampling
data on the milling spindle 1 will be initially displayed.
(1) Press the [T. SPNDL 1] menu key.
! Sampling data on the turning spindle 1 will be displayed and the display of the menu
item will be reversed.
Likewise, press the [M. SPDL 2] or [T. SPNDL 2] menu key to display data relating to the milling
spindle 2 or turning spindle 2.
Note: The selectable spindles vary from model to model.
2. Setting the display time scale

Upon selection of this display, sampled data will initially be displayed in its entirety.
The time scale for graphic display can be changed as required for an enlarged view of a specific
period.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the message TIME (sec)?
displayed.
(2) Specify the desired time and press the INPUT key.
! The graphic display will be remade for the period from 0 (sampling start) to the
specified time, and the reverse display of the menu item cleared.
5-42
(3) Use the cursor and page keys to select the desired period (time section).
- Press the cursor keys to scroll (move) 1/5 of the current display period (time section) or the
page keys to scroll the entire period.
Use the keys for the later section (forward scrolling) and
for the earlier section (backward scrolling).
- This operation can also be performed on the scroll bar below the graph by using the
mouse.
3. Displaying the data of only a specific tool in enlarged form

Data of only a specific tool can be displayed in enlarged form.
(1) Press the [CHANGE TOOL] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the message TOOL No. <CURSOR,
INPUT>? displayed.
! The cursor will appear in the display area of tool numbers.
Cursor
(2) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor on the desired tool number.
! The graphic display will be remade for an enlarged view of the specified tool, and the
reverse display of the menu item cleared.
4. Displaying the initial status of the graphic display

Once display period has been changed or only a specific tool has been selected for an enlarged
view, temporarily retrieve the initial status of this display to perform a similar modification anew.
(1) Press the [CHANGE DISPLAY] menu key.
! The graphic display will return to the initial status (existing when the display was called
up).
5-43
5-7-4 Displaying additional data related to spindle load
1. Displaying the average spindle load

Average value of the actual spindle load during cutting feed can be calculated and displayed for
each tool.
(1) Press the [AVERAGE VALUE] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the average load will be additionally
indicated in a white line for each tool.
- Press the same menu key once again to clear the display of the average load, and the
reverse display of the menu item will be cleared at the same time.
2. Displaying the peak spindle load

Peak value of the actual spindle load during cutting feed can be detected and displayed for each
tool.
(1) Press the [PEAK VALUE] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the peak load will be additionally
indicated in a red line for each tool.
- Press the same menu key once again to clear the display of the peak load, and the
reverse display of the menu item will be cleared at the same time.
5-44
5-8 MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT Display

Function:
The machining time and spindle output data are listed for each tool according to the results of
actual machine operation.
5-8-1 Data display
1. Displayed data with the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu item in normal display
[1]
[2] [4]
[3] [17]
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
D740S3020E
5-45
2. Displayed data with the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu item in highlighted display
[1]
[2] [4]
[3] [17]
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
[18]
[24]
[19] [25] [29]
[20]
[21]
[21] [26]
[22] [27]
[23] [28]
D740S3021E

Work number of the machining program
WNo. a b (c)
[1] WNo. — a : Work number
b : Program type (MAZATROL or EIA/ISO)
c : Program name
[2] TOTAL SEQ. — Total number of tool sequences in the program
[3] NUMER OF T-CODE — Number of tool change operations required for actual machining
[4] TIME H/M/S Total machining time
RATIO OF MACHINING Color-identified graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each
[5] —
TIME tool
[6] — Serial number of the machining process
[7] TNo. — Tool number
[8] TOOL — Tool name
Nominal diameter or nominal size of the tool and tool identification
[9] NOM-φ/NOM —
code
[10] SEC sec Machining time
[11] AVERAGE kW Average value of spindle output
[12] PEAK kW Peak value of spindle output
[13] WNo. — Work number of the program
[14] UNo. — Unit number in the program
[15] UNIT — Unit name in the program
[16] SNo. — Tool sequence number in the program
5-46
[17] NUM. OF INDEX — Total number of indexing operations executed
[18] TIME RATIO % Ratio of machining time for each tool sequence
[19] RPM min–1 Spindle speed specified in the tool sequence
m/min
[20] C-SP Circumferential speed specified in the tool sequence
(feet/min)
mm/rev Feed rate specified in the tool sequence
(in./rev) (upper: Feed per revolution)
[21] FR
mm/min Feed rate specified in the tool sequence
(in./min) (lower: Feed per minute)
[22] DEP-Z mm Z-axial cutting depth specified in the tool sequence
[23] WID-R mm Radial cutting depth specified in the tool sequence
Ratio of the average spindle load to the output characteristics,
[24] SPDL AVERAGE %
calculated for the tool sequence
Ratio of the peak spindle load to the output characteristics, calculated
[25] SPDL PEAK %
for the tool sequence
Number of teeth (cutting edges) of the tool in the tool sequence
[26] TEETH —
(according to the setting on the TOOL FILE or TOOL DATA display)
Material of the tool in the tool sequence (according to the setting on
[27] MAT. —
the TOOL DATA display)
mm Diameter of the tool in the tool sequence (according to the setting on
[28] ACT-φ
(in.) the TOOL DATA display)
Spindle output characteristic curve (in red) with respect to the spindle
speed, displayed for the tool sequence. The output peak and average
SPINDLE OUTPUT
[29] — output are indicated respectively by a red disk (in a position of the
CURVE
abscissa corresponding to the spindle speed for the output peak) and
a white triangle.
5-8-2 Displaying data

The functions of this display cannot be used for a machining program which has not ever been
executed actually on the machine.
(1) Execute the desired program in the automatic operation mode.
- Refer to Chapter 1 for the procedure.
(2) Select the MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT display.
! The results of the machine operation will be displayed in the total display mode
described in the following subsection.
- No data will be displayed if the automatic operation has not yet been completed at all. In
case the automatic operation based on a program of the same work number has already
been completed, however, data at that time will be displayed.
5-8-3 Display modes
1. Outline
This display has the following two display modes:
- Total display mode
The display is always made in this mode when the MACHINING NAVIGATION - RESULT
display is selected.
In this display mode, the machining time and average spindle output are listed for each tool
sequence in addition to the general information about execution of the program.
5-47
- Tool-specific display mode

In this display mode, which can be selected and canceled by pressing the [TOOL OPTIMIZE]
menu key, data of a specific tool sequence listed up in the total display mode can be selectively
displayed in further detail.
2. Changing from the total to the tool-specific display mode

(1) Check that a graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each tool sequence is
presented under RATIO OF MACHINING TIME.
- For a program the execution of which has been completed, the machining time ratio for
each tool sequence to the total machining time will be displayed in a color-identified format
on a strip graph as shown in the display example below. The items on the strip graph are
keyed from left to right, in a one-to-one correspondence, to those line items of the list
(machining time and average spindle output for each tool sequence) that are displayed at
the bottom of the graph.
Graphic display of
the ratio of
machining time
List
(2) Press a cursor key.

! The cursor will appear in the TNo. column.
! A black triangle (▲) will be displayed under the graph RATIO OF MACHINING TIME to
indicate the item of the tool sequence currently selected by the cursor, as shown in the
display example below.
Indicates the item

of the selected
tool sequence
Cursor
5-48
(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor on the desired tool sequence number.
! The black triangle will move correspondingly with the cursor so that the ratio of the
machining time of the specific tool sequence to the total machining time can be visually
checked.
(4) Press the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the display contents will be changed
for a detailed view of the specified tool.
- Press the same menu key once again, and the total display mode will be retrieved and the
5-49
- NOTE -
5-50 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION 6
6 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PROGRAM CREATION
6-1 PROGRAM Display

Refer to the Programming Manual (when creating MAZATROL programs) or the EIA/ISO
Programming Manual (when creating EIA/ISO programs).
An example of display presentation (for MAZATROL programming)
D740S3022E
H740S3F040E 6-1
6-2 TOOL PATH CHECK Display

Function
This display is used to display the tool path data commanded by the program. Data within
external storage units (tape reader or microdisk system) can also be used for tool path
displaying.
Remarks
- Only the program that has been selected on the PROGRAM display can undergo tool path
check.
- When the TOOL PATH CHECK display is presented, the appropriate scaling factor for the
figure being displayed will be automatically set according to the common data within the
program and the shape of the workpiece will be displayed.
- If machining process change is made on the PROGRAM LAYOUT display, the tool path will be
displayed in the new process order.
6-2-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[5]
[8] [1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[8] [8]
D740S3023E
6-2
No. Item Unit Data descritopn

Work number of the program on which the path check is to be made.
[1] WNo. –
* The number in parentheses refers to a subprogram currently called.
Number of the unit and sequence whose tool path is drawn (MAZATROL)
[2] UNo. –
Number of the sequence and block whose tool path is drawn (EIA/ISO)
[3] TNo. – Tool number, offset number and tool name of the tool moving on the tool path.
Current position of the tool tip with respect to the machine origin (or to the
[4] X, Y, Z mm (in.)
workpiece origin with the [POSITION DISP] menu function selected)
[5] Scale – Scaling factor for the graphics being displayed
Machining shape that has been defined by the program (For point-machining,
this data is displayed with a purple line. For line- or face-machining, this data is
displayed with a green line.)
[6] (Graphic) –
* As for line machining shapes (contours), the starting point and ending point
of each component are always rectilinearly connected (interpolated) for a
representation in so simple and readily identifiable a format as possible.
Display of the machining time obtained by tool path checking.
TOOL PATH Rapid traverse distance Cutting feed distance
[7] H: M’ S’’ TIME = +
TIME Rapid traverse speed Cutting feed rate
+ Dwell time + MST processing time (designated in parameter)
[8] mm (in.) Display limit (automatically determined according to the machining shape)
Note: For simultaneous rapid traverse along the X-, Y- and Z-axis, the tool path displayed will
have its starting point and ending point connected by a straight line.
6-2-2 Basic display operation

! Pressing this menu key changes the display of [PART SHAPE] to a reverse status and
continuously displays the machining pattern that has been defined in the program.
The reverse display status will be cleared when continuous display of the machining
pattern is completed.
(2) Select a tool path display method.
- If the [CHECK CONTINUE] menu key is pressed, the tool path will be displayed
continuously.
- Each time the [CHECK STEP] menu key is pressed, the tool path will be displayed step-
by-step.
- Pressing the menu key changes the term in reverse display status and displays the tool
path.
The reverse display status of the menu item will be cleared when display of the tool path is
completed.
- If the [CHECK STEP] menu key is pressed during continuous display of the tool path, or if
the [CHECK CONTINUE] menu key is pressed during step-by-step display of the tool path,
the later selected menu function will be available.
Note: During the tool path continuous display or the tool path stepped display, the
display operation will not stop even if you press the RESET key. Display operation
can be stopped by pressing the CLEAR key during these displays. If, after that,
you press the [CHECK CONTINUE] or [CHECK STEP] menu key once again,
then the tool path will restart being displayed from the beginning, not from the
middle.
- The machining pattern will be deleted, when the [SHAPE ERASE] menu key is pressed.
6-3
- The tool path will be deleted, when the [TOOLPATH ERASE] menu key is pressed.
- Operating procedures of menu items [PLANE CHANGE], [SCALE CHANGE], and
[STORE] are the same as those on the TRACE display. See the section entitled TRACE
Display.
6-2-3 Restarting tool path check

(1) Press the menu selector key.
(2) Press the [PATH RESTART] menu key.
! The display status of the menu will then reverse and a restart data setting window will
be opened.
(3) Designate the restarting position of tool path checking.
- How to specify the restarting position of tool path checking is the same as for the restart in
the automatic operation mode.
See the Operating Manual, Part 4, Subsection 1-2-2 “Restart operation” for further details.
(4) Press the [PATH CONTINUE] or [PATH STEP] menu key.
! Tool path checking will then start from the designated position.
6-2-4 Block skip

Any block of the EIA/ISO program can be skipped to check the tool path.
(1) Press the menu selector key.
(2) Press the [BLOCK SKIP] menu key.
(3) Press the [PATH CONTINUE] or [PATH STEP] menu key.
How to specify the blocks to be skipped is the same as for the blocks in the automatic operation
mode. See the Operating Manual, Part 4, Section 2-5 “Block skip” for further details.
6-2-5 Window function (MONITOR window)

Pressing the [PROGRAM MONITOR] menu key displays the PROGRAM MONITOR window.
6-2-6 Changing over the TOOL PATH CHECK display to other displays
- Pressing the [PROGRAM] menu key allows you to shift to the PROGRAM display.
6-2-7 Virtual Machining

The tool path specified in a MAZATROL program can be checked in a quasi-actual machining
image by executing the Virtual Machining function, so that a cutting area error and other
abnormalities can be detected in an earlier stage and the test cutting time can be saved
correspondingly. A detailed description is given in Chapter 12.
6-4
6-2-8 Checking for collision
The Virtual Machining function can be used to check the program data for eventual collision of
the tool or tool holder with the workpiece, etc.
1. Description of checking
The program data can be checked for collision by executing the tool path check with the Virtual
Machining function.
- An occurrence of collision causes the corresponding alarm to be displayed.
- Sections undergoing the collision with the tool or holder will be indicated in a color distinct from
that of normal cutting.
Note: The alarm will not be caused anew during subsequent checking after a collision even if
the section of the collision, which is then treated as having been removed, comes to
suffer repetitive collision.
2. Supplementary description
- Irrespective of the components concerned, all the sections of collision are indicated in the same
distinct color.
- Multiple eventual sections of collision during one step of tool path check can all be indicated
and treated as having been removed, indeed, but the alarm can only refer to the section of the
first collision.
6-5
6-3 SHAPE CHECK Display

Function
Displaying the shape of machining that is defined in a program
Remarks
- This display mode can be used only while MAZATROL program creation or editing is in
progress. You can shift to this display directly from the DISPLAY MAP display.
- This display can be called up to check whether the data in a program is correct.
6-3-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[4]
[6] [1]
[2]
[3]
[5]
[6]
[6] [6]
D740S3024E
[1] WNo. — Same as the data item of the POSITION display
[2] UNo. — Unit and sequence number of the program displayed graphically
Coordinate values of the leading end of the currently displayed machining
[3] X, Y, Z mm (in.)
shape with respect to the workpiece zero-point or the machine origin
[4] Scale mm (in.) Scaling factor for the figure being displayed
Machining shape that has been defined by the program
[5] Graphics — * As for line machining shapes (contours), the starting point and ending point
of each component are always rectilinearly connected (interpolated) for a
representation in so simple and readily identifiable a format as possible.
[6] X, Y, Z mm (in.) Display limit (automatically determined according to the machining shape)
6-6
(1) Select a shape display method.
- If the [SHAPE CONTINUE] menu key is pressed, the machining pattern will be
continuously displayed on the display.
- Each time [UNIT SHAPE] menu key is pressed, the machining pattern will be displayed
unit-by-unit on the display.
- Each time [SHAPE STEP] menu key is pressed, the machining pattern will be displayed
step-by-step on the display
- Pressing the menu key displays the menu item in reverse status. The machining pattern
will then be displayed.
The reverse display status of the menu item will be cleared when display of the machining
pattern is completed.
- If, for example, the [SHAPE STEP] menu key is pressed during continuous display of the
machining pattern, or if the [SHAPE CONTINUE] menu key is pressed during step-by-step
display of the machining pattern, the later selected menu function is available.
Note: Operating procedures of menu items [SHAPE ERASE], [DISPLAY MODE], [STORE]
and [SCALE CHANGE] are the same as those on the TRACE display. Refer to the
items in the section entitled TRACE Display.
6-7
6-4 PROGRAM FILE Display

Function:
Displaying the work numbers and other data of the programs pre-registered in the NC unit
Remarks:
The following operations can be carried out for the pre-registered programs:
- Name assignment
- Work number change
- Erasure
- Program copy
- Directory change
- Program transfer
6-4-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[6] [7] [8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
D740S0232E
6-8

Work number of a pre-registered program, and program type identification
(MAZATROL programs or EIA/ISO programs)
[1] WORK No. —
M: MAZATROL program
E: EIA/ISO program
[2] SIZE — Number of blocks in the registered program
[3] PROGRAM NAME — Name of the registered program
[4] CREATE DATE Y/M/D Date when the program was created
[5] WRITE DATE Y/M/D Date of the last edition of the program
[6] DIRECTORY — Name of the currently selected directory
[7] TOTAL PROGRAM — Number of registered programs
Usage ratio of the memory
a%
[8] MEMORY USED —
a: Usage ratio (=[Used memory]/[Total memory])
(Only displayed when the STANDARD PROGRAM area is selected)
6-4-2 Program name setting

For easy identification of programs pre-registered in the NC unit, a name consisting of 48
alphabetic/numeric letters or less can be assigned to each program.
Even without a program name, however, program execution itself is not affected.
(1) Place the cursor on the work number for which a program name is to be input.
- After calling up the cursor on the screen with the cursor key, move the cursor to the work
number of the intended program.
(2) Press the [NAME INPUT] menu key.
! The display status of [NAME INPUT] changes to reverse and the following window
appears.
(3) Set a program name and press the INPUT key.

! The name is set on the line where the cursor is present.
- Set a program name using address/numeric data keys.
6-9
6-4-3 Work number change

A work number is set during creation of a program. The work number of each program pre-
registered in the NC unit can be changed as required.
(1) Place the cursor on the work No. to be changed.
(2) Press the [PROGRAM RENUMBER] menu key.
! The display status of [PROGRAM RENUMBER] changes to reverse, and the following
window appears.
(3) Set a new work number and press the INPUT key.
! The old work number is overriden with the new one.
Note: At step (3), if you set the work number of another program pre-registered in the NC unit,
alarm 433 SAME PROGRAM EXISTS will be displayed.
6-4-4 Program erasure

This operation refers to erasing NC-registered programs. Carry out this operation if registered
programs become unnecessary.
1. Single program erasure

(1) Press the [PROGRAM ERASE] menu key.
(2) Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the program to be deleted.
(3) Press the [DELET A PROGRAM] menu key.
! The display status of [DELET A PROGRAM] changes to reverse, and the following
window appears:

! The selected program is deleted, the window disappears and the reverse display of the
menu item cleared.
However, if the automatic operation work number designated on the POSITION display
is set and then the INPUT key is pressed, the monitor will display the message ACTIVE
PROGRAM ERASE <INPUT>?. To execute erasure, press the INPUT key once again,
or to cancel erasure, press any other key.
6-10
2. Multiple program erasure
(2) Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the uppermost or lowermost one of the programs to
be deleted.
(3) Press the [SELECT & DELET PROGRAMS] menu key.
! The display status of [SELECT & DELETE PROGRAMS] changes to reverse, and the
message FINAL POINT <INPUT>? is displayed.
(4) Use the UP and DOWN keys to select the other border one of the programs to be deleted,
and press the INPUT key.
! The selected programs are deleted at one time, and the reverse display of the menu
item cleared.
3. All program erasure

This operation refers to erasing all NC-registered programs at one time.
(2) Press the [ALL ERASE] menu key.
! The display status of [ALL ERASE] changes to reverse.
(3) Key in −9999 and press the INPUT key.
! All the programs pre-registered in the NC unit are erased.
Note: If you set a value other than −9999, alarm 401 ILLEGAL FORMAT will be displayed.
6-4-5 Program copy

This operation enables the previously registered programs within the NC unit to be copied. Use
this function to newly create the similar programs as those which have been registered.
(1) Move the cursor to the line where the work number of the program to be copied is displayed.
- The cursor can be set at any of the items present on the line where the intended work
number is displayed.
(2) Press the [PROGRAM COPY] menu key.
! [PROGRAM COPY] will then reverse and the following window will appear.
(3) Enter a new work number, and press the INPUT key.
! A program having the same contents as those of the original will be created under the
new work number.
Note: At step (3), if you set the work number of another program pre-registered in the NC unit,
alarm 433 SAME PROGRAM EXISTS will be displayed.
6-11
6-4-6 Program editing

Use the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu function as required to edit the program selected on the
PROGRAM FILE display.
(1) Move the cursor to the line where the work number of the program to be edited is displayed.
(2) Press the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu key.
According as the selected program is created in the MAZATROL or EIA/ISO format, the
corresponding display of programming will be called up with the program in question selected in
the editing mode.
6-4-7 Opening the shape drawing window

Shape drawing is a function that draws the shape data of an NC-registered program in the
window. See Section 4-1 “POSITION Display” to check further details of the drawing function.
(1) Set the cursor on the work number of the program that contains the shape data to be drawn.
- After displaying the cursor on the monitor by pressing the cursor key, move the cursor to
the work number of the program that contains the shape data to be drawn.
! [PART SHAPE] will reverse and the shape drawing window will open.
See Section 4-1 “POSITION Display” to check the types of data displayed in the PART
SHAPE window.
- Press the [PART SHAPE] menu key again if the PART SHAPE window is to be cleared.
! [PART SHAPE] will then be displayed in the normal-display status and the PART
SHAPE window will close.
Note: Alarm 465 EIA SHAPE DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed at step (2) if an EIA/ISO
program without shape data is designated.
6-12
6-4-8 Directory change
The program storage area in and for the NC unit is divided into five sub-areas:
- STANDARD PROGRAM area:
Stores programs created on the PROGRAM display and used for MEMORY operation.
- BACKUP PROGRAM area:
Backs up each program.
- HDD OPERATION PROGRAM area:
Stores programs used for Hard Disk operation or USB operation (*1).
- ETHERNET OPE. PROGRAM area (*2):
Stores programs used for Ethernet operation.
- IC CARD PROGRAMS area (*3):
Stores programs used for IC Card operation.
(*1) For USB operation, the folder that has been specified in the hard-disk operating area is set
to the folder existing on a USB drive. See Subsection 6-4-11 for the folder-changing
procedure.
(*2/3) The area can only be displayed when the corresponding optional function is selected.
Use the following procedure to change the area of the programs to be displayed on the
PROGRAM FILE display:
(1) Press the [DIR. CHANGE] menu key.
! [DIR. CHANGE] changes to reverse and the following window appears:
(2) Using the cursor keys, select the desired storage area.
! The programs stored in the selected area will be listed on the display.
6-13
6-4-9 Program transfer

Use the following procedure to transfer a program from one storage area to another:
(1) Press the [PROGRAM TRANSFER] menu key.
! The display status of [PROGRAM TRANSFER] changes to reverse and the following
window appears:
(2) Specify the work number of the program to be transferred and select the destination area.
! The specified program will be transferred to the selected storage area.
- The program transfer will be started by pressing the INPUT key INPUT or clicking the [OK]
button with the mouse.
- When the program in question is to be ‘moved’ (i. e. cleared from the source area upon
completion of the transfer), click the MOVE check box with the mouse to assign a check-
off mark. Alternatively, move the highlighting to the MOVE check box with the aid of the
Tab key and then press the space key.
- Click the OVER WRITE check box with the mouse to allow the data to be overwritten
without causing an alarm in case the specified work number should be occupied in the
destination area. Alternatively, move the highlighting to the OVER WRITE check box with
the aid of the Tab key and then press the space key to assign a check-off mark.
- When multiple programs are to be transferred in sequence, click the button with the
mouse. The button will then remain held down ( ) and the window will not disappear
automatically when the transfer of a program is completed. Click the button again to
retrieve the normal closing function.
Alternatively, move the highlighting to the button with the aid of the Tab key and
then press the space key to select and deselect the function.
Note: Only EIA/ISO programs can be transferred to the HDD OPERATION PROGRAM or
ETHERNET OPE. PROGRAM area.
6-14
6-4-10 Rearranging programs
Programs can be rearranged in normal ascending or descending order of their attributes.
(1) Click the mouse at the WORK No. title on the display.
Click the mouse at

the Work No. title
! Programs will be rearranged in descending order of the work number.
A re-click of the WORK No. title will rearrange the programs in normal ascending order of the
work number.
Similarly, clicking the mouse at SIZE, PROGRAM NAME, CREATE DATE, etc. allows the
programs to be rearranged in normal ascending or descending order of their attributes.
6-15
6-4-11 Changing a reference folder

Prior to shipping from the factory, the reference folders for the backup area, hard disk operation
area, Ethernet operation area and IC card operation area are preset as listed in the table below.
[Folder names for each area]
Area name Folder name
Backup area C:\MC Backup\Programs
Hard disk operation area C:\MC Direct Mode Programs
Ethernet operation area C:\MC Direct Mode Programs
IC card operation area \MCICPROG
Execute the following procedure to change the reference folder:

(1) Press the window key and select [BACKUP PROGRAM] under [Setup] on the menu
bar. And then press the INPUT key.
! The following window will be displayed.
(2) Input the folder name and press the INPUT key.
- Click [BROWSE] to display the tree of the available folders, and select an item if it is to be
set as a folder name. Complete the setting by clicking the [OK] button.
To change the reference folder corresponding to the hard disk operation area, select “Hard Disk
Operation Area” in step (1). Likewise, to change the folder area corresponding to the Ethernet
operation area, select “Ethernet Operation Area” in step (1).
6-16
6-4-12 Program management functions
For some specific program numbers (of four-digit, from 8000 to 9999), erasure and editing of the
programs and their call-out on the PROGRAM display can be prohibited by using parameters.
The following describes three available functions.
1. Prohibition of selected-program editing

Irrespective of the valid or invalid status of the write protect key, execution of the operations
listed in the table below is disabled for the selected program.
The alarm 406 MEMORY PROTECT will occur if an attempt is made to carry out these
operations.
Type of display Prohibited item

PROGRAM display - Modifying the selected program
(MAZATROL, EIA/ISO)
PROGRAM FILE display - Erasing the selected program
* Execution of [ALL ERASE] erases all programs, except the selected ones.
- Registering the name of the selected program
- Renumbering the selected program
2. Prohibition of selected-program call

Display of the contents of the selected program is prohibited.
The alarm 402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT will occur if an attempt is made to carry out for the
selected program the operations listed in the table below.
Type of display Prohibited item

PROGRAM display - Searching for the work number of the selected program
(MAZATROL, EIA/ISO) - Copying from the selected program (unit copying and shape copying included)
PROGRAM FILE display - Renumbering the selected program
EIA MONITOR display - Displaying the selected program for monitoring purposes (No alarms will result even
if an attempt is made to call up the selected program.)
DATA I/O display - Saving or punching the selected program
(CMT, DNC, TAPE) * If [ALL PUNCH] is executed using TAPE mode, the selected program will not be
punched.
* The alarm 517 (or 587) PROG. OPERATION NOT ALLOWED or 547 TAPE
PUNCHER ERROR will occur if an attempt is made to execute a saving or punching
operation under a previously set status of the work number of the selected program.
* Loading of the selected program is possible.
3. Description of parameters
Address Description
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Program management function
Prohibition of editing (#9000-#9999)

F81 Prohibition of call (#9000-#9999)
Prohibition of editing (#8000-#9999)
Prohibition of call (#8000-#9999)
6-17
6-5 PROCESS CONTROL Display

Function:
The logical linking status of processes within the program and the configurations of the
subprograms within the processes are displayed.
Remarks:
Subprograms that are called up from the EIA/ISO programs will not be displayed on this display.
6-5-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [2] [3]
[4] [5] [6]
D740S3025E
2. Displayed data description

[1] PNo. — Process number
[2] UNIT — Name of the unit used to divide processes
[3] PNo. — Pallet number
[4] LNo. — Layout number
[5] MAIN — Work number of the main program
[6] SUB 1 to 8 — Work number of the subprogram (Nesting 1 to 8)
" mark will be diplayed for invalid data items.
6-18
6-5-2 Process-number search
In the initial status of the display, control data related to the first process of the specified program
will be displayed. If control data related to the other processes of the specified program is to be
checked on the screen, use the procedure described below.
(1) Press the [PROC. No. SEARCH] menu key.
! This will cause the display status of [PROC. No. SEARCH] to reverse.
(2) Using the appropriate numeric key(s), specify the identification number of the process
whose control data is to be checked. Then, press the INPUT key.
! The input process number will then be displayed in the PNo. item (data portion [1]), and
the control data of the specified process will be displayed on the screen.
! Subsequently, the reverse-display status of [PROC. No. SEARCH] will be released.

1. The cursor can be moved up- and downward on a process basis by pressing the respective
page key.
2. The display can be switched over to the PROGRAM LAYOUT display by pressing the
[PROGRAM LAYOUT] menu key.
6-19
6-6 PROGRAM LAYOUT Display

Function:
- The tools to be used in the processes of the MAZATROL program are displayed in the order of
machining.
- This display can be used to edit a tool priority number and to write the data into the program.
Remarks:
- For both multi-workpiece machining and subprogram looping, only one time of program data is
displayed.
- This display can be called up from the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display, the PROCESS
CONTROL display and the DISPLAY MAP display. When this display is called from the
PROGRAM or PROCESS CONTROL display, process layout information for the cursor
position is displayed. When the PROGRAM LAYOUT display is called from the DISPLAY MAP
display, the process layout information is displayed from the head of the program.
6-6-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [3]
[2]
[4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14]
D740S3026E
6-20

[1] MAIN WNo. — Work number of the main program
[2] SUB WNo. — Work number of the subprogram
[3] PROCE.No. — Number of the process being displayed/Total number of processes
[4] PNo. — Process number
[5] PRI. No. — Tool priority number
[6] SNo. — Tool sequence number
[8] NOM-φ mm (in.) Nominal diameter of the tool
[9] LNo. — Layout number
[10] UNo. — Unit number
[11] UNIT — Name of the unit
[12] ANGLE C degrees Angle specified as ANGLE-C in the unit
[13] ANGLE A degrees Angle specified as ANGLE-A in the unit
6-6-2 Priority number setting

Tool priority numbers can be set on a tool sequence basis.
(1) Move the cursor to the PRI. No. item to be set.
(2) Input a machining priority number, and press the INPUT key.
! The machining priority number will be set in the position of the cursor.
Note: The operations described later in Subsection 6-6-8 “Program write” must be carried out
before the priority number that has thus been edited on this display can be
incorporated into the program.
6-6-3 Delay priority designation

A delay machining priority number can be designated during tool priority number setting.
(1) Move the cursor to the PRI. No. item for which delay machining is to be set.
(2) Press the [DELAY PRIORITY] menu key.
(3) Input a delay machining priority number, and press the INPUT key.
! The delay machining priority number will be set in the position of the cursor and the
reverse-display status of [DELAY PRIORITY] will be released.
6-6-4 Priority number assignment

A tool priority number can be assigned to all tools of the same type within the process.
(1) Move the cursor to the PRI. No. item to be assigned.
(2) Press the [PRI. No. ASSIGN] menu key.
(3) Input a tool priority number, and press the INPUT key.
! The tool priority number will be assigned to all tools of the same type within the process,
and the reverse-display status of [PRI. No. ASSIGN] will be released.
- Alarm 420 SAME DATA EXISTS will result if the designated priority number already
exists.
6-21
6-6-5 Priority number movement

A tool priority number can be moved.
(1) Move the cursor to the PRI. No. item to be moved.
(2) Press the [PRI. No. MOVE] menu key.
(3) Input a destination tool priority number , and press the INPUT key.
! The tool priority number will be moved, and the reverse-display status of [PRI. No.
MOVE] will be released.
Example:
No. PRI.No. SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. PRI.No. SNo. TOOL NOM-φ
1 1 FCE MILL 50. Reverse 1 1 FCE MILL 50.
2 1 FCE MILL 50. display status 2 1 FCE MILL 50.
of
3 1 FCE MILL 50. 3 1 FCE MILL 50.
[PRI. No.
4 2 END MILL 15. 4 4 END MILL 15.
MOVE]
6 3 END MILL 12. Setting “4” 6 3 END MILL 12.
9 4 DRILL 8. 9 5 DRILL 8.
10 4 DRILL 8. 10 5 DRILL 8.
11 5 DRILL 10. 11 6 DRILL 10.
12 5 DRILL 10. 12 6 DRILL 10.
- All source tool priority numbers that have been designated using the cursor are overriden
with destination tool priority numbers.
- When the priority number is inserted into the movement destination, the destination priority
number and subsequent ones will increment by one if all these numbers are in succession.
1) A train of priority 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 will become
number of
1, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 if 2 is “moved” to 5.
2) A train of priority 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 will become

number of
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 9 if 5 is “moved” to 2.
3) A train of priority 1, 2, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 will become

number of
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8 if 7 is “moved” to 3, of which priority

number has not been designated
6-22
* If, in procedural step (1), the cursor is set to a position in which a priority number has not been
designated, only the tool sequence priority number at the cursor position will move.
Example:
No. PRI.No. SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. PRI.No. SNo. TOOL NOM-φ
1 1 FCE MILL 50. Reverse display 1 1 FCE MILL 50.
2 1 FCE MILL 50. status of 2 1 FCE MILL 50.
3 1 FCE MILL 50. [PRI. No. 3 1 FCE MILL 50.
4 END MILL 15. MOVE] 4 4 END MILL 15.
Setting “4”
9 4 DRILL 8. 9 5 DRILL 8.
10 4 DRILL 8. 10 5 DRILL 8.
11 5 DRILL 10. 11 6 DRILL 10.
12 5 DRILL 10. 12 6 DRILL 10.
6-6-6 Erasure of all priority numbers

All tool priority numbers for the process can be erased.
(1) Press the [PRI. No. ALL ERAS] menu key.
! The display status of [PRI. No. ALL ERAS] will reverse.
! All tool priority numbers will be erased and the reverse-display status of [PRI. No. All
ERAS] will be released.
6-6-7 Store
The tool priority number being edited can be stored.
Before changing the display during editing, carry out the storage operation described below.
Otherwise, the edited data will be erased when the display is changed.
(1) Press the [STORE] menu key.
! The display status of [STORE] will then reverse to indicate that the editing data is
stored.
Note 1: If, during storage, the PROGRAM LAYOUT display is selected from the PROGRAM
display, the program layout of the stored process data will be displayed, irrespective of
the position of the cursor on the PROGRAM display.
Note 2: If, during storage, the PROGRAM LAYOUT display is selected from the PROCESS
CONTROL display, the program layout of the stored process data will be displayed,
irrespective of the position of the cursor on the PROCESS CONTROL display.
Note 3: In the cases listed below, the message ERASE LAYOUT DATA Y<1>, N<0>? is
displayed. Input “1” if the layout data is to be erased, or input “0” if the data is not to be
erased. The above message will not be displayed if [STORE] is cancelled by pressing
the [STORE] menu key once again.
- If an attempt is made to modify the work number on the PROGRAM display
(that is, if the [WORK No.] menu key is pressed)
- If an attempt is made to select the programming mode on the PROGRAM display
(that is, if the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu key is pressed)
6-23
6-6-8 Program write

Data that has been set in the PROGRAM LAYOUT display can be written into the program.
After editing, however, the program write operation described below must be carried out to
incorporate the data into the program.
(1) Press the [PROGRAM WRITE] menu key.
! The display status of [PROGRAM WRITE] will reverse.
! After the data has been written into the program, the reverse-display status of
[PROGRAM WRITE] will be released and the display will be made once again in order
with the first priority number first.
6-6-9 Simultaneous use of functions

Two of the three functions described above can be used at the same time. Selected two
functions are executed at the same time.
Functions that can be used simultaneously

Delay priority Priority number assignation Priority number movement
Delay priority # #
Priority number assignment # ×
Priority number movement # ×
#: Can be used at the same time
×: Cannot be used at the same time
6-6-10 Changing the display mode

The available display modes of the PROGRAM LAYOUT display are as follows.
1. Process-specific display mode (1 PROC.)
2. Total program display mode (ALL PROC)
The PROGRAM LAYOUT display is initially displayed in the “1 PROC.” mode. The display mode
selected last will be maintained, and restored next time the PROGRAM LAYOUT display is
selected.
Press the menu selector key as required to display the following menu items.
Menu item Function
PREV.
Used in the “1 PROC.” mode to display the program layout of the previous process.
PROCESS
NEXT
Used in the “1 PROC.” mode to display the program layout of the next process.
PROCESS
This menu item is highlighted in the “1 PROC.” display mode. Press the menu key in the “ALL PROC”
display mode to select the “1 PROC.” display mode.
When the PROGRAM LAYOUT display is called up from the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) or PROCESS
1 PROC.
CONTROL display, the layout of that process will be displayed which is marked with the cursor on the
preceding display (on condition that the PROGRAM LAYOUT display has been left in the “1 PROC.”
display mode).
This menu item is highlighted in the “ALL PROC” display mode. Press the menu key in the “1 PROC.”
ALL PROC
display mode to select the “ALL PROC” display mode.
6-24
6-6-11 Program reference window
Selecting the [Program] option through [Window] on the menu bar allows a program reference
window to be opened beginning at the unit of the tool sequence indicated by the cursor.
1. The program data displayed in the window cannot be scrolled.
2. Tool priority numbers can be set with the window remaining opened. After the priority
number has been specified and the INPUT key pressed, the cursor moves downward to the
next line and the window closes.
3. The window will be closed if a page key or a cursor key is pressed.
Note: Tool sequence of SNo. 11 onward cannot be displayed in this window. In order to
monitor such a tool sequence, call up the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display.
6-25
6-7 MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT Display

Function:
The machining time and the spindle output data are listed for each tool according to the
estimates made by the checking operation on the TOOL PATH CHECK display. The machining
time can therefore be reduced effectively.
Remarks:
- The navigation function gives modification data so that cutting conditions can be optimized for
each tool.
- Recommended tools are presented to allow more effective machining with each tool type.
6-7-1 Data display
1. Displayed data with the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu item in normal display
[1]
[2] [3]
[4] [27]
[5]
[6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15]
D740S3027E
6-26
2. Displayed data with the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu item in highlighted display
[1]
[2] [3]
[4] [27]
[5]
[16]
[22] [26]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[23]
[20] [24]
[21] [25]
D740S3028E

Work number of the machining program currently selected on the
PROGRAM display.
[1] WNo. — WNo. a b (c)

a : Work number
c : Program name
[2] TOTAL SEQ. — Total number of tool sequences in the program
[3] TIME H/M/S Total machining time estimated
NUMER OF T- Number of tool change operations required for the machining.
[4] —
CODE Not displayed till completion of tool layout.
RATIO OF
[5] — Color-identified graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each tool
MACHINING TIME
[6] — Serial number of the machining process
[7] TNo. — Tool number
[9] NOM-φ/NOM — Nominal diameter or nominal size of the tool and tool identification code
[10] SEC sec Estimated machining time
[11] AVERAGE kW Estimated average value of spindle output (see Note 2.)
[13] UNo. — Unit number
[14] UNIT — Unit name
[15] SNo. — Tool sequence number (Point/Line/Face machining)
[16] TIME RATIO % Ratio of machining time for each tool sequence
[17] RPM min–1 Spindle speed specified in the tool sequence
6-27

m/min
[18] C-SP Cutting speed (peripheral speed) specified in the tool sequence
(feet/min)
mm/rev Feed rate specified in the tool sequence
(in./rev) (upper: Rate of feed per revolution)
[19] FR
mm/min Feed rate specified in the tool sequence
(in./min) (lower: Rate of feed per minute)
[20] DEP-Z mm Axial cutting depth specified in the tool sequence
[21] WID-R mm Radial cutting depth specified in the tool sequence
Ratio of the average spindle load to the output characteristics, estimated for
[22] SPDL AVERAGE %
the tool sequence
Number of teeth (cutting edges) of the tool (according to the setting on the
[23] TEETH —
TOOL FILE or TOOL DATA display)
Material of the tool in the tool sequence (according to the setting on the
[24] MAT. —
TOOL DATA display)
Diameter of the tool in the tool sequence (according to the setting on the
[25] ACT-φ mm (in.)
TOOL DATA display)
Spindle output characteristic curve (in red) with respect to the spindle
SPINDLE OUTPUT
[26] — speed, estimated for the tool sequence. The average output is also
CURVE
estimated and indicated by a white triangle.
[27] NUM. OF INDEX — Total number of indexing operations executed
Note 1: No significant data can be presented on this display till completion of the checking
operation for the desired program on the TOOL PATH CHECK display. (The execution
of the Virtual Machining function is of no effect for this display.)
Note 2: The average value of spindle output is estimated according to the particular workpiece
material, and the coefficients used in the calculation of the average output are
described and stored for each material in a text file (c:\nm64mdata\eng\cspmat.txt) on
the hard disk as shown below.
The indication of the average output will be zero (0) in case the text file contains no
descriptions for the workpiece material specified in the program.
c:\nm64mdata\eng\cspmat.txt ← File name
[Material-1]
Name=FC250 ← Workpiece material
Coeff-1=38
Coeff-2=568
Coeff-3=73
Coeff-4=139 Description of the coefficients used in the calculation of the average output
Coeff-5=105 for a workpiece made of FC250. Do not change the values inadvertently.
Coeff-6=295
Coeff-7=1500
Coeff-8=25
[Material-2]
Name=FCD450
Coeff-1=31
Coeff-2=568
Coeff-3=73
Coeff-4=142
Coeff-5=105
Coeff-6=294
Coeff-7=1100
Coeff-8=25
[Material-3] * “eng” in the file name corresponds with the language currently selected for
Name=S45C the display mode.
Coeff-1=23
: * No registration for a new material can be made arbitrarily since the file
: only contains coefficients strictly certificated.
6-28
6-7-2 Displaying data
The functions of this display cannot be applied for a machining program which has not yet been
checked on the TOOL PATH CHECK display.
(1) Select the TOOL PATH CHECK display.
- The desired program must have been selected beforehand on the PROGRAM display.
(2) Carry out the checking operation completely.
- Refer to Section 6-2 for the checking procedure.
(3) Select the MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT display.
! The estimates of the machine operation will be displayed in the total display mode
described in the following subsection.
- No data will be displayed if the checking operation has not yet been completed at all. In
case the checking operation based on a program of the same work number has already
been completed, however, data at that time will be displayed.
6-7-3 Display modes
1. Outline
This display has the following two display modes:
- Total display mode
The display is always made in this mode when the MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT
display is selected.
In this display mode, estimated machining time and average spindle output are listed for each
tool sequence in addition to the general information about execution of the program.
- Tool-specific display mode
In this display mode, which can be selected and canceled by pressing the [TOOL OPTIMIZE]
menu key, data of a specific tool sequence listed up in the total display mode can be selectively
displayed in further detail. Moreover, cutting conditions specified in the program can be
modified through this display.
6-29
2. Changing from the total to the tool-specific display mode

(1) Check that a graphic display of the ratio of machining time for each tool sequence is
presented under RATIO OF MACHINING TIME.
- For a program the tool-path checking of which has been completed, estimated machining
time ratio for each tool sequence to the total machining time will be displayed in a color-
identified format on a strip graph as shown in the display example below. The items on the
strip graph are keyed from left to right, in a one-to-one correspondence, to those line items
of the list (estimated machining time and average spindle output for each tool sequence)
that are displayed at the bottom of the graph.
Graphic display of
the ratio of
estimated
machining time
List
(2) Press a cursor key.

! The cursor will appear in the TNo. column.
- A black triangle (▲) will be displayed under the graph RATIO OF MACHINING TIME to
indicate the item of the tool sequence currently selected by the cursor, as shown in the
display example below.
Indicates the item

of the selected
tool sequence
Cursor
(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor on the desired tool sequence number.
! The black triangle will move correspondingly with the cursor so that the ratio of the
estimated machining time of the specific tool sequence to the total machining time can
be visually checked.
(4) Press the [TOOL OPTIMIZE] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the display contents will be changed
for a detailed view of the specified tool.
- Press the same menu key once again, and the total display mode will be retrieved and the
6-30
3. NAVIGATE window
In the tool-specific display mode, machining navigation (guidance) information can be displayed
in a window to reduce the machining time for the selected tool sequence.
The cutting conditions and know-how for developing the capabilities of your machine to their
maximum are supplied in the machining navigation information.
(1) Press the [NAVIGATE] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the window for the machining
navigation information will be displayed.
- Press the same menu key once again, and the window will be closed and the reverse
display of the menu item cleared.
$ Do not follow in actual machining the navigation given here which may not apply to any
conditions of tool, fixtures, workpiece etc. without strictly checking for the operational
safety.
WARNING
4. EXAMPLE window
In the tool-specific display mode, the MAZAK-recommended effective tools are presented in a
window for the selected tool sequence.
(1) Press the [EXAMPLE] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the window for the recommended
effective tools will be displayed.
- Press the same menu key once again, and the window will be closed and the reverse
display of the menu item cleared.
$ Do not use in actual machining the cutting conditions presented here which may not apply
to any conditions of tool, jig, workpiece etc. without strictly checking for the operational
safety.
WARNING
6-31
6-7-4 Modifying the cutting conditions

In the tool-specific display mode, cutting conditions specified in the PROGRAM display can be
modified through this display.
Note: Modification and incorporation of the cutting conditions into the program will not
immediately update the data in this display. Perform the checking operation anew on
the TOOL PATH CHECK display for that purpose (modification of the program data on
the PROGRAM display is of course not required).
1. Modifying the cutting conditions

The cutting conditions specified in the program can be modified in the tool-specific display mode.
The modified conditions, however, will not be incorporated into the program until the [WRITE
PROGRAM] menu function is executed.
(1) Select the tool-specific display mode.
- Cutting conditions cannot be modified until the tool-specific display mode has been
selected for the desired tool sequence.
(2) Press the [C-COND CHANGE] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the cursor will be placed on the C-SP
text box in the CUTTING COND. display area, which indicates that the values in this
area can now be modified.
- Press the same menu key once again, and the data modification will be prohibited once
again and the reverse display of the menu item cleared.
Example:
(a) With normal display of the menu item (b) With reverse display of the menu item
Cursor
Note: It is possible to edit the four cutting conditions displayed in the CUTTING COND.
display area (C-SP, FR, DEP-Z, and WID-R), of which, however, only those
corresponding to the selected tool sequence are subjected to the edition.
Refer to the Programming Manual - MAZATROL - for the description of the data
items of the tool sequence.
(3) Using the cursor keys, position the cursor on the desired text box.
- The cursor can only be placed on the available boxes.
(4) Specify new cutting condition and press the INPUT key.
! The value selected by the cursor will be overridden by the new data.
6-32
2. Cancelling the modification
Before execution of the [WRITE PROGRAM] menu function, the modification data can any time
be canceled and the original data retrieved by the following procedure:
(1) Press the [CLEAR DATA] menu key.
! The entire text data in the CUTTING COND. display area will be changed to the original
data (current settings on the PROGRAM display).
- This operation can be performed any time, irrespective of the display status of the [C-
COND CHANGE] menu item, unless the [WRITE PROGRAM] menu function has been
executed.
3. Incorporating the modification into the program

Carry out the following operation to incorporate the modified cutting conditions into the program:
(1) Press the [WRITE PROGRAM] menu key.
! The modified cutting conditions will be incorporated definitely into the program.
- This operation can be performed any time, irrespective of the display status of the [C-
COND CHANGE] menu item.
Note: Once this menu item has been selected, the modification clearing operation described
in item 2 above will only retrieve the modified values (the original data will have been
cleared from the memory).
6-33
- NOTE -
6-34 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS 7
7 DISPLAYS RELATED TO TOOLS
7-1 TOOL DATA Display

Function:
- Registering magazine-mounted tools and setting tool shape data and the data required for
management of the tools
Remarks:
- Tool materials data that has been set on this display is used as learning data relating to cutting
conditions.
- Tools can also be registered on the TOOL LAYOUT display.
- Tool lengths can be manually measured using this display.
7-1-1 Data display
1. Outline
List of tool data. Information on the tool selected

from the list at left.
D740S3029E
A list of tool data is displayed at left, and detailed information on the tool selected from the list will
be displayed at right. Either of the two areas can be selected by using the Tab key and the
current selection is indicated by the reverse display of the title TOOL LIST or TNo. **:
CONTENTS in magenta.
The operation of the cursor keys and page keys differs as follows according to the selected area:
Key TOOL LIST area CONTENTS area
Cursor keys Selection of a tool data line Selection of a data item
Page keys Selection of a page of list Selection of a tool data line on the list page
H740S3G040E 7-1
2. Displayed data
A. TOOL LIST
[1] [2] [3][4] [5]
[6]
D740S3030E

Pocket number
[1] TNo. —
TNo. of the tool mouned on the spindle is reversed in blue.
[3] NOM-φ mm (in.) Nominal diameter of the tool
[4] ID Code — Suffix (Code that identifies tools of the same nominal diameter)
Status of the tool
INVA: invalid (prohibition of use)
[5] STAT. —
BRK: broken
OVER: tool life over
Current page and the total number of pages
a/b
[6] PAGE —
a: Current page
b: Total number of pages
7-2
B. Detailed information display
END MILL FCE MILL

1 1
2 2
3 4 3 4
5 5
6 7 6 7
8 8
9 10 9 10
11 12 11 12
14
15 16 15 16
17 18 17 18
19 20 21 19 20 21
22 23 24 22 23 24
25 26 27 25 26 27
28 29 30 28 29 30
31 31
CHAMFER BAL EMIL

1 1
2 2
3 4 3 4
5 5
6 6 7
8 8
9 10 9 10
11 12 11 12
15 16 15 16
17 18 17 18
19 20 21 19 20 21
22 23 24 22 23 24
25 26 27 25 26 27
28 29 30 28 29 30
31 31
TOL SENS CTR-DR

1 1
2 2
3 4 3 4
5 5
6 6
32 8
11 12
15 16
17 18 17 18
19 20 21 19 20 21
22 23 24 22 23 24
25 26 27 25 26 27
28 29 30 28 29 30
31 31
7-3
DRILL BCK FACE

1 1
2 2
3 4 3 4
5 5
6 6
32 8 8
9 10 10
11 12 11 12
13
33
15 16 15 16
17 18 17 18
19 20 21 19 20 21
22 23 24 22 23 24
25 26 27 25 26 27
28 29 30 28 29 30
31 31
REAMER TAP
1 1
2 2
3 4 3 4
5 5
6 6 7
8 34 8
35
11 12 11 12
15 16 15 16
17 18 17 18
19 20 21 19 20 21
22 23 24 22 23 24
25 26 27 25 26 27
28 29 30 28 29 30
31 31
BOR BAR B-B BAR

1 1
2 2
3 4 3 4
5 5
6 6
8 8
10 10
11 12 11 12
15 16 15 16
17 18 17 18
19 20 21 19 20 21
22 23 24 22 23 24
25 26 27 25 26 27
28 29 30 28 29 30
31 31
7-4
CHIP VAC
1
2
3 4
5
6
17 18
19 20 21
22 23 24
25 26 27
28 29 30
31

Number of the magazine pocket (or turret face). TNo. of the tool mouned on
1 TNo. —
the spindle (or currently indexed) is reversed in blue.
2 TOOL — Tool name
3 NOM-φ mm (in.) Nominal diameter or nominal size of the tool
4 INTERFER. — Intra-magazine interference data
5 ID CODE — Code for identifying tools of the same type and the same nominal diameter
6 LENGTH mm (in.) Length of the tool
7 ACT-φ mm (in.) Actual diameter of the tool
8 LENG COMP. mm (in.) Cutting-end position compensation value
9 THRUST F. % Thrust force coefficient for the Z-axis servomotor
10 HORSE PW % Horsepower coefficient for the milling spindle motor
–1
11 MAX. ROT. min Max. milling spindle speed
12 MAT. — Tool material
13 BORDER N・m Threshold for the drill pecking cycle of cutting-load detection type
14 CORNER R mm (in.) Corner R of an end-mill
15 LIFE TIME min Life time of the tool
16 CUT TIME min Tool operation time
17 LIFE NUM. — Tool life in number of machined pieces
18 USED NUM. — Number of pieces machined by the tool
Group number of the tool (the same group number is assigned to all tools
19 GROUP No. —
that are the same in both shape and dimensions.)
20 ACT-φ CO. mm (in.) Amount of tool diameter geometric compensation
21 ACT-φ No. — Offset number for tool diameter
22 IDNo. — Tool ID number
23 LENG. CO. mm (in.) Amount of tool length geometric compensation
24 LENG. No. — Offset number for tool length
25 WEAR COMP X mm (in.) Tool wear compensation amount in X-axis direction
26 WEAR COMP Z mm (in.) Tool wear compensation amount in Z-axis direction
27 WEAR COMP Y mm (in.) Tool wear compensation amount in Y-axis direction
28 MAX WEAR X mm (in.) Maximum admissible amount for wear compensation in X
7-5

29 MAX WEAR Z mm (in.) Maximum admissible amount for wear compensation in Z
30 MAX WEAR Y mm (in.) Maximum admissible amount for wear compensation in Y
31 TOOL MODEL — Name of the tool model
32 EDG-ANG degrees Nose angle of the tool
33 TEETH — Number of teeth (of a throw-away drill)
34 TAP TYPE — Method of tapping for the tap (synchronous/asynchronous)
35 REC. FEED % Return speed ratio for synchronous tapping
Note: The BORDER item is only displayed for the optional auto-pecking function.
7-6
7-1-2 Tool length list
1. Outline
A press of the [TOOL LENGTH] menu key on the TOOL DATA display changes the display of
the detailed tool information display area at the right of the display as shown below. In this
display format, it is possible to set, for multiple tools in succession, LENGTH, ACT-φ, LENG
COMP., and WEAR COMP data.
[1] [2] [3]
D740S3031E
A repress of the [TOOL LENGTH] menu key returns the display to the normal display format.
2. Display data description of the tool length list

[1] LENGTH mm (in.) Tool length of the tool
[2] ACT-φ mm (in.) Tool diameter of the tool
LENG COMP. or
[3] mm (in.) Cutting-end position/Wear compensation amount
WEAR COMP
Note: LENG COMP. or WEAR COMP is displayed according as parameter F166 bit 1 is set
to 0 or 1.
7-7
7-1-3 Registering the tools to be used (for MAZATROL programs)
1. Procedure for registering tools

Proceed as follows to register on the TOOL DATA display the tools to be used:
(1) Press the Tab key as required to select the left column (TOOL LIST) beforehand, and
press a cursor key to call up the cursor.
(2) Select the TNo. to be registered.
(4) Press the [TOOLDATA ASSIGN] menu key .
! This will cause the following menu to be displayed:
ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMFER BALL OTHER TOUCH >>>

[1]
CUTTER ENDMILL TOOL SENSOR
CENTER DRILL BACKSPOT REAMER TAP BORING BACK CHIP >>>

[2]
DRILL FACER BAR BOR. BAR VACUUM
- Pressing the [>>>] menu key will change the menu in the order of [1] → [2] → [1].
(5) From among the menus [1] and [2], select the name of the tool to be registered and press
the corresponding menu key. The selected tool name will be registered in the TOOL
column.
(6) Move the cursor to the NOM-φ item of the tool to be registered. Using the appropriate
numeric data key(s), specify the nominal diameter or nominal size. Then, press the INPUT
key.
(7) Move the cursor to the ID CODE item.
! The following menu will be displayed. From among the menus [1], [2] and [3] select an
appropriate suffix and press the corresponding menu key.
A B C D E F G H HEAVY >>>
[1]
TOOL
J K L M N P Q R HEAVY >>>
[2]
TOOL
S T U V W X Y Z HEAVY >>>
[3]
TOOL
- Pressing the [>>>] menu key will change the menu in the order of [1] → [2] → [3] → [1].
Note: Menus [1] to [3] are provided for assignment of a suffix (code that identifies tools
of the same nominal diameter). For heavy tools, suffix assignment must be made
with the [HEAVY TOOL] menu item reversed (by pressing the corresponding
menu key).
7-8
2. Tool length (LENGTH)
Using the appropriate numeric data key(s), specify the length of the tool and press the INPUT
key. For measuring the tool, refer to the following “Measurement of the tool lengths”.
Tool reference position
LENGTH
3. Tool diameter (ACT-φ) and cutting-end position compensation value (LENG COMP.)
Specify the tool diameter (actual diameter of the tool) using the appropriate numeric data keys,
and press the INPUT key.
Cutting-end position compensation is necessary for drills, back spot-facing tools, back-boring
bars, or other tools whose actual cutting-end positions are not at the tips of the tools.
LENG
COMP.
ACT-φ
Cutting-end position compensation value for drill M3S020
- For drills, the appropriate cutting-end position compensation value can be set from the nose
angle and nominal diameter by pressing the [AUTO SET] menu key.
- For drills, the appropriate cutting-end position compensation value can be set by setting the
nose angle for the tool.
4. TEETH, CORNER R and TAP TYPE

Set the number of cutting edges (TEETH) for a drill.
- Specify the number of cutting edges of the drill using numeric data keys.
7-9
5. CORNER R
Set the value of corner R (CORNER R) for an end-mill.
- Specify the value of corner R of the end-mill using numeric data keys.
Corner R of an end-mill refers to the radius of a corner of an end-mill.
This date is used in 3-D machining operations.
Comer R of an end-mill M3S021
6. TAP TYPE
Set the method of tapping for a tap.
- For a tapping tool, set the floating tap function or the fixed tap function by pressing the
[FLOATING TAP] or [FIXED TAP] menu key.
Press the [FLOATING TAP] menu key to select “asynchronous” as the type of tapping, or
press the [FIXED TAP] menu key to select “synchronous” as the type of tapping.
7. EDG-ANG
Specify the shape of the tool nose (tool nose angle) for a drill using the appropriate numeric data
keys, and press the INPUT key.
ACT- φ
EDG-ANG
WIDTH
8. Thrust force (THRUST F.)

To control the load current of the Z-axis servomotor, specify the thrust force of the milling tool
using the appropriate numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key.
- When the [AUTO SET] menu key is pressed, the NC equipment will calculate the maximum
permissible load value of the Z-axis servomotor and automatically set the adequate thrust force
coefficient (%).
Note 1: If the load on the Z-axis servomotor exceeds the percentage value that has been input
to the THRUST F. item, then the cutting feedrate will automatically decrease and the
load will be controlled to within its permissible limits.
Note 2: This item is valid only for machine models provided with an AFC function. This
operation does not need to be performed for the machine models of the standard
specifications.
7-10
9. Horse power (HORSE PW)
To control the load current of the milling spindle drive motor, specify the horse power of the
milling tool using the appropriate numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key.
- When the [AUTO SET] menu key is pressed, the NC equipment will calculate the maximum
permissible load value of the spindle drive motor and automatically set the adequate horse
power coefficient (%).
Note 1: If the load on the milling spindle drive motor exceeds the percentage value that has
been input to the HORSE PW item, then the cutting feedrate will automatically
decrease and the load will be controlled to within its permissible limits.
Note 2: Input of data to the HORSE PW item becomes necessary only for face-mills, end-mills,
boring bars, drills, backspot-facing tools, backboring bars or chamfering cutters.
Note 3: This item is valid only for machine models provided with an AFC function. This
operation does not need to be performed for the machine models of the standard
specifications.
10. REC. FEED

Set a returning speed rate (%) for that synchronous tapping tool.
Returning speed = REC. FEED/100 × Feed rate
(All REC. FEED settings less than 100% are handled as 100%.)
11. Maximum rotational speed (MAX. ROT.)

Specify the maximum rotational speed of the tool using the numeric data keys, and press the
INPUT key.
Note 1: The maximum rotational speed of the tool will not be limited if “0” remains set in this
item.
Note 2: The maximum rotational speed data cannot be set for TOL SENSOR and CHIP VAC.
12. Type of material (MAT.)

Press the menu key corresponding the type of material to be set, and press the INPUT key.
- If a milling tool that has been registered on the TOOL FILE display is registered here, the
corresponding type of material set previously on that display will be auto-set. (Only if a suffix is
set.)
- The material types presented in the menu here refer to the settings on the CUTTING
CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. display. See Section 8-1 for further details.
- Data that has been set in the MAT. item is referred to during automatic setting of cutting
conditions or used as tutorial data relating to cutting conditions in the MAZATROL program,
based on the data that has been registered on the CUTTING CONDITION display. See Section
8-2 for further details.
13. Threshold value (BORDER)

Set the threshold value of cutting load on the drill for auto-pecking. Determine the value with the
aid of the DRILL MONITOR display.
7-11
14. Tool life time (LIFE TIME)

Input tool life time (maximum possible operating time) using the numeric data keys, and press
the INPUT key.
Note: The NC unit cannot manage the life of that tool if “0” remains set at this item.
15. Tool operating time (CUT TIME)

Input tool operating time (cumulative cutting feed time) in minutes, and press the INPUT key.
- The tool operating time is automatically counted up during actual cutting feed of the tool.
The display of the CUT TIME item in the CONTENTS column and of the items TNo. and TOOL
in the TOOL LIST column will be reversed in magenta when the tool operating time reaches the
life time specified above.
- The display of the items TNo. and TOOL in the TOOL LIST column will be reversed in yellow
when the tool operating time “approaches” the life time specified above.
The judgment of the approach to the life time is made according to the setting of the following
parameters:
F82 bit 2 (Method of judgment)
= 0: The rate of the operating time to the life time has reached the setting of F77.
= 1: The remaining serviceable time has descended to the setting of F77.
F77 (Reference value of judgment)
For F82 bit 2 = 0: Critical rate of the operating time to the life time (in %).
For F82 bit 2 = 1: Critical remaining serviceable time (in minutes).
Note 1: This step is to be omitted for a new tool (to leave the default setting “0” as it is for the
CUT TIME item).
Note 2: The judgment of tools approaching the expiry of their life is not effectuated if parameter
F77 remains set to “0”.
16. Tool wear compensation data (WEAR COMP.)

As workpiece machining progresses, increasing wear on the tools may gradually deviate the
actual nose positions of the tools from the program-designated dimensions. Set any such errors
in this data item to carry out tool offset.
If tool offset is required following measurement of machined workpieces, tool wear compensation
data must be input.
Tool wear offset data will be automatically corrected by the offset value when a workpiece
measurement unit or a nose measurement unit in a MAZATROL program is executed.
17. Maximal available tool wear compensation data (MAX WEAR)

Set the maximal available tool wear compensation data. When the tool wear compensation data
reaches this data, the tool is regarded to be exhausted.
Setting such data enables spare tools to be indexed automatically.
18. Tool model

Use this item to register the shape model of the tool to be used for the INTELLIGENT SAFETY
SHIELD and Virtual Machining functions. Three types of tool models are available: Parametric
model, New model by rotation, and CAD model. See Chapter 12 for a detailed description.
7-12
7-1-4 Manual measurement of the tool lengths
The actual length of each tool to be used must be measured for setting data under LENGTH on
the TOOL DATA display. Measurement of the tool lengths can be made in the full-automatic
mode, the semi-automatic mode, or the manual mode. Here, the operating procedure for manual
tool-length measurement using the [LENGTH TEACH] function of the TOOL DATA display is
described. For the full-automatic and semi-automatic tool-length measurement procedures, see
the Operating Manual for the machine.
(1) Mount on the spindle the tool whose length is to be measured.
- Carry out the tool change operation to mount on the spindle the tool which is accomodated
in the magazine pocket. For the operation, see the Operating Manual for the machine.
(2) Move the spindle by manual operation and bring the tool tip into contact with the top surface
of either the reference block or the workpiece of a pre-determined height.
- For H-type machines, the edge locator of the table functions as reference. For the
operation, see the Operating Manual for the machine.
(3) Call up the TOOL DATA display on the screen.
(4) Press the [LENGTH TEACH] menu key.
! This will cause the display status of [LENGTH TEACH] to reverse. Subsequently, the
cursor will appear in the position of the LENGTH item of the tool currently mounted on
the spindle.
(5) Specify the height of either the reference block or the workpiece using the appropriate
numeric key(s), and then press the INPUT key.
! The NC equipment will then calculate the length of the tool mounted on the spindle,
and the calculated value will be automatically set under LENGTH. (See the following
figure.)
Machine
zero-point
Distance from the

machine zero-
point to the current Distance from the
position of the machine zero-point to
Manual axis machine
movement the table surface
(constant)
Current position
Tool length of the machine
Distance from the

table surface to Reference block
the tool tip or workpiece
Table
Tool length measurement M3S022
7-13
Note: In the case of the figure shown below, specify “0” and press the INPUT key.
Table
M3S023
- Since the current position of the machine is stored in the memory of the NC equipment, it
will calculate the length of the tool if the height of the reference block or workpiece (i.e., the
distance from the table surface to the tool tip) is specified.
- The reverse-display status of [LENGTH TEACH] will be released automatically.
7-14
7-1-5 Other functions (for MAZATROL programs)
1. TOOL SEARCH
This menu function should be used to search for a tool name that is registered on the TOOL
DATA display.
(1) Press the [TOOL SEARCH] menu key.
! The following menu will be displayed
ENDMILL FACEMILL CHAMFER BALL OTHER TOUCH >>>

[1]
CUTTER ENDMILL TOOL SENSOR
CENTER DRILL BACKSPOT REAMER TAP BORING BACK CHIP >>>

[2]
DRILL FACER BAR BOR. BAR VACUUM
- Pressing the [>>>] menu key will change the menu in the order of [1] → [2] → [1].
(2) From among the menus [1] and [2], select the menu item that corresponds to the tool name
to be searched for, and press the appropriate menu key.
! This will cause the display status of the selected menu item to reverse.
(3) Using the appropriate numeric data key(s), specify the nominal diameter value of the tool to
be searched for. Then, press the INPUT key.
! If the tool to be searched for is already registered, the line of the tool concerned will be
displayed and highlighted.
Example: When checking the tool number under which a drill with a nominal diameter of
12 mm is registered:
After pressing the [DRILL] menu key in procedural step (2), specify 12 and press the
INPUT key in procedural step (3).
This will cause the line concerned to be highlighted as shown below.
This shows that the tool to be searched for is registered under pocket number 4.
- If the INPUT key is pressed following this, the NC unit will check whether another
corresponding tool exists in the subsequent area, and the line of the tool concerned will be
highlighted next. If no corresponding tools can be found any more, then the alarm
message 407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.
Note: It is also possible to search for the corresponding tool name just by specifying TOOL
item. In this case, press only the INPUT key in procedural step (3) without specifying
the nominal diameter.
7-15
2. TOOLDATA ERASE
Use this menu function to erase tool data registered on the TOOL DATA display.
(1) Press the cursor key to select the line of the tool data to be erased.
Example: On the display shown below, if the END MILL data of tool number 4 is to be
erased:
Select TNo. 4.

! This will cause the display status of [TOOLDATA ERASE] to reverse.
! Selected tool data will be erased.
3. LIFE TOL SEARCH

Use this menu function to search the area after the currently selected tool for tools the life of
which is over.
(1) Press the [LIFE TOL SEARCH] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the message LIFE TOOL SEARCH
<INPUT>? will be displayed.
! The NC unit will verify in the above-mentioned area the existence of tools whose life is
over.
If such a tool is found, its data line is displayed in the selected state.
If no such tools are (more) found, an alarm (407 DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND) is
displayed.
4. INCH MODE and METRIC MODE menu functions (valid when the optional inch/metric unit
system change simplifying function is available)
These menu items are used to change the display mode and an input unit system (inch/metric)
on the TOOL DATA display.
[INCH MODE] is displayed in metric mode (F91 bit 4 = 0), and [METRIC MODE] is displayed in
inch mode (F91 bit 4 = 1).
- Selection of [INCH MODE] displays the menu item in reverse mode and the display mode as
well as the input unit system change from metric to inch.
- Selection of [METRIC MODE] displays the menu item in reverse mode and the display mode
as well as the input unit system change from inch to metric.
See the Section 11-6 for further details.
Note: Basically, this function is valid when an inch/metric unit system change simplifying
option is provided. Even when the option is provided, the change function cannot be
7-16
used if bit 1 in parameter F82 is set to “0” (inch/metric display selection invalid).
7-1-6 Setting tool data (for EIA/ISO programs)
Setting data in ACT-φ CO. or No. items and LENG CO. or No. items of this display allows tool
designation and tool life management using an EIA/ISO program.
select the line of the required tool by using the cursor keys.
(2) Press the Tab key to select the right colum (CONTENTS).
(3) Select the GROUP No. data box by using the cursor keys.
(4) Specify a group number using the numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key.
- Any group number from 0 to 99999999 can be set for the tool. Set one and the same
group number for multiple tools of the same type (in terms of both shape and dimensions)
in order that they shall be used as a spare tool for each other. For details of the spare tool
see Subsection 7-1-7.
Note: Group number 0 is not subjected to spare-tool searching.
- When the group number is set, the tool ID number will also be displayed at the same time.
To check details of the tool ID number, see Note 3 that follows.
(5) Select the ACT-φ CO. data box by using the cursor keys.
(6) Input tool diameter offset data using the numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key.
- When the tool diameter offset data is set, the No. item on the right will become blank to
indicate that the item has become invalid.
(7) Select the LENG. KO. data box by using the cursor keys.
(8) Input tool length offset data using the numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key.
- When the tool length offset data is set, the No. item on the right will become blank to
- For the current tool on the spindle only, tool length offset data can be set using the
[LENG-OFS TEACH] menu function. See Subsection 7-1-10 for further details.
(9) Select the No. data box on the right of ACT-φ CO.
(10) Input the offset number under which the tool diameter offset data to be referred to has been
set on the TOOL OFFSET display, and press the INPUT key.
- When the tool diameter offset number is set, the ACT-φ CO. item will become blank to
- See Section 7-3 for further details of the TOOL OFFSET display.
(11) Select the No. data box on the right of LENG CO.
(12) Input the offset number under which the tool length offset data to be referred to has been set
on the TOOL OFFSET display, and press the INPUT key.
- When the tool length offset number is set, the LENG CO. item will become blank to
- See Section 7-3 for further details of the TOOL OFFSET display.
Note 1: Tool length offset data and tool diameter offset data are to be set by either setting the
data directly on this display or setting the offset numbers corresponding to the offset
data that has been previously set on the TOOL OFFSET display.
7-17
Note 2: When the tool for which the offset data has been set on this display is to be used during
execution of the program, the offset data (or offset number data) that has been set on
this display will govern even if another offset data number has been designated in the
program.
Example:
Program
:
H1 Tool length offset number The offset data enclosed in becomes valid
Tool diameter offset number according to these blocks.
D2
T01T0M06 The offset data used for this block will be the data enclosed in according to
the settings as shown below on the TOOL DATA display.
:
TOOL OFFSET display TOOL DATA display
No. OFFSET
1 10.1
2 10.2
3 10.3
4 10.4
5 10.5
The program is executed according to the tool diameter offset data (No. 4 = 10.4) and
tool length offset data (No. 5 = 10.5) that have been set on the TOOL DATA display,
instead of the tool length offset data (H1 = 10.1) and tool diameter offset data (D2 =
10.2) that have been designated in the program.
Note 3: For a machine that has “visual tool ID/data management” functions, tools can be
managed using ID No. data. The data is to be set within the following range:
- Eight decimal digits (0 to 99999999)
For a machine that does not have “visual tool ID/data management” functions, ID No.
data does not have a meaning. The data can be freely used as tool identification
numbers or for any other purposes. In that case, the data can be set within the range
up to eight decimal digits.
Note 4: The “visual tool ID/data management” functions do not allow ID number editing on the
TOOL DATA display. If data editing is attempted, alarm 406 MEMORY PROTECT will
occur.
Note 5: If data is not displayed under GROUP No. or TOOL then data can be set under
GROUP No., and when any data has been set under GROUP No. under that state,
then data can be further set under ID No., ACT-φ CO. (or No.), LENG CO. (or No.),
LIFE TIME, CUT TIME, ACT-φ, LENG COMP., THRUST F., HORSE PW and MAX.
ROT.
7-18
Note 6: Tool diameter offset values and tool length offset values can be entered in inch or
metric units by selecting the [INCH MODE] or [METRIC MODE] menu item, respec-
tively.
Basically, this function is valid when an inch/metric unit system change simplifying
7-1-7 Setting tool group numbers

If a group number is set for the tools that are to be used during execution of an EIA/ISO program,
the next spare tool to be used will be auto-selected from tools of the same group number.
As for MAZATROL programs, spare tool management is performed by the tool name scheme.
1. Selection of spare tools

As listed below, two methods are available to select spare tools. Either is to be selected by
setting 0 or 1 in bit 2 of parameter F84.
- F84 bit 2 = 0: Group number scheme
- F84 bit 2 = 1: Tool name scheme
A. Group number scheme

Tools of the same group number are all regarded as spare ones, and tools that have neither yet
reached their lives nor become damaged are automatically selected in order with the smallest
tool number first.
B. Tool name scheme

Tools of the same tool name, the same nominal diameter, and the same suffix are all regarded
as spare ones, and tools that have neither yet reached their lives nor become damaged are
automatically selected in order with the smallest tool number first.
Note: If all spare tools have reached their lives or become damaged, life-expired one having
the largest tool number will be selected first.
2. Designation of tool numbers in the EIA/ISO program

As listed below, two methods are available to designate tool numbers in the EIA/ISO program.
Either is to be selected by setting 0 or 1 in bit 4 of parameter F94.
- F94 bit 4 = 0: Group number designation scheme
- F94 bit 4 = 1: Tool number designation scheme
A. Group number designation scheme

The T-command in the program is taken as the command for group number (GROUP No.). Tools
with the same GROUP No. as that of the commanded GROUP No. are selected as spare tools.
In this group number designation sheme, T01 in the program is taken as a command for group
No. 1. In case the group number “1” has been assigned for TNo. 2 and TNo. 3 on the TOOL
DATA display, the tool of TNo. 3 is selected if the life of the tool of TNo. 2 has already expired.
7-19
B. Tool number designation scheme

The T-command in the program is taken as the command for tool number (TNo.). Tools with the
same GROUP No. as that of the commanded TNo. are selected as spare tools.
In this tool number designation sheme, T01 in the program is taken as a command for TNo. 1. In
case the group number “2” has been assigned for TNo. 1 and TNo. 4 on the TOOL DATA display,
the tool of TNo. 4 is selected if the life of the tool of TNo. 1 has already expired.
Note: For both schemes, if there are multiple tools of the same group number, the
appropriate tool will be selected according to the particular method of selecting spare
tools.
7-1-8 Other functions (for EIA/ISO programs)
1. ADD. DATA CANCEL menu function

Use this menu function to erase only GROUP No. and ID No. data.
(3) Press the [ADD. DATA CANCEL] menu key.
! The added data (GROUP/ID No.) of the tool selected in Step (1) will then be erased.
7-1-9 MAZATROL tool data “INVALIDATION” (Option)
1. Overview
“INVALIDATION” is an option that makes registered MAZATROL tool data on the TOOL DATA
display invalid during program execution. The invalidated tool data is indicated by INVA under
STAT. for distinction from valid tool data.
Using this option, you can select tools from all those of the same type or set the tools not to be
used without deleting the tool data before executing the program.
2. Making the tool data valid/invalid
(3) To make the data selected in (1) valid/invalid, press the menu key [TOOLDATA VALID] or
[TOOL DATA INVALID] respectively.
“INVA” for indication of an

invalid tool
7-20
3. Machine action
Only in the following cases, tools designated as invalid (INVA) on the TOOL DATA display are
regarded as invalid tools.
A. during automatic operation
B. during tool path check
C. during “tool layout”
A. Automatic operation
The machine action differs as follows between MAZATROL program automatic operation and
EIA/ISO program automatic operation:
1. MAZATROL program operation
Invalid tools are excluded from a list of usable tools. An alarm 626 NO TOOL IN MAGAZINE
will be displayed if an alternative, usable tool of the same type is not present.
2. EIA/ISO program operation
The MAZATROL tool data invalidation option is inoperative for automatic operation using
EIA/ISO programs, since the EIA/ISO program normally operates independently of
MAZATROL tool data.
B. Tool path check

The machine action differs as follows between tool path check using a MAZATROL program and
tool path check using an EIA/ISO program:
1. During tool path check using a MAZATROL program
Invalid tools are not selected. If an alternative, usable tool of the same type is not present, a
tool path will be drawn in the absence of a tool (diameter offsetting will use the tool nominal
diameter data existing in the program).
2. During tool path check using an EIA/ISO program
The machine action is similar to that existing during automatic operation.
C. TOOL LAYOUT display

All invalid tools will be indicated as INVA on the TOOL LAYOUT display.
Note: With the menu function [PKNo. SHIFT], the pocket numbers of invalid tools are not
assigned to tools displayed under NEXT.
7-21
4. In combination with the optional “GROUP No. assignment”

When the MAZATROL tool data option “GROUP No. assignment” is used, tool commands in an
EIA/ISO program are executed according to the group number data of the MAZATROL tool data
display.
The machine action during automatic operation (or tool path check) based on an EIA/ISO
program, therefore, differs from that occurring with the tool data option “GROUP No. assignment”
not being used.
The machine acts as follows according to the particular method of selecting tools:
1. Group number scheme (User parameter F94, bit 4 = 0)
- The machine will stop with the display of an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED if
the tools of the selected group number are all invalid ones.
- If the tools of the selected group number include valid ones (life-expired or broken tools
included), then these valid tools will be searched for a spare tool.
2. Tool number scheme (User parameter F94, bit 4 = 1)
When the tool of the selected tool number is invalid:
(a) If a group number has been set, a spare tool search will be made using that group
number. The machine action after the search has been made is the same as that
described for the group number scheme above.
(b) If a group number has not been set, an alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED will
result.
Example: Differences in machine action between the two tool selection schemes:
TNo. GROUP No. STAT.

1 12345678 INVA
2
3 87654321 INVA
4 87654321
For the settings on the TOOL DATA display as shown above:
Group number scheme Tool number scheme

Example 1: Example 1:
If T12345678T0M06 is set: If T01T0M06 is set:
An alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED An alarm 653 ILLEGAL TOOL DESIGNATED
results. results.
Example 2: Example 2:
If T87654321T0M06 is set: If T03T0M06 is set:
Tool of TNo. 4 is selected. Tool of TNo. 4 is selected.
Note: The machine action during automatic operation and that of tool path check are the
same.
7-22
7-1-10 Manual measurement of tool lengths (Setting tool length offset data using the
LENG-OFS TEACH menu function)
The [LENG-OFS TEACH] menu function can be used to set tool length data in the LENG CO.
item.
(1) Manually move the axes, and bring the nose of the tool into contact with the top of either a
reference block or a workpiece whose height is predetermined.
- Refer to the Operating Manual of the machine for further details of manual operations.
(2) Press the [LENG-OFS TEACH] menu key.
! The display status of the [LENG-OFS TEACH] menu item will then reverse, and the
LENG CO. item of the tool currently mounted on the spindle will be selected.
(3) Input the height of either the reference block or the workpiece, and press the INPUT key.
! The NC unit will then calculate the tool length (see the explanatory figure in 7-1-4) and
auto-set the calculated data under the LENG CO. item.
- The [LENG-OFS TEACH] menu item will return to its normal display status.
7-23
7-2 TOOL FILE Display

Function:
- This display is used when registering the data of the milling tools to be used, such as end-mills,
face-mills, chamfering cutters, ball end-mills, etc.
Remarks:
- The TOOL FILE display is divided into the following four displays according to the type of
milling tool to be used:
1. TOOL FILE (END MILL) display
2. TOOL FILE (FACE MILL) display
3. TOOL FILE (CHAMFER) display
4. TOOL FILE (BALL E-MILL) display
- Up to a maximum of 1024 milling tools can be registered on the TOOL FILE display.
- Milling tools that are not registered on this display cannot be used when creating a program or
when executing a program in the automatic operation mode. Milling tools on hand, therefore,
should be registered on this display.
- If the TOOL FILE display has been changed over from another display, the TOOL FILE (END
MILL) display will be selected automatically.
If another TOOL FILE display should be called up:
1. Pressing the [FACEMILL] menu key changes the current display over to the TOOL FILE
(FACE MILL) display.
2. Pressing the [CHAMFER CUTTER] menu key changes the current display over to the
TOOL FILE (CHAMFER) display.
3. Pressing the [BALL ENDMILL] menu key changes the current display over to the TOOL
FILE (BALL E-MILL) display.
4. Pressing the [ENDMILL] menu key changes the current display back to the TOOL FILE
(END MILL) display.
7-24
7-2-1 Data display
1. Displayed data of the displays for end-mills and ball end-mills
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[8]
D740S3032E
2. Displayed data of the displays for face-mills
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[8]
D740S3033E
7-25
3. Display data of the display for chamfering cutters
[1] [2] [7] [3] [5] [6] [1] [2] [7] [3] [5] [6]
[8]
D740S3034E

[1] No. — Register number of the milling tool on each display
mm (in.) Nominal diameter of the milling tool
[2] NOM-φ
— Suffix (code that identifies the milling tools having the same nominal diamater)
[3] TOOL MAT. — Material of the milling tool
[4] DEPTH mm (in.) Maximum depth of cut
[5] TEETH — Number of teeth of the milling tool
[6] ANG. degrees Nose angle of the face-mill or chamfering cutter
[7] MIN-φ mm (in.) Minimal diameter of the chamfering cutter
Page number and total number of pages
a/b
[8] Page —
a: Number of the displayed page
7-26
7-2-2 Registering milling tool data
When registering milling tools on the TOOL FILE display, the types of data to be set differ
according to the types of tools to be used. The setting procedure, however, is the same for all
types of data except chamfering cutters.
1. Setting a tool other than chamfering cutter

We will register the end-mill shown below as an example.
Tool mateiral: High speed steel

Number of teeth: 2
30
10
End-mill M3S018
(1) Call up the TOOL FILE (END MILL) display.

! The following display will then be presented:
No. NOM-φ TOOL MAT. DEPTH TEETH
- In this example, assume that no end-mills have yet been registered.

(2) Press the cursor key to call up the cursor on the screen.
(3) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the position of the No. item to be registered.
- The cursor can be moved only to the lines of numbers which have been registered and the
next line.

← Move the cursor to this position.

! The corresponding number will then be displayed under No., and the cursor will move
to the NOM-φ item.

1
(5) Using the numeric data keys, specify the nominal diameter of the tool to be registered. Then,
- In the example, specify “10” and press the INPUT key.
7-27
! The input value will then be displayed under NOM-φ, and the cursor will move to the
right side of that value.

1 10. "
- The following menu for assigning tool ID codes will be presented in the menu display area:
A B C D E F G H HEAVY >>>
(a)
TOOL
J K L M N P Q R HEAVY >>>
(b)
TOOL
S T U V W X Y Z HEAVY >>>
(c)
TOOL
Pressing the [>>>] menu key will change the menu in order of (a) → (b) → (c) → (a).
With the [HEAVY TOOL] menu item displayed in reverse or normally (changed by
pressing the corresponding menu key), a suffix for heavy or normal tools can be
respectively selected from among A to Z.
- The tool ID code refers to the suffix, appended to the nominal diameter value, to identify
tools of the same nominal diameter.
Note: If a suffix for heavy tools is assigned, the ATC speed will automatically decrease
and then tool change will be safely made.
(6) Press the menu key that is appropriate to the suffix to be registered.
- In the example, we will assign the suffix A since the tool is the first one with nominal
diameter of 10 mm. Press the [ A ] menu key.
- If it is not necessary to assign a suffix, press the cursor key .
(7) Move the cursor to the TOOL MAT. item.
- The list of the materials set on the CUTTING CONDITION (W.-MAT/T.-MAT.) display is
displayed in the menu display area. Refer to Section 8-1 for further details.

1 10.A
(8) Press the menu key that is appropriate to the tool material to be registered.
- In the example, press the [HSS] menu key
! The selected material will be displayed under MAT.
(9) Move the cursor to the DEPTH item.

1 10.A HSS
7-28
(10) Using the numeric data keys, specify the maximum depth of cut that can be machined
during one cutting operation (i.e., the length of the cutting edge of the end-mill). Then, press
the INPUT key.
- In the example given, specify “30” and press the INPUT key.
(11) Move the cursor to the TEETH item.

1 10.A HSS 30.
(12) Using the numeric data keys, specify the number of teeth of the tool to be registered. Then,
- In the example given, specify “2” and press the INPUT key.

1 10.A HSS 30. 2
Note: Use the same registration procedure for face-mills and ball end-mills after calling the
TOOL FILE display that corresponds to each type of milling tool.
2. Registering chamfering cutter

We will register the chamfering cutter shown below as an example.
Tool mateiral: Cemented carbide

Number of teeth: 2
45°
10
20
Chamfering cutter
(1) Call up the TOOL FILE (CHAMFER) display.

! The following display will then be presented.
No. NOM-φ MIN-φ TOOL MAT. TEETH ANG.
- In this example, assume that no chamfering cutters have yet been registered.
(2) Press the cursor key to call up the cursor on the screen.
7-29
(3) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the position of the No. item to be registered.

← Move the cursor to this position
- The cursor can be moved only to the lines of numbers which have been registered and the
next line.
! The corresponding number will then be displayed under No. item, and the cursor will
move to the NOM-φ item.

1
(5) Set nominal diameter and suffix data in the same manner as that which is described at
steps (5) and (6) of “1. Setting a tool other than chamfering cutter”.
- In the example shown above, if the nominal diameter and the suffix are set as “20” and “A”,
respectively, the display will change as follows:

1 20.A
(6) Move the cursor to the MIN-φ item.

(7) Input the minimum diameter of the chamfering cutter, and press the INPUT key.
- In the example shown above, input “10” and then press the INPUT key.
(8) Set the type of material of the tool in the same manner as that which is described at steps
(7) and (8) of “1. Setting a tool other than chamfering cutter”.
- In the example shown above, if the type of material is set as “CBD”, the display will change
as follows:

1 20.A 10. CBD
(9) Set the number of teeth of the tool in the same manner as that which is described at steps
(11) and (12) of “1. Setting a tool other than chamfering cutter “.
- In the example shown above, if the number of teeth is set as “2”, the display will change as
follows:

1 20.A 10. CBD 2
7-30
(10) Move the cursor to the ANG. item.
(11) Input the nose angle of the tool to be registered, and press the INPUT key.
- In the example shown above, specify “45” and then press the INPUT key.

1 20.A 10. CBD 2 45.
Remark: To register a round-chamfering tool, press the [ROUND CHAMFER] menu key in
Step (11). The angle value with a preceding symbol R will then be set under ANG.
7-2-3 Erasing a part of the registered data

A part of data registered on the TOOL FILE display can be erased.
(1) Call up the TOOL FILE display on which the data to be partly erased is registered.
Example: Erasing the end-mill data that is registered under No. 3 on the TOOL FILE (END
MILL) display:

1 10.A CBD 30. 2
2 10.B HSS 10. 2
3 20.A CBD 20. 4
4 30.A HSS 15. 3
5 40.A CBD 20. 4
- In this example, assume that the end-mill data shown above is registered on the display.
(2) Press the cursor key to call the cursor on the screen.
(3) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the No. item of the tool data to be erased.
1 10.A CBD 30. 2
2 10.B HSS 10. 2
3 20.A CBD 20. 4
4 30.A HSS 15. 3
5 40.A CBD 20. 4
(4) Press the [ERASE] menu key.

! This will cause the display of [ERASE] to reverse.
! The data in the line where the cursor is placed will then be erased, and the data on the
next line and following lines will then be shifted upwards.

1 10.A CBD 30. 2
2 10.B HSS 10. 2
3 30.A HSS 15. 3
4 40.A CBD 20. 4
- After that, the reverse-display status of [ERASE] will be released.
7-31
7-3 TOOL OFFSET Display

Function:
This display is used when setting the amount of tool-diameter or tool-position compensation of
each tool to be used for an EIA/ISO program.
Remarks:
Current position on each axis can be set.
7-3-1 Data display

Type of tool offset differs according to the particular machine model (there are two types of tool
offset: type A and B), and data that will be displayed also differs according to the selected type.
1. Displayed data of type A
[1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2] [1] [2]
[7]
D740S0241E
7-32
2. Displayed data of type B
[1] [3] [4] [5] [6] [1] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[7]
D740S0242E

[1] No. — Tool offset number
[2] OFFSET mm (in.) Tool offset amount
TOOL LENGTH
[3] mm (in.) Amount of geometric compensation for tool length
GEOMETRY
TOOL LENGTH
[4] mm (in.) Amount of wear compensation for tool length
WEAR
TOOL RADIUS
[5] mm (in.) Amount of geometric compensation for tool radius
GEOMETRY
TOOL RADIUS
[6] mm (in.) Amount of wear compensation for tool radius
WEAR
a/b
[7] Page —
a: Current page
7-33
7-3-2 Tool-compensation data setting procedures

Use the following procedures to input data to the OFFSET item of the TOOL OFFSET display.
When an inch/metric unit system change simplifying option is provided, the display mode and an
inch/metric input unit system on the TOOL OFFSET display can be selected using the menu
keys.
1. Manual setting procedure

(1) First, press the cursor key to call up the cursor on the screen.
(2) Press the cursor key to move the cursor to the position in which data is to be input.
(3) Specify the desired data with appropriate numeric data key(s), and then press the INPUT
key.
! The input data will then be displayed in the position where the cursor was placed.
Remark 1: Keeping cursor position
When # mark is added to [Keep Cursor Position] under [Setup] on the menu bar,
the cursor is displayed on the last set position while re-opening the display. The
cursor position is not moved automatically after setting numeric data.
Remark 2: Geometry Incremental Input On
When # mark is added to [Geometry Incremental Input On] under [Setup] on the
menu bar with the cursor positioned on the geometric offset item, the [INCREMENT
INPUT] menu item will be displayed in reverse and the incremental input method
will become initial input method.
Remark 3: Wear Incremental Input Off
With the cursor positioned on the wear offset item, the [INCREMENT INPUT] menu
item will be displayed in reverse and the incremental input method will become
initial input method. When # mark is added to [Wear Incremental Input Off] under
[Setup] on the menu bar with the cursor positioned on the wear offset item, the
incremental input method will be canceled.
2. Automatic setting procedure using the TEACH function

Using the [TEACH] menu function of the display, tool-length compensation data can be auto-
matically input to the OFFSET item of the TOOL OFFSET (type A) display or the TOOL
LENGTH GEOMETRY item of the TOOL OFFSET (type B) display.
(1) Move the axes manually and bring the tool tip into contact with the top surface of either the
reference block or the workpiece of a predetermined height.
- See the Operating Manual for the machine.
(2) Call the cursor on the TOOL OFFSET display and move it to the position of the OFFSET
item (in the case of type A) or TOOL LENGTH GEOMETRY item (in the case of type B)
corresponding to the tool on the spindle.
- For details of cursor calling, see the description of step (1) of the “1. Manual setting
procedure” above.
(3) Press the [TEACH] menu key.
! This will cause the display status of [TEACH] to reverse.
7-34
(4) Specify the height of either the reference block or the workpiece using the appropriate
numeric key(s), and then press the INPUT key.
! The NC equipment will then calculate the tool length, and the calculated value will be
automatically set under OFFSET item (in the case of type A) or TOOL LENGTH
GEOMETRY item (in the case of type B).
Machine zero-point
Distance
from the
machine
zero-point to
the currect
position of Distance
Axial movement the machine from the
in manual machine
operation zero-point
to the table
surface
(constant)
Currect position
of the machine
Tool length
Distance from the

Reference block
table surface to
or workpiece
the tool tip
Table
M3S022
Remark: Since the current position of the machine is placed in the memory of the NC
equipment, it will calculate the length of the tool if the height of the reference
block or workpiece (i.e., the distance from the table surface to the tool tip) is
specified.
- The reverse-display status of [TEACH] will be released automatically.
3. Selection of a screen display mode and an input unit system (inch/metric)

When an inch/metric unit system change simplifying option is provided, the display mode and an
inch/metric input unit system on the TOOL OFFSET display can be selected using the menu
keys.
[INCH MODE] is displayed in metric mode (F91 bit 4 = 0), and [METRIC MODE] is displayed in
inch mode (F91 bit 4 = 1).
- Selection of [INCH MODE] displays the menu item in reverse mode and the display mode as
well as the input unit system change from metric to inch.
- Selection of [METRIC MODE] displays the menu item in reverse mode and the display mode
as well as the input unit system change from inch to metric.
Note: Basically, this function is valid when an inch/metric unit system change simplifying
7-35
7-3-3 Setting the current position

The current position of the tool nose in the workpiece coordinate system can be set while the
POSITION window remains on the TOOL OFFSET display. See Section 2-4 for further details of
the POSITION window. The procedure for setting the current position of each axis is described
below.
(1) After selecting the manual operation mode, press the window key , select [Position]
through [Window] on the menu bar and press the INPUT key to open the POSITION
window.
(2) Use the mouse to move the mouse pointer to the current position data of the desired axis,
and click the left mouse button to display the cursor.
(3) Input a new coordinate value using the numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key.
(4) Use the mouse to move the mouse pointer to any position on the TOOL OFFSET display,
and click the left mouse button.
(5) Clear the POSITION window from the display by pressing the window key and
performing a similar operation to that in Step (1).
7-36
7-3-4 EIA/ISO tool length measurement
1. Outline
- Automatically measured tool lengths can be set in tool offsets automatically.
- Two methods are available to measure tool lengths: fully automatic and semi-automatic.
Fully automatic tool length measurement allows the following operations to be carried out:
• Continuous control of a maximum of 13 tools
• Assignment of any offset number
• Automatic movement of any tool in X-axial and Y-axial directions (Automatic movement of a
tool not having its nose set to the spindle center) [Control parameter: L94]
Semi-automatic tool length measurement allows any offset number to be assigned. [Control
parameter: L95]
- The EIA/ISO tool length measurement function works with an EIA/ISO option. If, however, bit 3
of parameter F93 (MAZATROL tool length valid/invalid for EIA/ISO programs) is set to “valid”,
this function will not work even when the above-mentioned option is provided.
2. Fully automatic tool length measurement - Operating procedure

(1) Select the TOOL OFFSET display.
(2) Set the MDI mode.
! This displays an MDI window.
(3) Press the [T MSR AUTO] menu key.
! This reverses the display status of the menu item to make the right-hand half of the
display into the setting/display area of tool length measurement data.
D740S3037E
(4) Specify the number of the tool to be measured.
(5) Specify the offset number corresponding to the tool number.
- Automatic offset number setting
Automatic setting of offset numbers during tool number input becomes possible by setting
the required parameter.
7-37
Automatically set offset numbers are keyed to tool numbers (the amount of shifting is set
with parameter).
Parameter L95: Automatic offset number setting for offset tool measurement
(1: Yes, 0: No)
Parameter L96: The amount of shifting for the offset number that is to be automatically
set for offset tool measurement
(6) Move the cursor to specify the desired amounts of movement in X/Y directions.
- Specifying the movements of X/Y axial movement
The required parameter can be used to select whether the items X SHIFT and Y SHIFT
are to be displayed.
Parameter L94: Display of X/Y SHIFT items (1: Yes, 0: No)
(7) Press the [MDI START] menu key.
! This displays measurement M- and T-codes in the MDI window and causes the corre-
sponding offset number(s) on the left half of the display to reverse in red.
D740S3038E
(9) While the display of the menu item shown previously at step (3) remains in reverse form,
steps (4) to (8) can be repeated for up to a maximum of 13 tools.
(10) Press the start button to perform the measurement operation.
! Measurement results will then be set under the corresponding offset number.
- In the flow of the measurement for multiple tools, the page containing the data item to be
set for each tool is automatically selected and displayed on the left half.
Note: Specified data having a displayed cursor on the right half can be erased for each line
using the [ERASE] menu function.
Also, only the data at the cursor position can be deleted using the CANCEL key. The
data in the MDI window, however, will remain unchanged. Update the MDI window data
by pressing once again the [MDI START] menu key.
7-38
3. Semi-automatic tool length measurement - Operating procedure
(1) Select the TOOL OFFSET display.
(2) Set the MDI mode.
! This displays an MDI window.
(3) Press the [T MSR SEMIAUTO] menu key.
! As with fully automatic tool length measurement, the display status of the menu item
will then reverse to make the right-hand half of the display into the setting/display area
of tool length measurement data.
The number of the tool that is currently mounted on the spindle is displayed at TNo.
item.
(4) Specify data under OFFSET No.
! This displays measurement M-codes in the MDI window and releases the reverse
display status of the menu item.
If an offset number is unset, no measurement M-codes will be displayed in the MDI
window.
(6) Press the start button to perform the measurement operation.
- Use semi-automatic tool length measure-ment if, as shown below, tool interference is to be
considered for beforehand.
Interferes Side cutter

Measuring
table Side cutter
Measuring
table
Interferes
D735S1057
4. Remarks
- This function is not available for a multi-nose tool that requires setting of multiple tool lengths
for one pocket.
- Parameter L96 (the parameter for setting the amount of shifting based on an offset number)
should be set to a value more than 0. After shifting, an alarm will occur if the maximum usable
offset number is exceeded.
Note: This function cannot be used to measure the tool length of a touch sensor.
7-39
7-4 Input Error Prevention Function

Function:
- Checks the tool data and tool offset data settings after each change and prompts for operator
confirmation if the amount of change is considerably large.
Remarks:
- The function is only valid when parameter F81 bit 7 is set to 1.
7-4-1 Outline
This function checks the input value to change data in the TOOL DATA and TOOL OFFSET
displays and, if the amount of change is greater than the parameter setting concerned, opens a
confirmation window. By rechecking the input value, machine collision due to input errors can be
avoided.
7-4-2 Data display

The following window appears if a change greater in amount than the parameter is attempted.
[1]
[2]
[3]
[4] [5]
7-4-3 Display data description

[1] CURRENT DATA mm (in.) Current data setting
[2] INPUT DATA mm (in.) Input value
[3] INCREMENT mm (in.) Amount of change in the set value relative to the input value.
[4] [CANCEL] button — Used to cancel the input value.
[5] [OK] button — Used to confirm the input value.
7-4-4 Data items to be checked

When the input error prevention function is enabled, the following data items are monitored.
Display name Data items to be checked

TOOL DATA display - LENGTH - ACT-φ - LENG COMP. - LENG. CO.
- ACT-φCO. - WEAR COMP X - WEAR COMP Z - WEAR COMP Y
TOOL OFFSET display All data items
Note: Automatic data change by a tool measurement unit is out of checking. (However, the
results from the [TEACH] menu function will be checked.)
7-40
7-4-5 Related parameters
Use the following parameters to set the threshold values for the amount of change.
F124: LENGTH, ACT-φ, LENG COMP., LENG. CO., ACT-φCO. on the TOOL DATA display,
and GEOMETRY values on the TOOL OFFSET display
F125: WEAR COMP values on the TOOL DATA display, and WEAR values on the TOOL
OFFSET display
See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for more information.
7-41
7-5 Changed Data Check Function

Function:
- Prevents interference due to input errors in the TOOL DATA or TOOL OFFSET display.
Remarks:
- The function is only valid when parameter F81 bit 2 is set to 1.
7-5-1 Outline
This function prevents interference due to input errors in the tool geometry or offset data.
During automatic operation, if the data for the tool to be used has been changed in the TOOL
DATA or TOOL OFFSET display, the NC unit prompts the operator for rechecking by means of
alarm output and lighting of the red warning lamp. The machine will be brought into feed-hold
state and the rapid traverse speed reduced to the parameter value so as to avoid interference
due to input errors.
7-5-2 Operation
No. Display on the screen Description
The change in the TOOL DATA

or TOOL OFFSET display is
stored in the NC unit.
During automatic operation, the

NC monitors the current tool
number and tool offset number
and performs the following
actions if the data of the change
stored in 1 is to be used.
- Feed hold
- Alarm message output
2 [1] ([2] in the left figure)
- Lighting red warning lamp
[1]
- Changing rapid traverse
override rate
[2] ([3] in the left figure)
[3]
7-42
No. Display on the screen Description
Check the data and, if there is no

problem, press the start button.
The message shown in 2 above
will then be replaced by RAPID
FEED OVERRIDE CLAMPING.
[1]
If cutting feed is commanded, the

rapid traverse override rate
returns to the previous value.
The warning message shown in
3 above disappears.
Note 1: All setting items in the TOOL DATA and TOOL OFFSET displays are checked by this
function.
Note 2: The alarm message mentioned in 2 above depends upon the type of the data changed:
Data in the TOOL DATA display.........1300 PLEASE CHECK THE TOOL DATA
Data in the TOOL OFFSET display.....1301 PLEASE CHECK THE TOOL OFFSET
Note 3: The change in data is retained until any of the following operations is performed. (It is
not cleared by turning off the NC unit.)
- Changed data is used in automatic operation.
- Changed tool data is deleted.
- Changed tool offset data is deleted.
7-43
- NOTE -
7-44 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS 8
8 DISPLAYS RELATED TO PARAMETERS
8-1 CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. Display

Function:
Registering the materials types of workpieces and tools that are to be selected for automatic
setting of cutting conditions on the PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display and the TOOL FILE
display
Remarks:
- Data that has been registered on this display can be used only for a MAZATROL program.
- Initially, MAZAK-recommended data is displayed. You can change or add data as required.
8-1-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1]
[2]
D740S3039E

[1] W.-MAT. — Workpiece material name
[2] T.-MAT — Tool material name
H740S3H040E 8-1

The CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. display allows the names of the materials of
workpieces and tools to be registered using character strings of alphabetic characters and arabic
numerals.
(1) Display the cursor by pressing the cursor key.
(2) Move the cursor to any of the workpiece materials data items from MAT.1 to MAT.16 or the
tool materials data items from MAT.1 to MAT.8.
(3) Input the appropriate name using the alphabetic and/or numeric data keys, and then press
the INPUT key.
- Up to eight characters can be set. The maximum number of workpiece materials types is
sixteen, and that of tool materials types is eight for each tool.
- Press the CANCEL key to delete the input name.
Note 1: Two parameters are provided for automatic development of the tool sequence in the
MAZATROL program. One is D14 (decisive factor for drilling aluminum materials) and
one is D15 (decisive factor for drilling non-aluminum materials). Which of the two
parameters will be auto-selected depends on the selected workpiece material.
Workpiece material 6 is regarded as aluminium. Parameter D14 will be used if the
workpiece material 6 is selected in the MAZATROL program. Parameter D15 will be
used if another workpiece material is selected.
Refer to the Programming Manual (MAZATROL) for further details of automatic tool
development. See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for further
details of the parameters.
Note 2: The workpiece material names registered in this display are cross-referred to those in
the file (\nm64mdata\eng\cspmat.txt) containing the data for the calculation of the
average output indicated on the MACHINING NAVIGATION - PREDICT display.
Changing a workpiece material name in one storage area requires the same operation
for the other.
Refer to item [11] of “3. Display data description” in Subsection 6-7-1.
8-2
8-1-3 Read and Write of text file
The workpiece and tool material names (W.-MAT. and T.-MAT.) in the cutting conditions can be
taken in and out as a text file of the hard disk. Use the item “File” on the menu bar to perform
these operations.
1. File saving and file loading

- File saving
The workpiece and tool material names indicated on the CUTTING CONDITION display are
saved onto the hard disk as a text file (C:\nm64data\eng\material.txt).
- File loading
The text file (C:\nm64data\eng\material.txt) of the workpiece and tool material names saved on
the hard disk is loaded into the NC unit.
Note: “eng” in the file name corresponds with the language currently selected for the display
mode.
2. Format of the text file
[DRILL] (a) Title

1,
2,
3,
(b) Material 4,
5,
name
6,
7,
8,
[CTR-DR]
1,
2,
3,
4,
(a) Title
The title denotes the category of the material data described under it as listed below.
Title Meaning Title Meaning

WORK Workpiece BOR BAR Boring bar
DRILL Drill B-B BOR Back-boring bar
CTR-DR Center drill E-MILL End-mill
REAM Reamer F-MILL Face-mill
TAP Tap B-EDNMILL Ball-end-mill
BCK FACE Back spot-facing tool OTHER Other types of tool
CHF-C Chamfering cutter
Note: The characters enclosed in brackets [ ] are used as the keyword to construct the file.
Do not enter any comment on this character line. Otherwise, the data may not be read
correctly during file loading.
(b) Material name
Materials are described.
2,
The first numeral denotes the material number corresponding to the title given above. The
material name can be entered after the comma “,”.
8-3
Example 1:
File
[WORK] “S45C” is registered as workpiece material No. 1.
1,S45C
2,...
Note 1: The material name can consist of a maximum of eight half-size characters (or four
normal-size characters).
Note 2: The character string of the material name must not begin or end with a half-size null
code. This code can only be used within the character string.
Example 2: Leading/trailing half-size null code.
File [WORK] An example of incorrect description
1, S45C
( _ denotes a half-size null code.)
2,....
Example 3: Half-size null code within a character string

File [DRILL] An example of correct description
1,HSS B
2,...
Note 3: Do not enter one and the same material name repeatedly under the same category.
Example 4:
File [WORK]
An example of incorrect entry
1,S45C
2,S45C (Loading of this file only registers “S45C” and “FC” as
3,FC workpiece material No. 1 and 3 respectively; entry of No.
4,S45C 2 and 4 is ignored.)
8-4
8-2 CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP/FR Display

Function:
Registering the fundamental data for automatic setting of the cutting conditions on the
PROGRAM (MAZATROL) display and the TOOL FILE display.
Remarks:
- The CUTTING CONDITION display consists of the following two sub-displays containing the
surface velocity and feed rate data for each milling tool type:
1. CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP display
2. CUTTING CONDITION - FR display
- Data that has been registered on this display is used only for MAZATROL programs.
- Data recommended by Yamazaki Mazak is pre-registered prior to shipping of the machine. The
registered data can be modified as required.
- The cutting conditions to be used for the point, line and face machining units of the MAZATROL
program are automatically calculated from the registered data within this display, the CUTTING
CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT. display, and the TOOL DATA display, the registered data
within the program, and the settings of parameters. Refer to the Programming Manual for
calculation expressions.
Note: The CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP display will be auto-selected when any other
display is changed over to the CUTTING CONDITION display.
8-2-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
A. CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP display
[1]
[3]
[2] [4]
[6]
D740S3040E
8-5
B. CUTTING CONDITION - FR display
[1]
[3]
[2] [5]
[6]
D740S3041E

[1] Tool name — Name (type) of the currently selected tool
[2] W.-MAT. — Name of the material of the workpiece
[3] T.-MAT. — Name of the material of the tool
m/min
[4] Cutting speed Surface velocity for the workpiece material
(ft/min)
mm/rev
[5] Rate of feed Rate of feed for the workpiece material
(in./rev)
a/b
[6] Page —
a: Current page
8-6
The following data can be registered for each tool on the CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP/FR
display:
1. Surface velocities for each workpiece material type registered on the CUTTING CON-
DITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT display
2. Feed rates for each workpiece material type registered on the CUTTING CONDITION - W.-
MAT./T.-MAT display
Cutting conditions data differs according to the selected type of milling tool, type of workpiece
material, and type of tool material. The method of setting the data, however, is the same. Here,
how to set data is described below taking the following conditions as an example:
1. Assume that FC and HSS are already registered under MAT.1 of W.-MAT. and MAT.1 of
DRILL item, respectively, on the CUTTING CONDITION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT display.
W.-MAT.
MAT.1 MAT.2 MAT.3
FC
MAT.9 MAT.10 MAT.11
T.-MAT.
TOOL MAT.1 MAT.2 MAT.3
DRILL HSS
CTR-DR
2. Set the C-SP and FR data of the drilling tool for the workpiece material FC to “110 (m/min)”
and “2 (mm/rev)” respectively.
(1) Call up the CUTTING CONDITION - C-SP display.

! The following display will then be made:
DRILL T.-MAT.
W.-MAT. HSS BALANCE CARBIDE
FC
- This example assumes that only FC and HSS are already registered as the workpiece
material type and the drilling tool material type, respectively, on the CUTTING CONDI-
TION - W.-MAT./T.-MAT display.
(2) Display the cursor by pressing the cursor key.
(3) Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to the HSS column of the drilling tool for the
workpiece material FC. (Use the page keys to enter the C-SP data for other types of tool.)
DRILL T.-MAT.
FC
(4) Input a surface velocity using the numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key.
- In the example shown above, “110” is to be set.
(5) Next, call up the CUTTING CONDITION - FR display.
! The following display will then be made:
DRILL T.-MAT.
FC
8-7
(6) Using the cursor keys, move the cursor to the HSS column of the drilling tool for the
workpiece material FC. (Use the page keys to enter the FR data for other types of tool.)
DRILL T.-MAT.
FC
(7) Input a feed rate using the numeric data keys, and press the INPUT key.
- In the example shown above, set “2” and press the INPUT key.
8-8
8-3 CUTTING CONDITION LEARN Display

Function
The CUTTING CONDITION LEARN display is provided to store those modifications on the
cutting conditions that are performed by the operator with the aid of the VFC function.
Remarks
The data stored in this display will be given priority in the automatic setting of cutting conditions
for a MAZATROL program if the related basic conditions agree with the stored ones. Otherwise,
the data stored in the CUTTING CONDITION display will be used for that purpose.
8-3-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1][2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11]
D740S3042E
No. Item Unit Description
[1] — — A“ “ mark is displayed when the data is in a modification prohibited status.

[2] No. — Number of data
[3] TOOL — Type of tool
[4] NOM-φ — Tool nominal diameter and tool identification code
[5] T.-MAT — Name of the tool material
[6] W.-MAT — Name of the workpiece material
mm (in.) Infeed range Z (One of the learning conditions for face milling)
[7] DEP-Z Infeed range Z (one of the learning conditions for end milling), namely, “Infeed
%
stroke Z/Tool diameter” is displayed in percentage terms.
8-9
No. Item Unit Description

mm (in.) Infeed range R (One of the learning conditions for boring or back-boring)
[8] WID-R Infeed range R (one of the learning conditions for end milling), namely, “Infeed
%
stroke R/Tool diameter” is displayed in percentage terms.
Type of milling process; roughing is displayed as “RGN”, or finishing, as “FIN”.
[9] PROCESS —
The type of machining cycle is displayed when the tool is a drill.
m/min
[10] C-SP Peripheral speed during machining
(ft/min)
mm/rev
[11] FR Feed rate during machining
(in./rev)
8-3-2 Menu functions

- LEARN OFF
Used to protect a specific data against further modification. Position the cursor on the desired
data line and press the [LEARN OFF] menu key. The display of the menu item will then be
highlighted and the message DO NOT LEARN CUT COND. <INPUT>? will appear. Press the
INPUT key to apply the protect function. The protection will then be indicated by a symbol on
the left of the No., the highlighted display of the menu item will be cleared and the item itself will
be replaced by [LEARN].
Pressing the menu key anew with the item being highlighted will only clear the highlighted
display.
- LEARN
Used to cancel the protect function. Position the cursor on the desired data line and press the
[LEARN] menu key. The display of the menu item will then be highlighted and the message
LEARN CUT CONDITION <INPUT>? will appear. Press the INPUT key to cancel the protect
function. The symbol of protection will then disappear, the highlighted display of the menu item
will be cleared and the item itself will be replaced by [LEARN OFF].
display.
- ERASE
Used to clear a specific data. Position the cursor on the desired data line and press the
[ERASE] menu key. The message ERASE <INPUT>? will then appear. Press the INPUT key
to clear the specified data.
display.
- EDIT
A press of the [EDIT] menu key highlights the display to indicate that data can be edited. Move
the cursor to the desired item using the cursor keys and enter data using the numeric data keys
or the menu keys.
8-10
8-4 USER PARAMETER Display

Function:
Registering and displaying user parameters
8-4-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1]
[2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2]
D740S3043E

[1] Address — Address of various user parameters
[2] Data — Data of various user parameters
Note 1: For further details, see the separate Prameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List.
Note 2: Confirm the contents of parameters before changing them.
8-11
3. Bit input function

When entering a value for a parameter whose unit is bits, a value can be assigned to each bit by
making the bit input function valid.
Example: The procedure for assigning ‘1’ to bit 5 in parameter D91 (a parameter whose unit is
bits) is shown below.
(1) Moving the cursor to parameter D91 automatically changes the display mode to the
following menu:
(2) Press the [BIT INPUT] menu key.

! The [BIT INPUT] menu item will be highlighted and the bit input function made valid.
To make this function invalid, press the [BIT INPUT] menu key again.
! The following menu will be displayed. All bits whose settings are ‘1’ will be highlighted:
(3) Press the [BIT 5] menu key.

! The value ‘1’ will be set up at bit 5 of D91 and the [BIT 5] menu item highlighted.
! To reset bit 5 of D91 to ‘0’, press the [BIT 5] menu key again.
The bit input function can be used on the USER PARAMETER display, the MACHINE
PARAMETER display, and the PLC PARAMETER display.
8-12
8-5 MACHINE PARAMETER Display

Function:
Registering and displaying machine parameters
8-5-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[3] [3] [3] [3] [3] [3] [3] [3]

[1]
[2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2]
D740S3044E

[1] Address — Address of various machine parameters
[2] Data — Data of various machine parameters
Axis name
[3] Axis name —
Note: According to parameter number, it may not be displayed.
Note 1: For further details, see the separate Prameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List.
Note 2: Confirm the contents of parameters before changing them.
8-13
8-6 PLC PARAMETER Display

Function:
Displaying parameters for sequence ladder adjustment
Remarks
These parameters are preadjusted to the machine specifications prior to shipping from the
factory. There is no need to enter or change data.
8-6-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1] [1]
[2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2] [2]
D740S0254E

[1] Address — Address of various PLC parameters
[2] Data — Data of various PLC parameters
8-14
8-7 CUTTING LEVEL SELECT Window

Function:
- The workpiece can be machined under the desired conditions by specifying one of ten
accuracy levels between “FAST” (priority to speed) and “ACCURATE” (priority to accuracy) in
the CUTTING LEVEL SELECT window.
Remarks:
- Of all the 10 levels from “FAST” to “ACCURATE”, level 1 and level 10 denote cutting levels
respectively at which the highest speed and the highest accuracy can be obtained.
- The selection of an accuracy level can be made also in the flow of the program execution by
using the corresponding M-codes.
- Each time the CUTTING LEVEL SELECT window is displayed, the parameters within the NC
memory and those for each level are cross-checked to indicate the current level.
- The use of this function requires CUTTING PARAMETER data to be registered beforehand.
8-7-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
8-7-2 Selecting a cutting level

Follow the procedure below to select the desired one from among the 10 cutting levels between
FAST and ACCURATE (Level 1 for the highest speed and Level 10 for the highest accuracy):
(1) With the POSITION display on the screen, press the menu-changeover key.
(2) Press the [C-LEVEL SELECT] menu key.
! The menu item is highlighted and the CUTTING LEVEL SELECT window appears.
(3) Use the cursor keys and to select the desired level.
(4) Press the INPUT key INPUT .

! The definitively set level is indicated in the CUTTING LEVEL SELECT window.
Example: Selection of Level 5.
(5) Press the [C-LEVEL SELECT] menu key again to hide the CUTTING LEVEL SELECT
window.
8-15
Remark 1: This function refers to an automatic selection of the NC parameter data corre-
sponding to the specified accuracy level. If there cannot be any corresponding data
more found due to a direct change of the settings on the USER PARAMETER or
MACHINE PARAMETER display in the mean time, therefore, no one of the 10 LED
in the window can be turned on for the selection concerned, with the slider placed
under Level 1, as shown below.
Remark 2: The miscellaneous functions for selecting the cutting level are as follows:
Highest speed
M821
M822
:
:
M829
M830
Highest accuracy
For more information see the description of the function for selecting the cutting
conditions in the EIA/ISO Programming Manual.
Note: Since accuracy level adjustment is a special function for die machining, this function
can be used only for machines capable of utilizing the intended purpose of the function.
The CUTTING LEVEL SELECT window is not displayed for other machines.
8-16 E
DISPLAY RELATED TO DATA STORAGE 9
9 DISPLAY RELATED TO DATA STORAGE
9-1 DATA I/O Display

Function:
- This display is used to transfer programs or other types of data between the NC unit and the
hard disk or between the NC unit and an external unit.
- Use this display to save various data to be used by the MATRIX CAM unit in simulating the
machine operation conditions.
9-1-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[3] [3]
[4]
[1] [1]
[5]
[2] [2]
D740S3045E

Work number of program for transference and identification of
MAZATROL programs or EIA/ISO programs
M: MAZATROL program
[1] PROGRAM —
E: EIA/ISO program
* The display type for this area can be selected from [VIEW] on the
menu bar: [Single Column], [2 Columns], or [4 Columns].
[2] OTHER DATA — Data other than programs for transference
[3] Unit name — Name of unit for transference
[4] I/O mode — Data transfer mode (loading, saving, etc.)
Display that indicates data is being input or output. During data input or
[5] Display of execution —
output, display according to transfer mode being executed ([4]) is made.
H740S3J040E 9-1
9-1-2 DATA I/O operations (CARD)

The following four data input/output operations can be executed using a memory card.
1. Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on a memory card are registered into the
NC unit.
2. Saving
The program data or other types of data pre-registered in the NC unit are stored onto a
memory card.
3. Directorying
The data type prestored on a memory card are displayed.
4. Formatting
A memory card is formatted (initialized).
The operating procedure of each operation listed above is described below.
The following description assumes that a memory card unit has already been connected to the
NC unit and that memory card setting is also completed.
! Only use IC memory cards of the ATA specification. Failure to observe this instruction
could result in machine damage.
CAUTION
1. Selecting the directory

For loading, saving and directorying with a memory card, moreover, selection of the required
directory must be done beforehand by the following procedure:
(1) Press the [DIR. SELECT] menu key.
" [DIR. SELECT] will change to a reverse-display status and the following window will
appear.
(2) Key in the name of the required directory and press the INPUT key.
- Use the alphabetic and numeric keys to input the name.
9-2
2. Deleting the directory
To delete a directory (with all the files thereunder) on the memory card, proceed as follows:
(1) Press the [DIR. DELETE] menu key.
" [DIR. DELETE] will change to a reverse-display status and the following window will
appear.
(2) Key in the name of the directory to be deleted and press the INPUT key.
Note: All the files stored under the specified directory will be deleted by the above operation.
3. Loading
(1) Press the [CARD] menu key.
(2) Press the [NC ← CARD LOAD] menu key.
" LOAD will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be transferred.
<For program data transfer>
- Move the cursor to an item in the PROGRAM area of the CARD display section and input
the work number of the program to be transferred. The work number will change to a
reverse-display status after setting the work number.
- Up to 960 programs can be selected.
<For non-program data transfer>
- Move the cursor to the desired item in the OTHER DATA area of the CARD display
section and press the INPUT key. The data name will change to a reverse-display status.
It indicates that the type of data is to be transferred.
<For erasing the data that has been set>
- Carry out the following operations to erase the entire data that has been set:
1) Press the [ALL ERASE] menu key.
" [ALL ERASE] will change into a reverse-display status.
2) Press the INPUT key.
" The reverse-display status of the entire data will be cleared and all the work
number will become blank.
9-3
(4) Press the [START] menu key.

" [START] will change into a reverse-display status and data transfer will begin.
- The display color will change at the position where the data being transferred is displayed.
- The highlighted-display status of the data that has been transferred will be cleared. The
same data will be displayed in the NC display section.
- After data transfer, the reverse-display status of [START] will be cleared.
Note 1: You can select using bit 6 of I/O parameter IOP5 whether loading of a program whose
work number is the same as that of a program pre-registered within the NC unit, is to
be enabled or not (1 or 0). For further details of parameters, see the separate
Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List.
To enable such a program for which the loading operation is not available by parameter
setting, to be loaded, the work number of the related pre-registered program must be
changed prior to loading.
Note 2: A listing window for the work numbers of all programs registered previously in the NC
unit can be displayed by pressing the [PROGRAM FILE] menu key. While the window
remains on the display, the [PROGRAM FILE] menu item is highlighted with [SELECT
RANGE] additionally presented for specifying programs in a designated range at one
time.
Pressing the [PROGRAM FILE] menu key once again clears the reverse-display status
of the menu item and closes the window.
Note 3: Data transfer will be continued even if the existing display is changed over to another
display during the data transfer process. However, the data being transferred cannot
be overridden.
This also applies when a transfer mode other than LOAD has been selected.
Note 4: Data transfer will halt if the reverse-display status is cleared by pressing the [START]
menu key during the data transfer process. Data transfer cannot be restarted from the
position in which the transfer process has halted.
4. Saving
(2) Press the [NC → CARD SAVE] menu key.
" SAVE will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
- The data input procedure is the same as that of LOAD. Input the data in the NC display
section. (See procedural step (3) of “3. Loading”.)
" [START] will change to a reverse-display status and data transfer will begin.
- The data that has been transferred will change to a normal display status and the same
data will be displayed in the CARD display section.
9-4
5. Directorying
(2) Press the [CARD CONTENT] menu key.
" DIR will be displayed on the I/O data item.
" [START] will change into a reverse-display status, and what type of data is stored on
the memory card will be displayed in the CARD display section.
- If program data is stored on the external media, the corresponding work number will be
displayed in the PROGRAM area.
- If non-program data is stored on the external media, the corresponding item will be
displayed in a reverse-display status.
- After entire data display is completed, the reverse-display status of [START] will be
cleared.
6. Formatting
(2) Press the [CARD FORMAT] menu key.
" FORMAT will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Key in “–9999” and press the INPUT key.
" [START] will change into a reverse-display status and initialization will begin.
- Upon completion of the initialization, the reverse-display status of [START] will be cleared.
7. Selecting the HDD OPERATION PROGRAM area

Use the following procedure to select the HDD OPERATION PROGRAM area, instead of the
STANDARD PROGRAM area, for data input/output operations with an IC memory card:
(1) Press the [HD AREA] menu key.
" [HD AREA] will change into a reverse-display status.
- The HDD OPERATION PROGRAM area will remain selected for the I/O operations with
the IC memory card until the reverse display of [HD AREA] is cleared by pressing again
the same menu key.
9-5
9-1-3 DATA I/O operations (HARD DISK)

The following three data input/output operations can be executed using the hard disk.
1. Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on the hard disk are registered into the
NC unit.
2. Saving
The program data or other types of data pre-registered in the NC unit are stored onto the
hard disk.
3. Directorying
The data type prestored on the hard disk are displayed.
Note: Data communication with the HDD OPERATION PROGRAM area cannot be achieved
by the HARD DISK function of the DATA I/O display.

For loading, saving and directorying with the hard disk, selection of the required directory must
be done beforehand by the following procedure:
appear.
9-6
To delete a directory (with all the files thereunder) on the hard disk, proceed as follows:
appear.
3. Loading
(1) Press the [HARD DISK] menu key.
(2) Press the [NC ← HD LOAD] menu key.
- Move the cursor to an item in the PROGRAM area of the HARD DISK display section and
input the work number of the program to be transferred. The work number will change to a

- Move the cursor to the desired item in the OTHER DATA area of the HARD DISK display

9-7

time.
be overridden.
4. Saving
(2) Press the [NC → HD SAVE] menu key.
data will be displayed in the HARD DISK display section.
9-8
5. Directorying
(2) Press the [HD CONTENT] menu key.
the hard disk will be displayed in the HARD DISK display section.
cleared.
6. Changing the folder

The folder used for the HARD DISK data input/output operations can be changed by the
following procedure:
(1) Select [HD I/O Folder] from the [Setup] menu on the menu bar.
(2) Set the required folder name in the dialogue box which appears upon step (1).
9-9
- Click the [BROWSE] button to display the tree of the available folders, and select an item
if it is to be set as a folder name.
(3) Complete the setting by clicking the [OK] button.
- The name of the folder which stores the data files is determined as follows:
“Setting of FOLDER NAMESET” + “Setting of DIR. SELECT”
Example: If the settings made as indicated in items 6 and 1 are respectively
“C:\MC_Backup\Other” and “ABC”, the name of the folder concerned runs as
follows:
C:\MC_Backup\Other\ABC
- The folder can be assigned to any computer on the network.
- Once designated, the name of the folder is not cleared simply by the turning-off.
- The default setting is “C:\MC_Backup\Other”.
- The folder name can consist of 64 characters.
9-1-4 DATA I/O operations (USB)

The following four data input/output operations can be executed through a USB (Universal Serial
Bus).
1. Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on a USB are registered into the NC unit.
2. Saving
The program data or other types of data pre-registered in the NC unit are stored through a
USB.
3. Directorying
The data type prestored on a USB are displayed.
4. Selecting drive
A drive other than USB which is connected to the NC is selected.
The following description assumes that the USB has already been connected to the NC unit.
Note: The USB in this subsection refers to USB equipment applicable to a USB mass-storage
class.
9-10
For loading, saving and directorying with a USB, moreover, selection of the required directory
must be done beforehand by the following procedure:
appear.

To delete a directory (with all the files thereunder) on the USB, proceed as follows:
appear.
9-11
3. Loading
(1) Press the [USB] menu key.
(2) Press the [NC ← USB LOAD] menu key.
- Move the cursor to an item in the PROGRAM area of the USB display section and input
- Move the cursor to the desired item in the OTHER DATA area of the USB display section
and press the INPUT key. The data name will change to a reverse-display status. It
indicates that the type of data is to be transferred.
remains on the display, the display status of [PROGRAM FILE] reverses.
be overridden.
9-12
4. Saving
(2) Press the [NC → USB SAVE] menu key.
data will be displayed in the USB display section.
5. Directorying
(2) Press the [USB CONTENT] menu key.
the floppy disk will be displayed in the USB display section.
cleared.
6. Selecting drive
(2) Press the [DRIVE SELECT] menu key.
" The currently available drives are displayed.
(3) Select the desired drive.
" Data I/O operations can be carried out with the selected drive.
9-13
9-1-5 DATA I/O operations (CMT)

The following data input/output operations can be executed using a cassette tape or a microdisk.
1. Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on a cassette tape (CMT) or a microdisk
are registered into the NC unit.
2. Directorying
The data stored on a cassette tape or a microdisk are displayed.
The following description assumes that a cassette tape deck or a MAZAK microdisk unit has
already been connected to the NC unit and that cassette tape or microdisk setting is also
completed.
Note: The CMT data I/O function is available when parameter F163 bit 7 is set to “1.”
1. Loading
(1) Press the [CMT] menu key.
(2) Press the [LOAD NC ← CMT] menu key.
- Move the cursor to an item in the PROGRAM area of the CMT display section and input
- Move the cursor to the data to be erased and press the data cancellation key. When the
data to be erased is a program, then the work number will become blank and the reverse-
display status will be cleared. In case of non-program data, the reverse-display status will
be cleared.
9-14
Note 1: You can select using a parameter whether loading of a program whose work number is
the same as that of a program pre-registered within the NC unit, is to be enabled. For
further details of parameters, see the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List.
time.
Note 3: It is possible to load a program that has been created using the MAZATROL Fusion
640M/MPro (640M/MPro program). In that case, the 640M/MPro program will be auto-
matically converted into a program used for the NC unit of the machine.
be overridden.
2. Directorying
(1) Press the [CMT] menu key.
(2) Press the [CMT CONTENTS] menu key.
the cassette tape (CMT) or the microdisk will be displayed in the CMT display section.
cleared.
9-15
9-1-6 DATA I/O operations (TAPE)

The following six data input/output operations can be executed using a paper tape or a
microdisk.
1. Loading
A program or non-program data of all those prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk is
registered in the NC unit.
2. All loading
All programs and non-program data prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk are registered
in the NC unit.
3. Punching
A program or non-program data of all those pre-registered within the NC unit is stored on a
paper tape or a microdisk.
4. All punching
All programs and non-program data pre-registered within the NC unit are stored on a paper
tape or a microdisk. By setting the corresponding parameter, only all programs can be
stored.
5. Comparing
A program or non-program data of all those prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk is
compared with a program or non-program data pre-registered within the NC unit.
6. All comparing
All programs and non-program data prestored on a paper tape or a microdisk are compared
with the programs and non-program data pre-registered within the NC unit.
Note 1: All the data other than EIA/ISO programs are I/O-operated in the three-digit G-code
format, the details of which are described in the Programming Manual (MAZATROL).
Note 2: The TAPE data I/O function is available when parameter F163 bit 6 is set to “1.”
The operating procedure for the functions listed above is described below. The following
description assumes that a paper tape reader/puncher or a MAZAK microdisk unit has already
been connected to the NC unit and that paper tape or microdisk setting is also completed.
1. Loading
(1) Press the [TAPE I/O] menu key.
(2) Press the [LOAD NC ← TAPE] menu key.
- Refer to procedural step (3) of “1. Loading” in Subsection 9-1-5.
" [START] will change into a reverse-display status, and data transfer will begin.
- The display color will change to purple at the position in which the data being transferred is
displayed.
Note: The precautions described in Notes 1, 2, 4 and 5 in “1. Loading” of Subsection 9-1-5
“DATA I/O operations (CMT)” are valid for this loading operation.
9-16
2. All loading
(1) Press the [TAPE] menu key.
(2) Press the [ALL LOAD NC ← TAPE] menu key.
" ALL LOAD will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
" [START] will change into a reverse-display status, and data transfer will begin.
- After data transfer, the reverse-display status of the [START] will be cleared.
3. Punching
(2) Press the [PUNCH NC → TAPE] menu key.
" PUNCH will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
- See the description of procedural step (3) of “1. Loading”. Set data in the NC display
section.
" [START] will change into a reverse-display status, and the tape puncher will start
operating.
- The display color will change to purple at the position in which the data being punched out
is displayed.
- The name of the data that has been transferred will change to a normal display status and
the same data name is displayed in the TAPE display section.
- After all the selected data have been punched on the paper tape, the reverse-display
status of [START] will be cleared.
4. All punching
(2) Press the [ALL PUNCH NC → TAPE] menu key.
" ALL PNC will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
" [START] will change into a reverse-display status, and the tape puncher will start
operating.
- Bit 1 of parameter TAP26 = 0:
After all the pre-registered programs and other data have been punched on the paper tape,
the reverse-display status of [START] will be cleared.
- Bit 1 of parameter TAP26 = 1:
After all the pre-registered programs have been punched on the paper tape, the reverse-
display status of [START] will be cleared.
9-17
5. Comparing
(2) Press the [COMPARE NC = TAPE] menu key.
" COMPARE will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Select the data to be compared.
- See the description of procedural step (3) of “1. Loading”.
" [START] will change into a reverse-display status, and data comparison will begin.
- The display color will change to purple at the position in which the data being compared is
displayed. The name of the data that has been compared will change to a normal display
status and the same data name will be displayed in the NC display section.
- Clearing of the reverse-display status of [START] without an alarm message indicates that
the contents of all the selected data agree with those of the pre-registered data.
- If disparities exist in the data being compared, an alarm message 511 PROGRAM DATA
NOT SAME will be displayed and comparison will be aborted.
This indicates that the contents of the data displayed in purple do not agree with the
contents of the pre-registered counterpart.
6. All comparing
(2) Press the [ALLCOMP NC = TAPE] menu key.
" ALL CMP will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
" [START] will change into a reverse-display status, and data comparison will begin.
- Clearing of the reverse-display status of [START] without an alarm message indicates that
the contents of all data stored on the paper tape agree with those of the data pre-
registered within the NC unit.
- If disparities exist in the data being compared, an alarm message 511 PROGRAM DATA
NOT SAME will be displayed and comparison will be aborted.
9-18
7. Program-name tape input/output
When a program is transferred using tape I/O function, the name of the program which is set on
the PROGRAM FILE display can be assigned to that program during transfer operation.
A. Transfer conditions
1. Input or output of program names is possible only if the program-name tape I/O function has
been made valid using bit 2 of parameter TAP26.
See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List, for parameter details.
2. The following functions presented on the DATA I/O display (TAPE) can be used to transfer
program names to or from a tape.
- Loading
- All loading
- Punching
- All punching
- Comparing
- All comparing
B. Tape format
The name of the program transferred to or from a tape must be designated as follows:
Set the control-out code “(“ after the number with O, then set the program name and the control-
in code “)”, in that order.
Example: O00001234 (COMMENT1234)
↓
Program name
C. Notes
1. Only the codes listed in the ASCII codes list can be used as program names.
If an ASCII code other than 20, 2D, 2E, 30 to 39, or 41 to 5A is entered as the program
name, the ASCII code will be converted into a space code (&20) and registered in the
internal memory of the NC unit.
2. The maximum number of name characters which can be stored into the NC internal memory
during the program-name loading operation is 48. If, therefore, the name to be loaded
consists of 49 characters or more, all those excess characters will be ignored.
9-19
9-1-7 DATA I/O operations (FLOPPY)

The following four data input/output operations can be executed using a floppy disk.
1. Loading
The program data or other types of data prestored on a floppy disk are registered into the
NC unit.
2. Saving
The program data or other types of data pre-registered in the NC unit are stored onto a
floppy disk.
3. Directorying
The data type prestored on a floppy disk are displayed.
4. Formatting
A floppy disk is formatted (initialized).
The following description assumes that a floppy disk unit has already been connected to the NC
unit and that floppy disk setting is also completed.
Note: The FLOPPY data I/O function is available when parameter F163 bit 5 is set to “1.”

For loading, saving and directorying with a floppy disk, moreover, selection of the required
directory must be done beforehand by the following procedure:
appear.
9-20
To delete a directory (with all the files thereunder) on the floppy disk, proceed as follows:
appear.
3. Loading
(1) Press the [FLOPPY] menu key.
(2) Press the [LOAD NC ← FD] menu key.
- Move the cursor to an item in the PROGRAM area of the FLOPPY display section and
input the work number of the program to be transferred. The work number will change to a
- Move the cursor to the desired item in the OTHER DATA area of the FLOPPY display
9-21

remains on the display, the display status of [PROGRAM FILE] reverses.
be overridden.
4. Saving
(2) Press the [SAVE NC → FD] menu key.
data will be displayed in the FLOPPY display section.
9-22
5. Directorying
(2) Press the [CONTENTS FD] menu key.
the floppy disk will be displayed in the FLOPPY display section.
cleared.
6. Formatting
(2) Press the [FORMAT FD] menu key.
" FORMAT will be displayed on the I/O mode item.
(3) Key in “–9999” and press the INPUT key.
" [START] will change into a reverse-display status and initialization will begin.
- After initialization, the reverse-display status of [START] will be cleared.
Note 1: Only double-sided high-density (2HD) floppy disks can be used.
Note 2: Formatting is executed at 1.44 MB.
9-23
9-1-8 Saving CAM data
1. Saving CAM data

Use the [CAM DATA SAVE] menu function as follows to save various data to be used by the
MATRIX CAM unit in simulating the machine operation conditions.
(1) Press the [CAM DATA SAVE] menu key.
appear.
2. Changing the folder

The folder used for saving CAM data can be changed by the following procedure:
(1) Select [CAM Data Save Folder] from the [Setup] menu on the menu bar.
(2) Set the required folder name in the dialogue box which appears upon step (1).
9-24
- Click the [BROWSE] button to display the tree of the available folders, and select an item
if it is to be set as a folder name.
- The name of the folder which stores the data files is determined as follows:
“Setting of FOLDER NAME SET” + “Setting of DIR. SELECT”
Example: If the settings made as indicated in items 2 and 1 are respectively “E:\” and “ABC”,
the name of the folder concerned runs as follows:
E:\ABC
- The folder can be assigned to any computer on the network.
- The default setting is “E:\”.
9-25
9-1-9 Data input/output in text file format

The text file format can be applied for four types of I/O operations: CARD, HARD DISK, USB and
FLOPPY. Select (and reverse the display of) the [TEXT FORMAT] menu function to save (or
output) the NC data in text file format.
- EIA/ISO programs are always outputted in text file format (even with the [TEXT FORMAT]
menu function cancelled).
- The text file format is described in detail for each data type in Chapter 13, THREE-DIGIT G-
FORMAT, of the PROGRAMMING MANUAL [MAZATROL].
Loading and directorying operations are automatically performed appropriately to the format of
the file concerned, irrespective of the [TEXT FORMAT] menu function.
9-1-10 Saving programs additionally

It is possible to select between two types of saving operation for the CARD, HARD DISK, USB
and FLOPPY I/O mode: additional saving (of the programs and other types of data in the
specified directory) and overwriting saving (by deleting data in the specified directory before-
hand).
Use the menu bar as follows to make the desired selection.
(1) Examine the [Overwrite Mode] item under [Setup] on the menu bar.
- Additional saving and overwriting saving modes are currently selected respectively when
the [Overwrite Mode] item is provided with, and cleared of, a check mark.
- ‘Select’ [Overwrite Mode] from [Setup] on the menu bar to assign or clear a check mark.
* Each selection alternates the assignment and clearance of the check mark.
9-26
9-1-11 MAZATROL program loading
1. Outline
In the DATA I/O display, the MAZATROL program that has been created using the M640M, or
M640MPro can be converted into an appropriate format and then loaded into the memory of the
NC unit. The input and output functions that can be used for the conversion are as listed in the
table below.
#: Convertible ×: Inconvertible
M640MPro M640M
Binary Text Binary Text
CARD # # # #
HARD DISK # # # #
USB # # # #
FLOPPY # # # #
TAPE # # # #
CMT # × # ×
After loading the MAZATROL program that has been created using another type of NC unit, it is
absolutely necessary to confirm the contents of the program and enter missing data and data
that has not been converted.
Remark: When a program created using an NC unit with an input sensitivity of micrometer
(0.001 mm) is loaded, some digital items may be displayed up to the fourth decimal
digit. Such items refer to values that have been set by the auto-setting function, and
can be used as they are since our NC unit has an input sensitivity of submicron
(0.0001 mm).
! Before starting the machining operation, be sure to confirm all contents of the program
obtained by conversion. Imperfections in the program could lead to machine damage and
operator injury.
CAUTION
2. Restrictions
- TPC data
The TPC (Tool Path Control) data are used for the prevention of interference by a particular
control unit on a particular machine and must generally be re-set for another NC and another
machine. Therefore, TPC data are excluded from the conversion in question.
- Converting M640MPro programs
As for programs prepared with the M640MPro unit, only programs of initial-point scheme can
be converted appropriately (not those of workpiece scheme).
9-27
9-2 Program Transfer from the Host PC to the Memory Card
9-2-1 Outline
This section explains how to transfer machining programs, under an Ethernet-based network
environment, from the host PC to the memory card inserted into the front slot on the NC
operating panel.
Use of the method explained below eliminates the need for the host PC to have any memory
card handling equipment, and only the related data input/output functions of the NC unit are
needed to write program files onto the memory card.
The examples shown in this section assume the following environment where the host PC and
the NC unit are already connected to the network:
- Host PC ............................. A personal computer with the Microsoft Windows95/98/2000/XP or
Microsoft Windows NT4.0 installed in it,
- Network connection ........... Ethernet connection based on Windows functions,
- Network protocol................ Microsoft network and Microsoft network sharing services.
Note: The host PC can use an operating system (OS) other than the above or the host PC
itself may be a workstation if the program files can surely be transferred to the folder
within the hard disk (HD) of the NC unit. See the OS-accompanying manuals for
detailed information about transferring program files.
The procedure for transferring programs is outlined below.
(1) Modifying the HD-operating program storage folder of the NC unit into a sharable folder.
(2) Copying program files from the host PC into the HD-operating program storage folder of the
NC unit.
(3) Selecting the DATA I/O display on the NC unit and copying program files from the HD into
the memory card.
9-2-2 Detailed description
1. Modifying the HD-operating program storage folder into a sharable folder

The HD-operating program storage folder within the HD of the NC unit can be made readable
and writable from another Windows personal computer present on the network by modifying the
attributes of that folder. This task is called folder sharing, and the corresponding folder is referred
to as a sharable folder.
(1) Start the Windows Explorer.
9-28
(2) Select the HD-operating program storage folder by clicking “MC_Direct Mode Programs”.
(3) Click the right-hand button of the mouse on “MC_Direct Mode Programs” to display the
pop-up menu.
(4) By clicking the left button of the mouse, select “Sharing and Security...” from the pop-up
menu to display the Properties dialogue box for the sharing.
9-29
(5) Set data as follows in the Sharing Properties dialogue box:
- Sharing..............Select Shared this folder.

- Share Name......Leave the automatically set name as it is.
- Access Type .....Select “Full” control type.
Note: Although any share name can be entered, it is recommended for users unfamiliar with
Windows to use the automatically set name.
(6) Close the Properties dialogue box by clicking the left button of the mouse on the [OK]
button to complete the sharing process for the folder.
When sharing succeeds, the icon for the HD-operating program storage folder will change
as shown above.
9-30
2. Copying program files from the host PC into the HD-operating program storage folder
The Windows Explorer allows program files within the host PC to be copied into the HD-
operating program storage folder of the NC unit.
This section introduces the procedure for accessing from a WindowsXP-containing host PC the
NC unit’s HD-operating program storage folder that was modified into a sharable folder as
described in Section 1 above and then copying an existing program file from any folder within the
host PC.
(1) Activate the Windows Explorer of the host PC to display the sharable HD-operating program
storage folder of the NC unit located on the network. The share name mentioned in Section
1 above will be displayed.
9-31
(2) Select “My Computer” or the Windows Explorer and display the contents of the desired
folder within the HD of the host PC. (The example below shows the results of processing
from the selection of “My Computer” to the display of the contents of “Programs” folder.)
(3) Copy the desired program from the displayed folder into the HD-operating program storage
folder.
Note 1: The copying in Step (3) above will come to a halt in case the folder of destination
contains a program file having the same name as that of the selected file. The system
will then display a window to ask whether the existing file is to be overridden with the
selected one.
9-32
Note 2: Before copying a large-size program file, make sure that the HD of the NC unit has a
sufficient available area. Always keep the largest possible area free by deleting unnec-
essary programs from the HD-operating program storage folder on the PROGRAM
FILE display. Refer to Section 6-4, PROGRAM FILE Display, for the deleting proce-
dure. Use the Help function of the WindowsXP system to check the total residual
capacity of the HD of the NC unit.
3. Copying program files from the HD-operating program storage folder onto the memory card
(1) Press the [DATA I/O] menu key.
(3) Press the [HD AREA] menu key.
" [HD AREA] will change to a reverse-display status to indicate that data input/output
operations can be performed on the HD-operating program storage folder.
" [DIR. SELECT] will change to a reverse-display status and the following window will be
opened:
(5) Key in the name of the desired directory and then press the INPUT key.
- Use the alphanumeric keys to enter the directory name.
Note: Specify “MCICPROG” as the directory name if programs for the IC memory card
operation (optional function) are to be transferred. The IC memory card operation can
only refer to the programs stored under that directory name.
Refer to Section 11-4 for further details of the IC memory card operation.
(6) Press the [NC → CARD SAVE] menu key.
(7) Specify the program(s) to be transferred.
" [START] will change to a reverse-display status to indicate that transfer of the program
has been started.
- The reverse-display status of [START] will be cleared upon completion of the program
transfer.
Note: Before copying a program onto the IC memory card, make sure that the IC memory
card has a sufficient available area. Take great care when copying a program of a large
capacity, in particular. If the size of the desired program file within the HD-operating
program storage folder is larger than the capacity of the IC memory card to be used, it
is not possible to transfer that program file.
9-33
9-3 DATA I/O PARAMETER Display

Function:
This display is used to set the parameters for transferring programs or other types of data
between the NC unit and the hard disk or between the NC unit and an external unit.
9-3-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [2] [2] [1] [2] [2]
D740S0070E

[1] Transference setting — Setting for transference
[2] I/O parameter — Various parameters
Note: For further details, see the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List.
9-34 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS 10
10 DISPLAYS RELATED TO DIAGNOSIS
The NC unit provides the following diagnostic displays and windows:
ALARM
DIAGNOSIS
ALARM HISTORY
(USER)
PLC SIGNAL
MAINTENANCE
CHECK
PLC
Display
RUNNING VERSION
Window
CONTROL
DIAGNOSIS MONITOR
OPTION
DIAGNOSIS
SERVO MONITOR (*)
(MAKER)
SPINDLE MONITOR (*)
DATA ERASE HARDWARE MONITOR (*)
ACCUMULATED LADDER MONITOR (*)

TIME
Note: Description of displays marked with an asterisk (*) is omitted because these displays
are reserved for YAMAZAKI MAZAK servicemen.
H740S3K040E
H735S3K015E 10-1
10-1 DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM Display

Function:
- Displaying the number, details, etc. of alarms currently occuring
Remarks:
- Even if more than one alarm occurred, only one of the alarm messages will appear on other
displays. Selection of this display, however, gives you further detailed information about all
alarms whose causes have not been removed.
- Refer to the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for further details of alarms and
their resetting methods.
10-1-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
A. Display mode with abbreviated work numbers (names)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
D740S3046E
10-2
B. Display mode with full work numbers (names)
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
D740S3047E

[1] No. — Alarm number
[2] ALARM MESSAGE — Alarm contents
Section where the alarm occurred
( a, b, c )
[3] — a: Work number

b: Unit number
c: Sequence number
Note: The data may not be displayed for certain types of alarms.
[4] DATE M.D Date when the alarm occurred
[5] TIME H:M Time when the alarm occurred
[6] TYPE — Source of the occurrence of the alarm
Note: Use the menu bar to select the desired display mode.
- ‘Select’ [Work Number Name Display] from [Setup] on the menu bar to assign or
clear a check mark.
- Without a check mark being assigned to [Work Number Name Display], the size of
indication of work No. in the column [3] is limited to 9 characters (display mode A).
- With a check mark assigned to [Work Number Name Display], the indication of work
No. in the column [3] is given in up to 32 characters without information of TYPE [6]
(display mode B).
10-3
3. DATA ERASE window

This window is used to erase the entire data of, or to initialize, the particular display.
(1) Press the [DATA ERASE] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the DATA ERASE window will
appear.
(2) Select the display(s) to be initialized.

- Using the cursor keys, move the cursor onto the name of the display to be initialized and
press the INPUT key INPUT
.
! The data will be selected and the selected data name will be reversed in light blue.
- To cancel the selection, press the data cancel key .
! The reverse display status and selection of the display name will be cleared.
(3) Move the cursor to the COMPLETION box, input “–9999” and press the INPUT key.
! The selected display(s) will be initialized. After the initialization has been completed,
the DATA ERASE window will be cleared.
4. ACCUMULATED TIME window
A. Setting various cumulative time data

The four types of cumulative time data listed below can be set on the DIAGNOSIS display.
No. Item Data description

1 POWER ON The cumulative time for which the power has been turned on.
2 AUTO OPE. The cumulative time of automatic operation (from the start to the end).
The cumulative time of real automatic operation (with the start button lamp lighting).
3 AUTO CUT.
The feed-hold period and the stopping period in the single-block operation are excluded.
The cumulative time for which the commands of linear and circular interpolation (G1, G2,
4 TOTAL CUT.
and G3) have been excecuted.
10-4
(1) Press the [ACCUMU. TIME] menu key.
! The display of the menu item will be reversed and the ACCUMULATED TIME window
will appear.
(2) Using the cursor key, move the cursor to the line of the desired item.
Example: If the AUTO CUT. item is to be set
(3) Specify the time, and press the INPUT key.

Example: To set 11: 05’ 38’’, press keys in the following order:
1 1 " 5 " 3 8 INPUT
(4) Repeat steps (2) and (3) above for all other items for which cumulative time data is to be
set.
(5) Press the [ACCUMU. TIME] menu key.
! The reverse-display status of the menu item will be cleared. The ACCUMULATED
TIME window will then disappear.
10-5
10-2 DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM HISTORY Display

Function:
Displaying the details, the places of occurrence, etc. of all alarms that have occurred up to now,
in order of the latest alarm first.
10-2-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6]
[7]
D740S3048E
10-6
[1] [2] [3]
[7]
D740S0259E

[2] ALARM MESSAGE — Contents of alarm
Section where the alarm occured
(a, b, c)
a: Work number
[3] —
b: Unit number
c: Sequence number
Note: May not be displayed for the particular alarm.
[4] DATE M.D Date when the alarm occurred
[5] TIME H:M Time when the alarm occurred
[6] TYPE — Source of occurrence of the alarm
a/b
[7] Page —
a: Current page
Note 1: Use the menu bar to select the desired display mode.
clear a check mark.
No. in the column [3] is given in up to 32 characters without information of DATE [4],
TIME [5], and TYPE [6] (display mode B).
10-7
Note 2: Alarms related to simulation on the VIRTUAL MACHINING display are separately
saved on that display (not displayed therefore on the ALARM HISTORY display).
10-2-2 Output of an alarm history text file

Up to 10000 alarms that have occurred in the past are automatically saved on the hard disk of
the NC unit. A maximum of 72 past alarms are saved on the DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM
HISTORY display, and the operator can use saved alarm information for machine maintenance
purposes when wishing to check the alarms that have happened more retroactively to the past.
Text file name: “Alarm.txt”
Text file storage folder: “C:\MC_sdg\Alarm”
[Sample alarm history text file]
405 PROGRAM No. NOT FOUND 8. 2 18. 7 OPERATE FFFFFF FF0000 1

583 PROGRAM DATA TYPE INCORRECT ( 4, , ) 8. 2 18.14 TRANSFER FFFFFF FF0000 0
585 CABLE MIS-CONNECTED ( 2, -10, ) 8. 2 18.16 TRANSFER FFFFFF FF0000 1
583 PROGRAM DATA TYPE INCORRECT ( 4, , ) 8. 2 18.18 TRANSFER FFFFFF FF0000 0
641 MISSING INPUT DATA ( 10, 0, 0) 8. 3 9.35 PROGRAM FFFFFF FF0000 0
- Output of the alarm history text file can be made valid/invalid by using the required parameter.
Parameter F83, bit 0: Alarm history text file output [‘0’: Valid, ‘1’: Invalid]
- The number of alarms that have been saved in the text file is counted during power-on. If the
number of alarms at this time is in excess of 10000, old alarms are automatically deleted in
order with the oldest alarm first so as to reduce the registration to a maximum of 10000 alarms.
This automatic reduction in number of the saved alarms also occurs on the occasion of
“viewing the alarm history text file on the screen” described below.
10-2-3 Viewing the alarm history text file on the screen

A menu function is provided for viewing on the NC screen the text file of alarm history mentioned
above in Subsection 10-2-2. Press the [TEXT FILE DISPLAY] menu key, and the contents of the
DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM HISTORY display are replaced with those of the text file in
question, along with the [TEXT FILE DISPLAY] menu item being highlighted in magenta as well
as the denominator in the page display area (item [8]) being updated accordingly.
- The above menu item is only presented when F83, bit 0 = 0.
Parameter F83, bit 0: Alarm history text file output [‘0’: Valid, ‘1’: Invalid]
Note: The language of the displayed text-file data may differ from the current language of NC
display. Moreover, some specific characters may be garbled (may not be displayed as
appropriate) due to significant difference between the languages of the text file and the
NC display.
1. Searching alarms by numbers and dates

Follow the procedure below to search the text file for particular alarms by numbers and dates.
A. Searching alarms by numbers

(1) Press the [ALARM No. SEARCH] menu key.
! The message ALARM No. SEARCH? will be displayed.
10-8
(2) Key in the desired alarm number and press the INPUT key INPUT .
Example: To search for alarm No. 318, press the keys 3 1 8 INPUT in that order.
The screen will then be scrolled to show the first page including an alarm with the specified
number. Press the INPUT key again to continue searching for the same alarm number.
INPUT
If no corresponding alarms can be found (any more), then the alarm message 407
DESIGNATED DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.
(3) Press the CLEAR key as required.
! The specified alarm number will be cleared. Repeat Steps (2) and (3) to search for
another alarm number.
(4) Finally press the [ALARM No. SEARCH] menu key again.
! The highlighting of the menu item will be cleared with the search mode terminated.
B. Searching alarms by dates

(1) Press the [DATE SEARCH] menu key.
! The message ALARM DATE SEARCH (MM.DD)? will be displayed.
(2) Key in the desired date and press the INPUT key INPUT .
Example: To search for alarms occurred on March 18, press the keys 3 " 1 8
INPUT in that order.

The screen will then be scrolled to show the first page including an alarm of the date “March
18”. Press the INPUT key again to continue searching for the same date. If no corre-
INPUT
sponding alarms can be found (any more), then the alarm message 407 DESIGNATED
DATA NOT FOUND will be displayed.
(3) Press the CLEAR key as required.
! The specified date will be cleared. Repeat Steps (2) and (3) to search for alarms of
another date.
(4) Finally press the [DATE SEARCH] menu key again.
! The highlighting of the menu item will be cleared with the search mode terminated.
10-9
10-2-4 EXCLUDE ALARM function

Follow the procedure below to specify the alarms which are to be excluded from saving.
(1) Select [Exclude Alarm] from [Setup] on the menu bar.
! The EXCLUDE ALARM window will then be opened.
(2) Place the cursor at the desired entry position and key in the number of the alarm to be
excluded from saving.
(3) Select again the [Exclude Alarm] item from [Setup] on the menu bar to close the window.
- The settings in this window work immediately. They are saved in a text file and will be read in
each time the NC is started up.
- Alarms that are caused in relation to SYSTEM, SPINDLE and SERVO (Alarm Nos. 1 to 99 and
1000 to 1099) cannot be excluded from saving. The entry of such a number will cause an alarm
(402 ILLEGAL NUMBER INPUT).
10-10
10-3 DIAGNOSIS (USER) - PLC SIGNAL Display

Function:
Displaying ON/OFF status of machine signals
10-3-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
A. First page (No. 1 to No. 36)
[1] [1]
[2] [3] [2] [3]
[4]
D740S0073E
10-11
B. Second page (No. 37 to No. 72)
[1] [1]
[2] [3] [2] [3]
[4]
D740S0074E
C. Third page (No. 73 to No. 89)
[1]
[2] [3]
[4]
D740S0075E
10-12

[1] Signal name — Singal name
ON/OFF status of signals
[2] 0/1 — 0: OFF
1: ON
[3] Condition Conditions for the signal to be turned ON (with devices concerned)
a/b
[4] Page —
a: Current page
Note: In the displayed data under Condition [3] the symbols &, I, and ! refer to the logical
operators AND, OR and NOT, respectively.
10-13
10-4 MAINTENANCE CHECK Display

Function:
- Periodic check items, the last date of checking, and the time that has elapsed since the last
date of checking are displayed.
- Periodic check items can be registered.
Remarks:
The machine will not stop even if the display of the time which has elapsed since the last date of
checking exceeds the target time.
10-4-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[4]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[3] [5] [6]
[2] [4]
[3]
[1] [4]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[4]
[3]
[7]
D740S0076E

[1] No. — Check number
MAINTENANCE
[2] — Name of a periodic check item
CHECK DATA
[3] TIME % Graphical representation of the rate of the current time to the target time
[4] Target time Hour Target time for the periodic check item
[5] Current time Hour Current time for the periodic check item
[6] PREVIOUS CHECK ’Y. M. D The last date of periodic check item
10-14
a/b
[7] Page —
a: Current page
3. Registering the data for regular check items
A. Presetting the target time or the current time

(1) Move the cursor to the data item where data is to be preset.
(2) Enter time.
Example: Specify “96” and press the INPUT key to input 96.
Note: Entry of the current time updates the data of data item [6] (PREVIOUS CHECK).
10-4-2 Data display for long-term check items (1500 and 3000 hours check items)
1. Displayed data
[1]
[2] [2]
[3] [3]
[4]
D740S0077E

Title of long-term check items
[1] Title — 1500-HRS CHECK ITEMS on the first page, and
3000-HRS CHECK ITEMS on the second page.
[2] No. — Check number
[3] Check items — Name of the check item
10-15

a/b
[4] Page —
a: Current page

The display status of data item will reverse when the current time reaches the target time. After
completion of checking, move the cursor to No. using the cursor key and then press the INPUT
key. The display of data item will then return from the reverse status to the normal status.
10-4-4 Entry of the check items to be displayed

The check items to be displayed cannot be entered directly on the MAINTENANCE CHECK
display. This subsection describes the procedure for adding or deleting the check items to be
displayed.
1) Save the factory-set data of display items beforehand into the file.
2) Execute the [File Write] function to create a file under the specified directory (see Item 2
below).
3) Edit the text file as required (see Item 1 below).
4) Execute the [File Read] function to fetch the data onto the display (see Item 2 below).
1. Registering the data of the check items

Using a commercially available editor, open the text file of the following format under the
specified directory (\nm64mdata\eng\maintenance.txt).
[urcom]; ........................ Header of periodic check items

; ....................................... Comment line
1,CHECK GUIDE WAY LUB-OIL
M
24,
[mei15]; ........................ Header of 1500-hrs check items
1,CHANGE HYDRAULIC UNIT OIL
M
32,
[mei30]; ........................ Header of 3000-hrs check items
1,CHECK MACHINE LEVEL
M
32,
Note: “eng” in the directory name corresponds with the language currently selected for the
display mode.
A. Data format of the periodic check items
[urcom] Periodic check items - Up to 24 items can be registered.

1,CHECK GUIDE WAY LUB-OIL - Set the description after the serial number and comma.
M
24,
Note: The description can consist of up to 40 characters (a two-byte code is counted as two
characters). Excess items or characters will be ignored.
10-16
B. Data format of the long-term check items
[mei15] 1500-hrs check items - Up to 32 items can be registered.

1,CHANGE HYDRAULIC UNIT OIL - Set the description after the serial number and comma.
M
32,
[mei30] 3000-hrs check items

1,CHECK MACHINE LEVEL
M
32,
Note: The description can consist of up to 40 characters (a two-byte code is counted as two
characters). Excess items or characters will be ignored.
2. Read and Write of check items’ text file

All the check items presented on the MAINTENANCE CHECK display can be read in from, and
written into, the specified text file. Use a commercially available editor to prepare a text file
containing the desired check items to be read in and presented on the display.
A. File Read
Using a commercially available editor, prepare a text file (containing the desired check items)
and copy it into the specified directory.
Select the option [File Read] through the item [File] on the menu bar to start data loading. The
contents thus read in will be displayed as shown below upon completion of loading.
10-17
B. File Write
Select the option [File Write] through the item [File] on the menu bar to save the display data.
A text file containing the current display data will be created under the specified directory.
10-18
10-5 RUNNING CONTROL Display

Function:
Displaying the machine operational status.
Remarks:
- The operational status during power-on time is displayed in distinction between the following
four divisions:
1. Running in automatic operation
2. Stopping in automatic operation
3. Setting-up in automatic operation
4. Stopping due to an alarm
- Program numbers and machining results (numbers of finished workpieces) on the selected
date can be displayed.
- Change in speed and load (%) of the spindle on the selected date can be displayed.
- If machine alarm stop event information exists for the specified date, all alarm messages
displayed at that time can be listed.
10-5-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [2]
D740S3050E
10-19

Date and cumulative power-on time for the operational status display
a (b)
c
[1] DATE/TIME —
a : Date (Year. Month. Day)
b : Day of the week
c : Cumulative power-on time
- The operational status is displayed as follows on a strip graph:
Division Color Description

AUTO blue The time for which the start button lamp was on.
The time for which the machine remained in
Graphic display of FEED HOLD green
[2] — feed-hold or single-block stop.
operational status The time for which the automatic operation was
ALARM red
disabled due to an alarm.
The time for which power was on under other
SET UP yellow
states.
- Blank areas (no strip display) refer to power-off time.
Note: Information on the machine status is accumulated at intervals of 10 seconds on the

RUNNING CONTROL display. Changes in the machine status during 10 seconds,
therefore, may not be accumulated.
10-5-2 Display period setting

When the RUNNING CONTROL display is called up, past one week (last seven days) of
machine status data will be initially displayed. Two methods are available to display machine
status data older than past one week:
1. Date specification
When the date is specified, machine status data that was recorded one week (seven days)
before the specified date will be displayed.
(1) Press the [CHANGE PERIOD] menu key.
(2) Enter the date (year, month, and day).
Example: To specify August 10, 2005, press keys in the following order:
2 0 0 5 " 8 " 1 0 INPUT
(3) The highlighted status of the menu item is cleared and machine status data that was
recorded one week (seven days) before the specified date is displayed.
In the above example, machine status data that was recorded from August 4, 2005, to
August 10, 2005, is displayed.
Note: A press only of the INPUT key without data entry allows display to be
INPUT
returned to that of the information which has been stored during the past seven
days from the current date.
2. Change using the page key

A press of the page key allows display to be changed on a weekly (seven days) basis.
- Press the key to display machine status data older than the currently displayed period.
- Press the key to display machine status data later than the currently displayed period.
10-20
10-5-3 Display of detailed data
Executed work numbers, machined workpiece counts, detected alarms, and other information
can be confirmed in detail on the RUNNING CONTROL display.
1. Changing the display

(1) Call up the cursor in the column of DATE/TIME by pressing a cursor control key.
- The cursor here refers to such a highlighted section in the DATE/TIME column as shown
in the following example of display:
Cursor
(2) Move the cursor to the desired date using the cursor control keys.
(3) Press either of the following menu keys:
- Press the [RUNNING COND.] menu key to display the work number of the program which
was executed on the specified date, the number of workpieces machined on that date, and
other information.
- Press the [M. SPDL LOAD] menu key when changes in the load (%) and rotational speed
of the milling spindle on the specified date are to be displayed on a graph.
- Press the [T. SPNDL 1 LOAD] menu key when changes in the load (%) and rotational
speed of the turning spindle No. 1 on the specified date are to be displayed on a graph.
- Press the [T. SPNDL 2 LOAD] menu key when changes in the load (%) and rotational
speed of the turning spindle No. 2 on the specified date are to be displayed on a graph.
- Press the [ALARM LIST] menu key to display a list of alarms which were detected on the
specified date.
Note: The types of spindle loads which can be displayed differ according to the particular
machine specifications.
10-21
10-5-4 Display for each work number
1. Displayed data
[1]
[2]
D740S3051E

Work number of the machining program and machining result.
a (b)
c
[1] WORK No. —
a : Work number
c : Number of finished workpieces
The operational status is displayed as follows on a strip graph:
Division Color Description

AUTO RUNNING blue The time for which the start button lamp was on.
Graphic display of The time for which the machine remained in feed-
[2] IDLING green
— hold or single-block stop.
operational status
The time for which the automatic operation was
ALARM red
disabled due to an alarm.
SET UP yellow The time for which power was on under other states.
Blank areas (no strip display) refer to power-off time.
Note: The Number of finished workpieces displayed here only refers to the value of “parts
count” automatically taken on the corresponding command in the particular program.
Refer to the Programming Manual for the parts counting.
- Up to five machining programs can be displayed at the same time. Scrolling for the sixth
program onward can be done by pressing the page key.
10-22
10-5-5 Spindle load display
1. Displayed data
[1]
[2]
D740S3052E

- Graphic display of change in spindle speed.
[1] RPM min–1
- The change in spindle speed during power-on is displayed in a red line.
- Graphic display of change in spindle load.
[2] LOAD %
- The changes in spindle load are displayed in green.
10-23
10-5-6 Alarm list display
1. Displayed data
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5]
[6]
D740S3053E
[1] [2] [3] [4]
[6]
D740S3054E
10-24

[2] ALARM MESSAGE — Contents of alarm
Section where the alarm occured
(a, b, c)
a: Work number
[3] —
b: Unit number
c: Sequence number
Note: May not be displayed for the particular alarm.
The time the alarm was detected, and the time the alarm was released
[4] OCCUR.TIME H:M – H:M
Detected time (H:M)-released time (H:M)
[5] TYPE — Source of occurrence of the alarm
a/b
[6] Page —
a: Current page
Note 1: Use the menu bar to select the desired display mode.
clear a check mark.
No. in the column [3] is given in up to 32 characters without information of TYPE [5]
(display mode B).
Note 2: Only the alarms that were displayed in the alarm display area at the left bottom of the
display when the machine was in an alarm stop status are stored on the RUNNING
CONTROL display.
Note 3: The total number of alarms which can be listed at a time on the display is 16. Other
alarms can be displayed by selecting pages with the page key.
1. CSV file output

Up to seven days of operational status data listed on the display is saved in the CSV file format
on the hard disk.
［Output format］
Transfer of output data to the display unit on a line-by-line basis occurs with comma delimiters for
each item name in the next table. However, for the first line, the particular item name is
transferred and for the second line onward, 8640 lines of data which was sampled every 10
seconds with 0:00 as its starting time is transferred.
No. Item Item name Output format

1 Spindle current feedback SPDL_FB1 Decimal number
SPDL_FB2 Decimal number
10-25
No. Item Item name Output format

2 Automatic operation bit-7 ATMD_ALARM 0/1 binary
mode
bit-6 ATMD_N/A 0/1 binary
bit-2 ATMD_MDI 0/1 binary
bit-1 ATMD_TAPE 0/1 binary
bit-0 ATMD_MEM 0/1 binary
3 Manual operation bit-7 MNMD_N/A 0/1 binary
mode bit-6 MNMD_N/A 0/1 binary
bit-5 MNMD_N/A 0/1 binary
bit-4 MNMD_RET 0/1 binary
bit-3 MNMD_PTP 0/1 binary
bit-2 MNMD_STEP 0/1 binary
bit-1 MNMD_HAND 0/1 binary
bit-0 MNMD_JOG 0/1 binary
4 Status signal bit-F SGNL_N/A 0/1 binary
bit-E SGNL_DEN2 0/1 binary
bit-D SGNL_TAP 0/1 binary
bit-C SGNL_CXF 0/1 binary
bit-B SGNL_BRT 0/1 binary
bit-A SGNL_SMZ 0/1 binary
bit-9 SGNL_IMP 0/1 binary
bit-8 SGNL_DEN 0/1 binary
bit-7 SGNL_RWD 0/1 binary
bit-6 SGNL_CXN 0/1 binary
bit-5 SGNL_RSL 0/1 binary
bit-4 SGNL_SPL 0/1 binary
bit-3 SGNL_STL 0/1 binary
bit-2 SGNL_OP 0/1 binary
bit-1 SGNL_SA 0/1 binary
bit-0 SGNL_MA 0/1 binary
5 Spindle speed SPDL_ROT1 Decimal number
SPDL_ROT2 Decimal number
6 Number of machined workpieces PARTS_CNT Decimal number
7 Spindle override SPDL_OVRD1 Decimal number
SPDL_OVRD2 Decimal number
8 Cutting feed override FEED_OVRD Decimal number
9 Rapid feed override RAPID_OVRD Decimal number
10 Work No. attribute WNO_ATRB Binary 0 (EIA)/1(MAZ)
11 Work No. WNO_NO Decimal number
12 Alarm attribute (for system) ALARM_ATRB Decimal number
13 Alarm No. ALARM_NO Decimal number
14 Alarm detail code 1 ALARM_CODE1 Character string of detail code 1
10-26
2. Erasure of all operational status data files
All operational status data is erased.
3. Creation of an operational status data folder

Operational status data is saved on the hard disk automatically. To change the saving
destination, a new saving folder can be created using this function.
Prior to shipping from the factory, the operational status data folder is preset as follows:
［C:\RUNMNG\LOG］
4. Creation of CSV file output folder

To change the CSV file saving destination, a new saving folder can be created using this
function.
Prior to shipping from the factory, the CSV file output folder is preset as follows:
［C:\RUNMNG\CSV］
10-27
10-6 DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) - VERSION Display

Function:
Displaying versions of NC unit and servo axes
10-6-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[5] [6] [7]
[1] [2]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [1] [2]
D740S0265E

[1] ITEM — Name of NC unit and servo axes
MAIN-A MAIN-A software LGP- Ladder language

MAIN-B MAIN-B software SRV- Servo axis
LG- MAIN-B language SPN- Spindle
LADDER-F Ladder J2CT- Peripheral axes
LADDER-B Ladder (for simulation)
[2] VERSION — Version

[3] MOTOR — Type name of motor stroke end detector
[4] MACHINE — Type name of machine stroke end detector
[5] UNIT — Model name of NC unit
[6] SERIAL — Serial number of NC unit
[7] MODEL — Type number of NC unit
Note: Version of NC unit refers to MAIN-A.
10-28
10-7 DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) - DIAGNOSIS MONITOR Display

Function:
- Display of memory status in the NC unit
- You can write data into the memory.
Remarks:
Please follow the ructions of the Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center when writing
data into the memory.
10-7-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[1] [2] [3] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8] [4] [5] [6] [7] [8]
[9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16]
D740S0083E

[1] ADDRESS — Display of memory address
[2] 76543210 — Data display in binary notation for the address in [1]
[3] HEX — Data display in hexadecima notation for the address in [1]
[4] ADRSS — Display of I/O address
[5] FEDCBA76543210 — Data display in binary notation for the address in [4]
[6] HEX — Data display in hexadecimal notation for the address in [4]
[7] SHORT — Data display in decimal notation for the address in [4] (2-byte data)
[8] LONG — Data display in decimal notation for the address in [4] (4-byte data)
[9] ADDRESS — Address when writing data into memory
10-29

[10] 76543210 — Data display in binary notation for the address in [9]
[11] HEX — Data display in hexadecima notation for the address in [9]
[12] ADRSS — Address when writing data into I/O address
[13] FEDCBA76543210 — Data display in binary notation for the address in [12]
[14] HEX — Data display in hexadecimal notation for the address in [12]
[15] SHORT — Data display in decimal notation for the address in [12] (2-byte data)
[16] LONG — Data display in decimal notation for the address in [12] (4-byte data)
1. Monitoring memory status

(1) Place the cursor on the ADDRESS column of the MEMORY MONITOR DISP section.
Example:
(2) Set the address to be monitored.

Example: Set 89ABC.
2. Monitoring I/O memory status

(1) Place the cursor on the ADRSS column of the I/O MONITOR DISP section.
Example:
(2) Set the address to be monitored.

Example: Set Y120.
10-30
3. Writing data into the memory
(1) Place the cursor on the ADDRESS item of the MEMORY MONITOR WRITE section.
Example:
(2) Set the address for which the data should be written.
Example: Set A8000000.
(3) Move the cursor onto the HEX item of the MEMORY MONITOR WRITE section.
Example:
(4) Set the data to be written.

Example: Set 1A.
Note: Please follow the instructions of the Mazak Technical Center or Technology Center
when writing data into the memory.
4. Writing data in hexadecimal notation into the I/O memory
(1) Place the cursor on the ADRSS item of the I/O MONITOR WRITE section.
Example:
(2) Set the address for which the data should be written.
Example: Set R388.
(3) Move the cursor onto the HEX item of the I/O MONITOR WRITE section.
Example:
10-31
(4) Set the data to be written.

Example: Set F1.
Note: Write data in accordance with the directions of the Mazak Technical Center or
Technology Center.
5. Writing data (within the range from –32768 to 32767) in decimal notation into the I/O
memory
(1) Carry out the same operations as those of steps (1) and (2) described under 4 above.
Example: Set R388.
(2) Move the cursor onto the SHORT item of the I/O MONITOR WRITE section.
Example:
(3) Input the data to be written.

Example: Set 9000.
Technology Center.
6. Writing data (outside the range from –32768 to 32767) in decimal notation into the I/O
memory
(1) Carry out the same operations as those of steps (1) and (2) described under 5 above.
Example: Set R388.
(2) Move the cursor onto the LONG item of the I/O MONITOR WRITE section.
Example:
10-32
(3) Input the data to be written.
Example: Set 900000.
Technology Center.
10-33
10-8 DIAGNOSIS (MAKER) - OPTION Display

Function:
Displaying all optional functions for the NC unit
Remarks:
All terms are displayed in English on this display.
10-8-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [2] [3]
D740S0084E

Display of whether each of optional functions for the NC unit is available
or not.
[1] Function name —
The items for which the option is valid are displayed in black and the
items for which the option is invalid are displayed in white.
10-34 E
OPTION 11
11 OPTION
11-1 Function Relating EIA/ISO Program (Option)

When the EIA/ISO ONLY function is made valid in order to operate the NC unit in EIA/ISO
program mode only, the screen configuration and various display modes will change to provide
convenience during machining with EIA/ISO programs. This function is valid only when EIA/ISO
programming option is added.
11-1-1 Setting method

(1) Call up the DIAGNOSIS (ALARM) display.
(2) Press the window key and move the cursor to the [EIA/ISO ONLY] item through
[Setup] on the menu bar.
(3) Press the INPUT key INPUT .

! A check mark is displayed at the [EIA/ISO ONLY] item to indicate that this function has
become valid.
Check
mark
When Steps (1), (2), and (3) are performed once again, the check mark at the [EIA/ISO ONLY]
item will be cleared to indicate that the function has become invalid.
11-1-2 Configuration of displays

If the EIA/ISO ONLY function is made valid, the displays that the NC unit provides are of the
configuration shown in the following pages.
H740S3L040E 11-1
11 OPTION
Configuration of displays - when EIA/ISO ONLY is made valid -
MONITOR PART SHAPE WORK No.

POSITION
RESTART HANDLE COMPARISON
INTERRUPT STOP∗
EIA TRACE WORK OFFSET MEASURE MACRO ADDITIONAL

MONITOR VARIABLE WPC
∗
WORK No. WORK No. POSITION POSITION
PART SHAPE MONITOR
DYNAMIC STRAIGHTNESS
RESTART RESTART OFFSET GRAPH
COMPARISON COMPARISON ∗ ∗
STOP∗ STOP∗
WORK No.
PROGRAM
(EIA)
MONITOR PART SHAPE

TOOL PATH PROGRAM
CHECK FILE
MACHINING
VIRTUAL
NAVIGATION-
MACHINING
PREDICTION
DATA ERASE
DIAGNOSIS
(USER) ACCUMULATED
TOOL POSITION TIME
OFFSET
∗
DIAGNOSIS RUNNING
(MAKER) CONTROL
TOOL
DATA
LADDER
MONITOR
USER
PARAMETER
MACHINE PLC
PARAMETER PARAMETER
11-2
OPTION 11
DATA I/O
WORK No.
MACHINING
AUTO MACHINING-
NAVIGATION- 3D SETUP 3D MONITOR
MEASURE MONITORING
RESULT
Main display
Sub-display
Window
SPINDLE LOAD
MAINTENANCE GRAPHIC
GRAPHIC ∗ Optional
CHECK MAINTENANCE
DISPLAY
The displays connected by the
line can be called up mutually by
pressing the menu key.
D740S0101
11-3
11 OPTION
11-1-3 POSITION display

POSITION display is changed as follows when the EIA/ISO ONLY function is made valid.
1. Displayed data when the EIA/ISO ONLY function is made valid
[1]
[2]
D740S3055E
11-4
OPTION 11
2. Displayed data with the [COMMAND] menu item in highlighted display
[3]
[4]
D740S3056E

O a b
(a’ b’)
[1] O – a
Work numbers
a’
b
Identification of MAZATROL or EIA/ISO program
b’
(For data items a’ and b’, data is displayed only during execution of subprograms.)
N a
[2] N –
a: Sequence number
O a b c
( a’ b’ ) ( c’ )
[3] O –
The meaning of data a, b, a’ and b’ is same as in [1]. Refer to the item [1].
c, c’: Name of the program
(Only the first 16 characters are displayed.)
N a – a’
[4] N – a: Number of the sequence being executed
a’: Number of the block being executed
11-5
11 OPTION
11-2 Geometry Compensation Function
11-2-1 Function general
1. Geometry compensation function

Machining at rapid feed will generally degrade a geometry accuracy in proportion to the feed rate.
For example, delayed follow-up of smoothing circuit and servo system occurs in circular cutting,
making a smaller workpiece than commanded circle radius.
Our CNC unit allows conventional geometry errors to be reduced by using geometry
compensation function. The geometry compensation function is composed of the following five
functions:
1. Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
2. Feedforward control
3. Precise vector compensation
4. Optimum feed control (Optimum deceleration at corners, Optimum acceleration control)
5. Feed clamping for circular interpolation
In circular cutting, geometry errors from smoothing circuit can be reduced by pre-interpolation
acceleration/deceleration and those from delayed follow-up of servo system can be reduced by
feedforward control.
Programmed path
∆R
F Path when geometry compensation

F
function is invalid.
Path when geometry compensation

function is valid at an active
R feedforward gain level of 0%
Path when geometry compensation

function is valid at an active
feedforward gain level of 70%
R: Designated radius (mm)

∆R: Radius error (mm)
F: Cutting feed rate(m/min)
11-6
OPTION 11
Active feedforward control
Pre-interpolation accelerate/
decelerate commands
Active feedforward control
Post-interpolation
accelerate/decelerate
+ +
commands
Kp Kv M
– –
Detector
Kp: Position loop gain S

Kv: Velocity loop gain
M: Motor
S: Differential
Note: Active feedforward control is valid only when the geometry compensation function is
valid.
Also, the time required for the positioning of very small line segments using command G00 can
be reduced since gradient-fixed acceleration/deceleration occurs automatically.
The positioning time changes as follows:
Velocity
Time constant fixed
Positioning time Time

Gradient fixed
(When geometry
compensation
function is valid.)
Positioning time Time
Optimum corner deceleration may occur, depending on the angle, θ, of connection point A. This
allows machining into highly precise edges.
Programmed path
Deceleration occurs here.
11-7
11 OPTION
2. Geometry compensation function for rotational axes

As compared with the geometry compensation function described above under 1, this function
improves errors in control system by implementing the appropriate acceleration/deceleration
according to the particular machining contour, even for movement commands that require
simultaneous control of the rotational axes.
In stead of the conventional “optimum deceleration at corners,” the optimum acceleration control
is conducted in the geometry compensation function for rotational axes.
Geometry compensation INVALID for rotational axes Geometry compensation VALID for rotational axes
1 Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
2 Optimum deceleration at corners Optimum acceleration control
3 Feed clamping for circular interpolation Feed clamping for circular interpolation
4 Precise vector compensation Precise vector compensation
5 Feedforward control Feedforward control
6 Software acceleration/deceleration control Software acceleration/deceleration control
This compensation function provides control as required to ensure that the acceleration of each
axis at corners may come to the maximum permissible value (as set in the parameters con-
cerned).
C-axis
Motion path Acceleration arising from a

N1 N2
change in the moving direction
Z-axis
C-axis motion C-axis motion

speed Change in motion speed speed Deceleration for the permissible
acceleration (to suppress vibration)
D740S3087
11-8
OPTION 11
11-2-2 Detailed description
1. Programming format
A. MAZATROL program
For MAZATROL programs the geometry compensation function becomes automatically valid
through the setting of user-parameter F72.
User-parameter F72 = 1: Geometry compensation function valid

F72 = 0: Geometry compensation function invalid
It is also possible to validate/invalidate the geometry compensation function by setting

M153/M154 under M-code article either of tool sequence data in a machining unit or of a manual
program mode unit. But it is not the case if M153/M154 is given in an M-code unit.
M153 : Geometry compensation function valid

M154 : Geometry compensation function invalid
Sample program
UNo. MAT. INITIAL-Z ATC MODE MULTI MODE MULTI FLAG PITCH-X PITCH-Y
0 CST IRN 100. 0 OFF " " "
UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R
1 FCE MILL 0. 2. 4 " 0.6 "
SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 FCE MILL 100. ? ? XBI " 1.4 70. 110 2.1 154
F 2 FCE MILL 100. ? ? XBI " " 70. 110 0.84
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CX P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 0. 0. 150. −150.
UNo. UNIT DEPTH SRV-Z BTM WAL FIN-Z FIN-R INTER-R CHMF
2 POCKET 10. 10. 4 4 0.6 0.6 0. 0.
SNo. TOOL NOM-φ No. APRCH-X APRCH-Y TYPE ZFD DEP-Z WID-R C-SP FR M M
R 1 END MILL 20. ? ? CW G01 9.4 14. 82 0.159 154
F 2 END MILL 14. ? ? CW G01 " 9.8 86 0.448
FIG PTN P1X/CX P1Y/CX P3X/R P3Y CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
1 SQR 45. −85. 105. 115. R 10. R 10. R 10. R 10.
UNo. UNIT CONTI. NUMBER ATC RETURN WORK No. EXECUTE
3 END 0 1 0 ZERO PT "
Note: If the program shown above is executed in the automatic operation mode with
parameter F72 = 1, the geometry compensation function will be made invalid for rough
machining of face milling (with face mill of φ100) and pocket milling (with end mill of
φ20).
11-9
11 OPTION
B. EIA/ISO Program
G61.1 Geometry compensation function valid

G61 (Exact stop check mode)
G62 (Automatic corner override) Geometry compensation function invalid
G63 (Tapping mode) (Command codes of the same group cancel the mode.)
G64 (Cutting mode)
Note: In the case of EIA/ISO programs, it is always necessary to give the G-code command
to make the geometry compensation function valid since the setting of parameter F72
is not effective for them.
Sample program
N001 G61.1 Geometry compensation function valid

G01X100.F1000
X100.Y-100.
X-100.Y-100.
X-100.
X-100.Y100.
X100.Y100.
G64 The mode is cancelled (becomes invalid).
2. Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
F Programmed path
F Actual path
∆R
R: Designated radius (mm)/(inch)

∆θ ∆R: Radius error (mm)/(inch)
∆θ: Angle error (rad)
F: Cutting feed rate (m/min)/(inch/min)
R
The radius error, ∆R, is calculated as follows:

3
1 1 2 1 2 F × 10 2
Post-interpolation Exponential ∆R = × ( Ts + Tp ) × ( ) (mm)
R 2 2 60
acceleration/
1 1 2 1 2 F × 103 2
deceleration Linear ∆R = × ( Ts + Tp ) × ( ) (mm)
R 24 2 60
Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
1 1 2 2 F × 103 2
(When geometry compensation function if ∆R = × (θ + Tp (1 – Kf )) × ( ) (mm)
R 2 60
effective)
F F × 103
Note: Under the inch system, ( ) acts as a substitute for ( )
60 60
Ts : The preset time constant (sec) for the smoothing circuit = Parameter N5/1000
Tp : Position loop time constant (sec) = 1/parameter SV003
Kf : Feedforward gain = Parameter S4/100
11-10
OPTION 11
The acceleration/deceleration pattern is shown below.
Velocity
L74
Gradient-fixed
acceleration/deceleration
Programmed
velocity
Time
L75
Gradient-fixed execution time
3. Optimum corner deceleration

Machining with high edge precision can be done by decelerating the machine at corners.
Optimum corner deceleration control occurs when the function of geometry compensation is
made invalid for rotational axes.
Before it arrives at corner point P, the machine is automatically decelerated to achieve its
maximum permissible deceleration value, Vo.
θ
P
N002
N001
Decelerated to Vo
The deceleration pattern is shown below.
Velocity
N001 N002
F: Cutting feed rate

L75: Cutting feed time constant
Vo for pre-interpolation
acceleration/deceleration
Vo: Maximum permissible
deceleration velocity
L75 Time
The value of Vo can be approximately given in the following expressions:

Vo = ∆V / 2 (1 – cosθ)
∆V = (L74/L75) × ∆t ∆t: Sampling frequency during interpolation (= 3.5 msec)
11-11
11 OPTION
If the intersection angle, θ, of the path of the current block and that of the next one is the value of
parameter L77 or less, these two paths will be judged smooth and no deceleration will occur. If
this angle is in excess of the value of parameter L77 the paths will be judged nonsmooth and
optimum corner deceleration will be performed.
Note: The angle θ will be handled as five degrees if parameter L79 is set to 0.
Although any value from 0 to 30 degrees can be set using parameter L77, setting of too
large an angle value may cause machine vibration and/or rough surface machining,
even if that value is an allowable one.
4. Optimum acceleration control

Optimum acceleration control refers to controlling the feed at corners between blocks. The
acceleration of each axis concerned for cornering is controlled so as to obtain the optimum rate
of feed at corners and thus to prevent machine vibration for high accuracy in edge sections.
Optimum acceleration control occurs when the function of geometry compensation is made valid
for rotational axes.
The feed of the first block is decelerated at the corner point P to such a value (Vo) that the
acceleration (A) of each axis required for the motion of the second block may come to the
maximum permissible value (Amax).
A
Vo
θ
P
V N002
N001
Decelerated to Vo
The formula of calculation of Amax is as follows:
M27 100 – N26

Amax = × 60 × 1000 × 100 (mm/msec2)
N25
11-12
OPTION 11
5. Precise vector interpolation
Although a very small line segment forms a very small block-to-block angle and thus provides
smooth interpolation, it may not become possible for optimal corner deceleration to be achieved.
This, however, becomes possible with a vectorial accuracy interpolation function since smoother
interpolation can be obtained.
(Precise vector interpolation is valid only for the geometry compensation function.)
If interpolation has been programmed, rough interpolation is performed prior to precise vector
interpolation.
Programmed path
Rough interpolation
After rough interpolation, precise vector interpolation is performed.
Precise vector interpolation
Rough
interpolation
As shown on the left, the programmed path may not be smooth,
Programmed path
11-13
11 OPTION
If this is the case, the velocity will be reduced and optimum corner deceleration will occur.
Rough interpolation
Programmed path
Reduction of the velocity moves the tool almost as programmed, thus allowing precise machining.
Precise vector
Rough interpolation interpolation
6. Accuracy coefficient
Under corner- and arc-machining commands, optimal corner deceleration and arc feed rate
limitation provide automatic deceleration to compensate for any errors in the accuracy of
machining. In that case, machining accuracy can be further improved by specifying an accuracy
coefficient in the program since further deceleration is achieved at corners and at arc sections.
Command format
Specifies the rate of reduction of the corner deceleration speed and the arc feed rate limitation
,K__
in percentage terms.
<Sample program 1>

N001 G61.1
N200 G1X_Y_,K30 If a corner deceleration command or an arc-interpolation command has been
N300 X_Y_ specified, machining will begin decelerating to 70% of the default value at
N400 ... this block onward.
<Sample program 2>

N001 G61.1
N200 G2I-10.,K30 Only this block is where machining decelerates to 70% of the default value.
N300 G1X10.,K0 The accuracy coefficient is cancelled for this block onward automatically.
N400 ...
The accuracy coefficient is cancelled automatically in the following cases:

- The case that the reset key is pressed
- The case that a shape offset cancellation command (G64) is issued
- The case that command code ,K0 is set
11-14
OPTION 11
Note 1: An accuracy coefficient cannot be specified in MAZATROL programs.
Note 2: If a value from 1 to 100 is specified as accuracy coefficient K in a program that includes
a corner deceleration command and an arc-interpolation command, the machining time
will increase, compared with its normal value.
7. Feed clamping for circular interpolation

Circular interpolation with a constant speed on the motion path requires the rate of feed on the
controlled axes concerned to be precisely changed in accordance with the change in the
tangential direction. The command speed can be obtained even in circular interpolation, indeed,
when the radius (R) of the arc is large enough with respect to the specified rate of feed (F). In the
case of a relatively small radius, however, the rate of feed is clamped in such a manner that the
acceleration (A) required for the circular path may not overstep the maximum permissible value
(Amax) for the pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration control.
F
F
θ
R
A
F
θ F
The formula of calculation of Amax is as follows:
M27 100 – N26

Amax = × 60 × 1000 × 100 (mm/msec2)
N25
11-2-3 Hold status

G61.1
Initial status Power on ×
Reset command M02, M30, M00, reset ×
Reset operation NC reset switch, external reset ×
Reset and initialize ×
Block interruption Mode change (auto/manual), feed hold #
Block stop Single block #
Emergency stop Emergency stop switch, external emergency stop #
NC alarm Servo alarm #
OT Hardware OT #
Emergency stop cancel Emergency stop switch, external emergency stop ×
#: No change ×: Cancel
11-15
11 OPTION
11-2-4 Notes
1. This feature works only under optional specifications for geometry compensation function. A
program error (Alarm 935 NO PRE-INTERP ACCEL/DECEL OPT.) will result if program-
ming is done using this feature under the standard specifications for usual machining.
2. Pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration is valid for the G61.1 command block onward.
3. The feedrate which has been set using command F is limited to the value obtained by the
following expression:
Maximum cutting feedrate M3 × Speed limit magnification L76
If the value that has thus been obtained is in excess of the rapid feedrate value of M1, the
M1 value will become the actual upper limit of feedrate.
4. See Subsection 11-2-6 for arc-machining speed limitation.
5. The geometry compensation function for a rotational axis is an additional option, other than
that mentioned in item 1 above.
11-2-5 Parameters
Parameters related to geometry compensation are listed below.
See the separate Parameter List/Alarm List/M-Code List for further details of the parameters.
Address Description
L74 Cutting feed rate for pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
L75 Cutting feed time constant for pre-interpolation acceleration/deceleration
L76 Speed limit magnification for geometry compensation function
L77 Angle for corner deceleration during optimum corner deceleration
F72 Selection of high-accuracy mode for the execution of MAZATROL programms
L129 Cutting feed time constant 1 for acceleration/deceleration filter
L130 Rapid traverse time constant 1 for acceleration/deceleration filter
L131 Cutting feed time constant 2 for acceleration/deceleration filter
L132 Rapid traverse time constant 2 for acceleration/deceleration filter
N29 Time constant for rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration filter
L73 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration filter 2
N4 Time constant for post-interpolation rapid traverse acceleration/deceleration filter
F96 bit 6 Type of speed control between blocks
F1 Corner deceleration coefficient, used for optimum deceleration at corners
F2 Coefficient for clamping the rate of feed in circular interpolation
J41 Number of the program to be called, used for M-code macroprogram call (M153)
J42 Number of the M-code for program call, used for M-code macroprogram call (M153)
J43 Type of program call, used for M-code macroprogram call (M153)
J45 Number of the program to be called, used for M-code macroprogram call (M154)
J46 Number of the M-code for program call, used for M-code macroprogram call (M154)
J47 Type of program call, used for M-code macroprogram call (M154)
S4 Feedforward gain
M27 Target speed for optimum acceleration control
N25 Time constant for optimum acceleration control
N26 Accuracy coefficient for optimum acceleration control
11-16
OPTION 11
11-2-6 Appendix
Appended data concerns theoretical values obtained from the conditions of commanded radius,
feedforward gain, etc. They may differ from measured values in actual machining depending on
cutting conditions, machine accuracy, etc. Apply it as a general criterion for test cuts and others.
1. Maximum feed rate in circular interpolation when geometry compensation function is valid
Maximum feed rate in circular interpolation when geometry compensation is valid can be
determined from the following equation.
α = F × ω........................................................ [1]
F
F = R × ω ....................................................... [2]
From equations [1] and [2]
R ω
L74/60
F= R×α = R× –3 × 60 ..... [3]
L75 × 10
F : maximum feed rate (mm/min)
R : Circle radius (mm)
L74 : Cutting feed rate (mm/min)
L75 : Cutting feed time constant
Each maximum feed rate in radius from equation [3] is
as follows:
Parameter L74 = 30000 (mm/min)
L75 = 400 (msec)
Maximum feed rate for circle radius
Radius (mm) 15 25 50 100 150
Maximum feed rate
8.216 10.607 15.000 21.213 25.981
(m/min)
2. Maximum feed rate to keep a geometry error within 10 µm in circular interpolation

Maximum feed rate obtained from a geometry error in circular interpolation can be determined
from the following equation.
A. When geometry compensation function is valid

∆R × R
3
F × 10 = 1 2 2 × 60 .............................. [4]
Tp (1 – Kf )
2
F : Maximum feed rate (m/min)
Tp : Position loop time constant (sec) (= 1/SV003)
Kf : Feedforward gain (= S4/100)
∆R : Geometry error (mm)
11-17
11 OPTION
B. When geometry compensation function is invalid

(In exponential acceleration/deceleration system)
∆R × R
3
F × 10 = 1 1 × 60 .............................. [5]
Tp2 + Ts 2
2 2
F : Maximum feed rate (m/min)
Tp : Position loop time constant (sec) (= 1/SV003)
Kf : Feedforward gain (= S5/100)
∆R : Geometry error (mm)
Each maximum feed rate within 10 µm in geometry error from equations [4] and [5] is as follows:
Radius (mm) 15 25 50 100 150

Geometry compensation
1.534 1.980 2.801 3.961 4.851
function valid (m/min)
Geometry compensation
0.911 1.177 1.664 2.353 2.882
function invalid (m/min)
Parameter SV003 = 33 (rad/s)

S4 = 70 (%)
N5 = 20 (msec)
∆R = 10 (µm)
3. Maximum cutting feed in circular interpolation when geometry compensation function is

available and geometry error (Theoretical value).
L74 3000 (mm/min)
L75 400 (msec)
Feedforward gain 0.7
Geometry error 0.01 (mm)
Time constant (G61.1) 0.4 (sec)
Position loop time constant 0.03 (sec)
Time constant (G64) 0.02 (sec)
Geometry compensation function valid Normal cutting mode

R (mm) Maximum feed 1 Error Maximum feed 2 Error Maximum feed
(m/min) (mm) (m/min) (mm) (m/min)
150 25.981 0.287 4.851 0.028 2.882
100 21.213 0.287 3.961 0.028 2.353
50 15.000 0.287 2.801 0.028 1.664
25 10.607 0.287 1.980 0.028 1.177
15 8.216 0.287 1.534 0.028 0.911
5 4.743 0.287 0.886 0.028 0.526
11-18
OPTION 11
L74 3000 (mm/min)
L75 400 (msec)

150 25.981 0.156 6.576 0.052 2.882
100 21.213 0.156 5.369 0.052 2.353
50 15.000 0.156 3.797 0.052 1.664
25 10.607 0.156 2.685 0.052 1.177
15 8.216 0.156 2.080 0.052 0.911
5 4.743 0.156 1.201 0.052 0.526
L74 3000 (mm/min)

L75 400 (msec)

150 25.981 0.011 24.556 0.726 2.882
100 21.213 0.011 20.050 0.726 2.353
50 15.000 0.011 14.178 0.726 1.664
25 10.607 0.011 10.025 0.726 1.177
15 8.216 0.011 7.765 0.726 0.911
5 4.743 0.011 4.483 0.726 0.526
Remark 1: - Maximum feed 1 when geometry compensation function is available represents

the maximum feed in circular interpolation.
- Maximum feed 2 when geometry compensation function is available represents
the maximum feed to keep a geometry error within 10 µm.
- Error when geometry compensation is available represents a geometry error at
the maximum feed 1.
Remark 2: - Maximum cutting feed in normal machining mode represents the maximum feed to
keep a geometry error within 10 µm.
- Error in normal machining mode represents a geometry error at the maximum
feed 2 when geometry compensation function is available.
Note: An increased feed forward gain causes a decreased geometry error. However, it
causes vibration to the machine, which may deteriorate the surface roughness of
cutting surface.
11-19
11 OPTION
11-3 Hard Disk Operating Function
11-3-1 Outline
With the hard disk (HD) operating function, any large-size EIA/ISO program pre-saved within a
special folder of the HD contained in the NC unit can be executed for automatic operation while
transferring that program to the NC memory.
11-3-2 Preparation for HD operation

To execute HD operation, it is required first to create a machining program and save it into a
special folder of the built-in HD. Create and then save (copy) the desired program into the folder
shown below by either the Explorer accompanying the Windows system, or another
commercially available software.
Folder for HD operation programs: C:\MC_Direct Mode Programs\
Prior to shipping from the factory, the reference folder for HD operation programs is preset as
shown above. It is possible to change the reference folder on the PROGRAM FILE display. For
changing procedure, see the section 6-6.
11-3-3 Selection of operation mode
1. Selection between HD and conventional TAPE operation modes

The HD operating function is provided as the alternative to the conventional TAPE operating
function. Use the following parameter to select between the provided operating functions as
required for actual operational conditions:
Name Program type

Address Description
Unit Setting range Conditions
TAPE mode selection – The operating function to be selected for the TAPE
operation mode.
0: Conventional TAPE operating function
F40
0, 1, 2, 3 Immediate 1: HD operating function
2: IC memory card operating function
3: Ethernet operating function
When the HD operating function is selected, the date and time display area will be used for the
indication of the special operation mode, as shown below, on the POSITION and TRACE
displays. The indication is not given, indeed, during selection of the MDI or a manual operation
mode nor during execution of a program stored in the NC memory.
Operation
mode
indication
The mode indication is highlighted on red background, as shown below, during actual HD
operation.
During
actual
operation
11-20
OPTION 11
2. HD operation modes
The HD operating function can be used in the following two modes:
1. Direct operation mode
A program stored on the HD operates as the main program.
2. Subprogram operation mode
A program stored on the HD is called up as the subprogram from a main program registered
in the NC memory.
Press the TAPE key to select the direct operation mode, and the MEMORY key to use the
subprogram operation mode of the HD operating function.
TAPE operation key MEMORY operation key
3. Restrictions concerning the HD operating function

General restrictions on the HD operation are as follows:
- Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the HD operation.
- Programs stored on the HD cannot be checked for tool path and machining shape on the
TOOL PATH display.
- Programs stored on the HD cannot be edited on the PROGRAM (EIA) display. Use a
commercially available editor capable of editing text files.
- The RESTART 2 NONMODAL menu function cannot be applied to a program stored on the
HD.
- Programs stored on the HD cannot be subjected to the external work number search.
Further particular restrictions for each HD operation mode are as follows:
For direct operation mode

- The HD main program cannot call another HD program as a subprogram. On a subprogram-
call command from the HD main program can only the NC memory be searched for, and an
alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
- An NC subprogram called up from the HD main program cannot call another HD program as
the further subroutine.
- An alarm will be caused if an “M99” command (used for return from subprogram) is given in the
HD main program.
11-21
11 OPTION
For subprogram operation mode

- The HD subprogram cannot call another HD program as a subprogram. On a further sub-
program-call command from the HD subprogram can only the NC memory be searched for,
and an alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
- Sequence number specification for subprogram call by “M98H∗∗” is not effective in calling up
an HD program. The HD subprogram is always executed from the beginning.
- Repeat time specification for subprogram call is not effective in calling up an HD program. The
HD subprogram is always executed only one time for one call command.
- The subprogram call from the NC main program preferably selects a program in the NC
memory to that on the HD in case the specified work number should have been assigned to the
both programs.
- With MAZATROL programs in the NC memory, use a subprogram unit or “G65” (non-modal
user macro call) in a manual-program unit for the HD subprogram operation mode.
11-3-4 Program selection for HD operation

This subsection describes the operating procedure for selecting the program in each mode for
HD operating function.

(1) Select the machine operating mode for the direct HD operation mode.
- Press the TAPE operation key .
(2) Select the POSITION display on the screen.
- This is required for selecting the program to be run and checking the operational status of
the machine.
(3) Specify the desired program stored on the HD.
- Proceed as follows to specify the program:
1) Press the [WORK No.] menu key.
The display of the menu item is reversed and the work-number listing window appears.
2) Select the desired program from among those stored on the HD.
To specify the program of work No. 100, for example:
Example 1: Press the keys 1 0 0 INPUT in this order.

Example 2: Press a cursor key to call up the cursor, move the cursor onto the
displayed work number “100” in the window, and then press the INPUT
key INPUT .
Carry out the above procedural steps, referred to as “HD work number search”, to start the direct
HD operation.
11-22
OPTION 11
(1) Select the machine operating mode for the subprogram operation mode.
- Press the MEMORY operation key .
the machine.
(3) Specify the desired main program stored in the NC memory.
- Select, or perform work number search for, an NC program (stored in the NC memory)
including the subprogram-call command for the desired HD program.
- The operational procedure required here is just the same as that for normal MEMORY
operation. No HD subprogram operation, however, takes place if the correct command for
calling the HD program is not given in the specified NC program.
11-3-5 Restart in the HD operation mode

The restart function is restricted for the HD operation as follows:
- The [RESTART 2 NONMODAL] menu function cannot be applied to an HD program.
- The restart function can be executed in the subprogram operation mode only when the
selected NC main program is of the EIA/ISO format.
The restarting procedure for the HD operation is also the same as that for normal automatic
operation. Refer to 1-2-2 in the Operating Manual, Part 4 “Automatic Operation”.
11-23
11 OPTION
11-3-6 Format for HD operation programs

The programs on the HD to be used for the HD operation must be of the text file format. Use a
commercially available text editor capable of editing text files to create the desired programs.
Note: Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the HD operation.
1. File name
Designate the file of a program to be stored on the HD for HD operation as directed below. The
file names here serve as the work numbers to be searched for in actual machine operation.
PROGRAM123456789.EIA
Extension
File name
File name Assign a work number.

- Any string of up to 32 characters can be used as a work number. For the use of
numerals only, however, the work number may be up to eight digits long (from 1 to
99999999).
- Characters available are letters (capital and small: A to Z and a to z), numerals, and
the following symbols:
“+” “–“ “_” and “.”
It should be noted here that no distinction is made between capital and small letters.
That is, a new program cannot be named “aBC” if a program with the name “ABC”
already exists in the storage area concerned. Moreover, the program name must
not begin with a period (.).
- The work number which is composed exclusively of numerals must begin with a
non-zero numeral. The leading zeros of the file name are always ignored, and thus
the NC unit cannot distinguish the following two names, for example, from one
another:
1234567.EIA
Both denote work number “1234567”.
01234567.EIA
Extension Identification of an EIA/ISO program

- All programs for the HD operation must have this extension assigned.
11-24
OPTION 11
Create HD operation programs in the following text file format:
- One program must be created for one text file.
- The program must not begin with an EOR code (%) since it is executed from the very first
block.
- Enter a line feed code (by pressing the return key) at the end of each block. A semicolon ‘;’must
not be used. An alarm will result if a semicolon is included in the program.
- Macro data cannot be used.
- Only characters listed in the table below may be used. Two-byte codes (such as normal-size
characters or uni-codes) are not admissible.
Type Usable characters Remarks

Alphabet - ‘A’ ~ ‘Z’ (Capitals only) - Only one-byte codes can be used.
Numeral - ‘0’ ~ ‘9’ - End of block is to be specified by CR (Carriage
Return) plus LF (Line Feed) or simply by LF.
- ‘$’ (Decimal point)
Symbol - ‘%’ (EOR)
- ‘(’, ‘)’ (Parentheses)
- Space code
Others
- Line feed code (EOB)
3. Example of programming
Programs for direct operation mode
O200 • The program must not begin with an EOR code (%)
G40 G80 G90 since it is executed from the very first block.
G28 X0 Y0 Z0
M30 • The program end code must be M30 or M02.

(M99 will cause an alarm.)
%
• Enter ‘%’ (EOR) at the end of the program.
Programs for subprogram operation mode
G28 X0 Y0 Z0
M99 • The end of program code must be M99.

% • Enter ‘%’ (EOR) at the end of the program.
11-25
11 OPTION
11-4 IC Memory Card Operating Function
11-4-1 Outline
With the IC Memory Card (abbreviated to CARD in this section) operating function, any large-
size EIA/ISO program pre-saved within a special folder of the CARD set into the slot on the front
of the NC operating panel can be executed for automatic operation while transferring that
program to the NC memory.
11-4-2 Preparation for CARD operation

To execute CARD operation, it is required first to create a machining program and save it into a
special folder of the CARD. Create and then save (copy) the desired program into the folder
shown below by either the Explorer accompanying the Windows system, or another
commercially available software.
Folder for CARD operation programs: \MCICPROG\
% Only use IC memory cards of the ATA specification. Failure to observe this instruction
could result in machine damage.
CAUTION
1. Selection between CARD and conventional TAPE operation modes

The CARD operating function is provided as the alternative to the conventional TAPE operating
Name Program type

Address Description
operation mode.
0: Conventional TAPE operating function
F40
2: CARD operating function
When the CARD operating function is selected, the date and time display area will be used for
the indication of the special operation mode, as shown below, on the POSITION and TRACE
Operation
mode
indication
11-26
OPTION 11
The mode indication is highlighted on red background, as shown below, during actual CARD
operation.
During
actual
operation
2. CARD operation modes

The CARD operating function can be used in the following two modes:
A program stored on the CARD operates as the main program.
A program stored on the CARD is called up as the subprogram from a main program
registered in the NC memory.
subprogram operation mode of the CARD operating function.
3. Restrictions concerning the CARD operating function

General restrictions on the CARD operation are as follows:
- Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the CARD operation.
- Programs stored on the CARD cannot be checked for tool path and machining shape on the
TOOL PATH display.
- Programs stored on the CARD cannot be edited on the PROGRAM (EIA) display. Use a
- Programs stored on the CARD cannot be presented on the EIA MONITOR display.
- The RESTART 2 NONMODAL menu function cannot be applied to a program stored on the
CARD.
- Programs stored on the CARD cannot be subjected to the external work number search.
Further particular restrictions for each CARD operation mode are as follows:

- The CARD main program cannot call another CARD program as a subprogram. On a
subprogram-call command from the CARD main program can only the NC memory be
searched for, and an alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
- An NC subprogram called up from the CARD main program cannot call another HD program as
the further subroutine.
11-27
11 OPTION
CARD main program.

- The CARD subprogram cannot call another CARD program as a subprogram. On a further
subprogram-call command from the CARD subprogram can only the NC memory be searched
for, and an alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
- Sequence number specification for subprogram call by “M98H∗∗” is not effective in calling up a
CARD program. The CARD subprogram is always executed from the beginning.
- Repeat time specification for subprogram call is not effective in calling up a CARD program.
The CARD subprogram is always executed only one time for one call command.
memory to that on the CARD in case the specified work number should have been assigned to
the both programs.
user macro call) in a manual-program unit for the CARD subprogram operation mode.
11-4-4 Program selection for CARD operation

CARD operating function.

(1) Select the machine operating mode for the direct CARD operation mode.

the machine.
(3) Specify the desired program stored on the CARD.
2) Select the desired program from among those stored on the CARD.

key INPUT .
Carry out the above procedural steps, referred to as “CARD work number search”, to start the
direct CARD operation.
11-28
OPTION 11
the machine.
including the subprogram-call command for the desired CARD program.
operation. No CARD subprogram operation, however, takes place if the correct command
for calling the CARD program is not given in the specified NC program.
11-4-5 Restart in the CARD operation mode

The restart function is restricted for the CARD operation as follows:
- The [RESTART 2 NONMODAL] menu function cannot be applied to a CARD program.
The restarting procedure for the CARD operation is also the same as that for normal automatic
11-4-6 Format for CARD operation programs

The programs on the CARD to be used for the HD operation must be of the text file format. Use a
commercially available text editor capable of editing text files to create the desired programs.
Note: Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the CARD operation.
11-29
11 OPTION
1. File name
Designate the file of a program to be stored on the CARD for CARD operation as directed below.
The file names here serve as the work numbers to be searched for in actual machine operation.
Extension
File name

99999999).
“+” “–“ “_” and “.”
another:
1234567.EIA
01234567.EIA

- All programs for the CARD operation must have this extension assigned.
Create CARD operation programs in the following text file format:
block.
- Enter a line feed code (by pressing the return key) at the end of each block. A semicolon ‘;’
must not be used. An alarm will result if a semicolon is included in the program.

Alphabet - ‘A’ ~ ’Z’ (Capitals only) - Only one-byte codes can be used.
Numeral - ‘0’ ~ ’9’ - End of block is to be specified by CR (Carriage
- ‘(’, ’)’ (Parentheses)
- Space code
Others
11-30
OPTION 11
G28 X0 Y0 Z0

%
G28 X0 Y0 Z0

11-31
11 OPTION
11-5 Ethernet Operating Function
11-5-1 Outline
With the Ethernet (abbreviated to ENET in this section) operating function, any large-size
EIA/ISO program pre-saved within the host computer can be executed for automatic operation
while transferring that program to the NC memory under an Ethernet-based network
environment.
11-5-2 Preparation for ENET operation

To execute Ethernet operation, it is required first to connect the NC unit and the host computer
through an Ethernet cable in order to store the machining program in the host computer. The
LAN connector is located on the rear side of the NC unit. Ask the supervisor of the network in
your company for more information on the connecting procedure.
To prepare the NC for referring to the folder concerned in the host computer, carry out the
following operations on the POSITION display:
(1) Select [Ethernet Running Folder] from [Setup] on the menu bar.
(2) Set the name of the reference folder in the dialogue box which appears upon step (1).
- Click [BROWSE] to display the tree of the available folders, and select an item under the
host computer if it is to be set as a folder name.

11-32
OPTION 11
% Only use a LAN card recommended by MAZAK.
CAUTION
1. Selection between ENET and conventional TAPE operation modes

The ENET operating function is provided as the alternative to the conventional TAPE operating
Name Program type

Address Description
operation mode.
F40 0: Conventional TAPE operating function

2: IC memory card operating function
When the ENET operating function is selected, the date and time display area will be used for
the indication of the special operation mode, as shown below, on the POSITION and TRACE
Operation
mode
indication
The mode indication is highlighted on red background, as shown below, during actual ENET
operation.
During
actual
operation
2. ENET operation modes

The ENET operating function can be used in the following two modes:
A program stored in the host computer operates as the main program.
A program stored in the host computer is called up as the subprogram from a main program
registered in the NC memory.
11-33
11 OPTION
subprogram operation mode of the ENET operating function.
3. Restrictions concerning the ENET operating function

General restrictions on the ENET operation are as follows:
- Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the ENET operation.
- Programs stored in the host computer cannot be checked for tool path and machining shape on
the TOOL PATH display.
- Programs stored in the host computer cannot be edited on the PROGRAM (EIA) display. Use a
- The [RESTART 2 NONMODAL] menu function cannot be applied to a program stored in the
host computer.
- Programs stored in the host computer cannot be subjected to the external work number search.
- Machine operation may sometimes break off in consequence of a retardation of data transfer
due to the particular performance of the host computer and communication conditions. It is
recommended, therefore, to connect the NC and the host computer one to one for high-speed
machining by micro-segmental command blocks.
Further particular restrictions for each ENET operation mode are as follows:

- The ENET main program cannot call another ENET program as a subprogram. On a
subprogram-call command from the ENET main program can only the NC memory be
searched for, and an alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
- An NC subprogram called up from the ENET main program cannot call another ENET program
as the further subroutine.
ENET main program.

- The ENET subprogram cannot call another ENET program as a subprogram. On a further
subprogram-call command from the ENET subprogram can only the NC memory be searched
for, and an alarm will be given if the specified program is not found there.
- Sequence number specification for subprogram call by “M98H∗∗” is not effective in calling up
an ENET program. The ENET subprogram is always executed from the beginning.
- Repeat time specification for subprogram call is not effective in calling up an ENET program.
The ENET subprogram is always executed only one time for one call command.
11-34
OPTION 11
memory to that in the host computer in case the specified work number should have been
assigned to the both programs.
user macro call) in a manual-program unit for the ENET subprogram operation mode.
11-5-4 Program selection for ENET operation

ENET operating function.

(1) Select the machine operating mode for the direct ENET operation mode.

the machine.
(3) Specify the desired program stored in the host computer.
2) Select the desired program from among those stored in the host computer.

key INPUT .
Carry out the above procedural steps, referred to as “Ethernet work number search”, to start the
direct ENET operation.

the machine.
including the subprogram-call command for the desired ENET program.
operation. No ENET subprogram operation, however, takes place if the correct command
for calling the ENET program is not given in the specified NC program.
11-35
11 OPTION
11-5-5 Restart in the ENET operation mode

The restart function is restricted for the ENET operation as follows:
- The [RESTART 2 NONMODAL] menu function cannot be applied to an ENET program.
The restarting procedure for the ENET operation is also the same as that for normal automatic
11-5-6 Format for ENET operation programs

The programs in the host computer to be used for the ENET operation must be of the text file
format. Use a commercially available text editor capable of editing text files to create the desired
programs.
Note: Only programs of the EIA/ISO format can be used for the ENET operation.
1. File name
Designate the file of a program to be stored in the host computer for ENET operation as directed
below. The file names here serve as the work numbers to be searched for in actual machine
operation.
Extension
File name

99999999).
“+” “–“ “_” and “.”
another:
1234567.EIA
01234567.EIA

- All programs for the ENET operation must have this extension assigned.
11-36
OPTION 11
Create ENET operation programs in the following text file format:
block.
- Enter a line feed code (by pressing the return key) at the end of each block. A semicolon ‘;’must
not be used. An alarm will result if a semicolon is included in the program.

Alphabet - ‘A’ ~ ‘Z’ (Capitals only) - Only one-byte codes can be used.
Numeral - ‘0’ ~ ‘9’ - End of block is to be specified by CR (Carriage
- ‘(’, ‘)’ (Parentheses)
- Space code
Others
G28 X0 Y0 Z0

%
G28 X0 Y0 Z0

11-37
11 OPTION
11-6 Inch/Metric Unit System Change Simplifying Function
11-6-1 Outline
Conventionally the change in unit system (inch/metric) of dimensional and feed data input has
required the corresponding modification of the related parameters, cutting conditions, etc.
The newly developed function allows an easy change in unit system, without having to be
supported by the above modifications, in order that MAZATROL or EIA/ISO programs prepared
in reference to machining drawings different in unit system (inch/metric) shall immediately be run
on the machine.
There are two methods available to change the unit system (inch/metric) of data input.
1. Use of the preparatory functions concerned (Power off/on not required)
- G20: Dimensional data input in inches
- G21: Dimensional data input in millimeters
This method changes the unit of coordinate data input, but does not have any influence
upon the data internally processed.
Angle commands, however, are always given in degrees, irrespective of the modal G-
function.
2. Setting the parameter concerned (Power off/on required)
- F91 bit 4 = 1: Inch system
= 0: Metric system
G20 and G21 are respectively modal when bit 4 of the F91 parameter is set to “1” and “0”.
This method not only changes the unit of coordinate data input, but also accordingly
converts the data displayed on the screen or internally processed.
Angle commands, however, are always given in degrees, irrespective of the parameter
setting.
3. Menu-based selection (Not requiring power off/on)
The display mode and an inch/metric input unit system on the TOOL DATA and TOOL
OFFSET displays can be selected using the menu keys.
- When bit 4 of parameter F91 = 0 (metric system), selection of [INCH MODE] displays the
menu item in reverse mode and the display mode as well as the input unit system change
from metric to inch.
- When bit 4 of parameter F91 = 1 (inch system), selection of [METRIC MODE] displays the
menu item in reverse mode and the display mode as well as the input unit system change
from inch to metric.
Automatic modification of various types of data with the present function, therefore, only refers to
the setting of the above parameter (bit 4 of F91).
For input of tool data different in inch/metric unit system, the selection can be immediately made
using the TOOL DATA and TOOL OFFSET display menus.
4. Selection of a unit system on the POSITION display

When bit 1 of parameter F82 is set to “1” (inch/metric display selection valid), the unit of data
representation on the POSITION display is automatically selected according to the
particular modal command code (G20 or G21).
11-38
OPTION 11
11-6-2 Data concerned
Except for programs, the unit system change function acts upon the following two types of data:
1. Variable data (on the displays PARAMETER, WORK OFFSET, CUTTING CONDITION,
CUTTING CONDITION LEARN and ADDITIONAL WPC)
Variable data are preset in both inch and metric units prior to shipping. The modification of a
preset value in one unit system cannot be supported by an automatic modification of the
corresponding data in the other. Manually modify the data concerned, therefore, as required
to effectively use the unit system change function.
2. Characteristic data (on the displays TOOL DATA, TOOL FILE, TOOL OFFSET, HEAD
OFFSET, and the JIG OFFSET data on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display)
Independently of the present function, characteristic data are automatically converted into
values appropriate to the unit system currently selected. No manual modification of
characteristic data, therefore, is required for the present function.
The present function does not refer to any data other than the above.
Note: The data items on the displays MACHINING NAVIGATION – PREDICTION and
RESULT cannot directly be influenced by the present function since they are only
obtained by a tool path checking or an automatic operation of the program concerned.
11-6-3 Operating procedure
1. Parameter-based selection
(1) Change bit 4 of parameter F91 from “1” (Inch system) to “0” (Metric system), or reversely.
(2) Turn off the NC unit and then turn it back on.
! The corresponding data will be automatically converted into values appropriate to the
unit system currently selected.
2. Menu-based selection
(1) Select the [INCH MODE] or [METRIC MODE] menu item.
! When [INCH MODE] is selected, the [INCH MODE] changes to reverse display mode
and the unit of data representation on the display changes from millimeters to inches.
When [METRIC MODE] is selected, the [METRIC MODE] changes to reverse display
mode and the unit of data representation on the display changes from inches to
millimeters.
(2) When the menu is displayed in reverse mode, enter data in the selected unit.
Note: Selection with the menu cannot be made if bit 1 of parameter F82 is set to “0”
(inch/metric display selection invalid).
11-39
11 OPTION
11-6-4 Internal management of data

1. Variable data (on the displays PARAMETER, WORK OFFSET, CUTTING CONDITION,
CUTTING CONDITION LEARN and ADDITIONAL WPC)
The NC unit has two storage areas provided for variable data: area of “inch data and metric
data for saving” and that of “data being used”. The latter is updated according to the
particular setting of the parameter concerned as follows:
Power off: The “data being used” are automatically saved onto the storage area of “inch or
metric data for saving” according to the value in bit 4 of parameter F91.
Power back on: The “inch or metric data for saving” are automatically copied onto the area
of “data being used” according to the value in bit 4 of parameter F91.
2. Characteristic data (on the displays TOOL DATA, TOOL FILE, TOOL OFFSET, HEAD
OFFSET, and the JIG OFFSET data on the PALLET MANAGEMENT display)
The NC unit has one set of characteristic data described in millimeters, and, upon turning-
on the power, provides the data as they are, or converts them into values appropriate to
inch system, according to the setting in bit 4 of parameter F91.
11-40
OPTION 11
11-7 DYNAMIC OFFSET Display

Function:
Setting eight reference dynamic offsets (for G54.2P1 to G54.2P8) for dynamic offset ΙΙ in the
EIA/ISO program.
11-7-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
[1] [3] [5] [7]
[2] [4] [6] [8] [9]
D740S3057E
11-41
11 OPTION

Distance of each axis from the table rotation center specified as a
workpiece coordinate offset to the workpiece zero-point specified in the
X, Y, Z mm (in.)
machining program with G54.2P1 (deviation offset between the table
[1] rotation center and the workpiece to be machined)
The machine coordinates of rotational axes A and C when the above
A, C degrees
distance in the case of the above G54.2P1 program is set
X, Y, Z mm (in.)
[2]
rotation center and the workpiece to be machined)
A, C degrees
X, Y, Z mm (in.)
[3]
A, C degrees
X, Y, Z mm (in.)
[4]
A, C degrees
X, Y, Z mm (in.)
[5]
A, C degrees
X, Y, Z mm (in.)
[6]
A, C degrees
X, Y, Z mm (in.)
[7]
A, C degrees
X, Y, Z mm (in.)
[8]
A, C degrees
X, Y, Z mm (in.) The same as the MACHINE item on the POSITION display.
[9]
A, C degrees See Section 4-1 for more information.
11-42
OPTION 11
The following data can be registered in the DYNAMIC OFFSET display:
1. Reference dynamic offset data (items [1] - [8]) for dynamic offset ΙΙ using G54.2P1 - G54.2P8
The reference dynamic offset data refers to the amount of offset from the table rotation center in
the machine coordinate system to the zero-point of the workpiece to be machined.
Specify the machine-characteristic table rotation center in the machine coordinate system at the
zero-point of the workpiece coordinate system such as G54.
When the G54.2P1 command is further issued in the specified workpiece coordinate system, the
deviation vector will always be calculated from the reference dynamic offset data for the table
movement, and the coordinates of the ending point will be offset.
Mounted here
Offset of workpiece zero-point

(in G54, etc.)
Machine zero-point
D735S1101
[Legend]]
W1: The ideal workpiece mounting position (the workpiece zero-point set on to the table rotation center)
W1’: The actual workpiece mounting position (vector Gs denotes the deviation from the ideal position)
W2’: The position of the actual workpiece W1’ after a table rotation by θ
W2: The position of the ideally mounted workpiece W1 after a table rotation by θ
Wo: The origin of workpiece coordinates (given by a corresponding preparatory function, such as G54)
Gs: The reference deviation vector (to be registered in the NC unit as a reference dynamic offset.)
G: The deviation vector for the rotation of the rotational axis by θ
a (a1, a1’): The starting point of the G1 (linear interpolation) microsegment command
b (b1, b2’): The ending point of the G1 (linear interpolation) microsegment command
11-43
11 OPTION
2. Specifying the reference dynamic offset

Measure the reference dynamic offset from the table rotation center (specified as an offset of the
workpiece coordinate system such as G54) to the zero-point of the workpiece to be machined,
and set the measured value as X, Y, Z coordinates. Also, set the A- and C-axial machine
coordinates obtained at that time.
(1) Move the cursor to the position of the desired axis in the workpiece coordinate system to be
established.
- After calling up the cursor on the display by pressing any cursor key, move the cursor to
the position of the axis for which the reference dynamic offset data is to be set.
(2) Enter offset data.
- Enter known data with the numeric keys, and press the INPUT key.
(3) Similarly, assign offset data to all other axes by repeating steps (1) and (2) above.
11-44 E
DISPLAYS RELATED TO SIMULATION 12
12 DISPLAYS RELATED TO SIMULATION
12-1 Tool Model Setting Display

Function:
Allows the registration of shape data for the tool and holder prepared in the magazine and the
setting of data required for INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD and Virtual Machining simulations.
Remarks:
- To show this display, position the cursor on the TOOL MODEL item in the TOOL DATA display
and press the [MODEL EDIT] menu key.
- If the tool model is not set, simulation will occur using a simple model that is based on the tool
data setting.
12-1-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
<Parametric tool model>
[1] [3]
[2]
[4]
D740S3058E
H740S3M040E
H735S3G015J 12-1
<Rotation tool model>
[1] [5]
[2]
[6]
D740S3059E
- Example of model creation
D740S3060
[1] TOOL TYPE — Type of the tool

[2] TOOL MODEL NAME — Name of the tool model
[3] Diagrammatic view — Diagrammatic view of the selected tool model type
MODEL DEFINITION mm (in.) Numeric data (of length and angle) of shape elements of the tool
[4]
(in parameters) degrees
[5] Graphic display — Graphical representation of the input data
MODEL DEFINITION mm (in.) Numeric data for describing the tool shape in line segments and arcs
[6]
(in shape elements) degrees
12-2
3. Data registration
The procedure of data registration is as follows.
(1) Position the cursor on the TOOL MODEL item in the TOOL DATA display and press the
[MODEL SELECT] menu key.
2. Menu selection 1. Positioning the cursor
(2) To create a new tool model, name the model in the TOOL MODEL NAME field.
(3) Select the tool model setting method.
1 2
No. Menu item Function
1 PARM. MODEL Sets the tool shape based on the supplied parametric models.
2 ROTARY TOOL MODEL Sets the tool model by rotating the tool’s half profile drawn in line segments and arcs.
12-3
A. PARAM. MODEL
(1) Select the desired model type. Be sure to select one that is most similar to the shape of the
tool in question.
(2) Set parameters according to the diagrammatic view of the selected tool model.
B. ROTARY TOOL MODEL

Select this method to draw tool shapes not included in the supplied parametric tool models.
Select [ROTARY TOOL MODEL] to draw a half profile of the tool in continuous lines (linear and
circular segments) to be rotated by one turn. This method is useful for drawing milling tools.
<Menu functions>
No. Menu item Function
1 INCRMENT INPUT Press the menu key (to highlight the menu item) for incremental data input.
2 LINE Used to set the pattern (PTN) of the shape element as linear.
3 CW ARC Used to set the pattern (PTN) of the shape element as circular and clockwise.
4 CCW ARC Used to set the pattern (PTN) of the shape element as circular and counterclockwise.
Press the menu key (to highlight the menu item) and then press the INPUT key to
5 INSERT
insert a new line above the one marked with the cursor.
Press the menu key (to highlight the menu item) and then press the INPUT key to
6 ERASE
delete the line marked with the cursor.
Used to set the “cutter” attribute to an element of the tool shape. "Cutter" elements are
7 CUTTER
identified as the blade for cutting.
Used to set the “shank” attribute to an element of the tool shape. It will be judged as
8 SHANK
interference if a “shank” element hits the workpiece.
Used to set the “holder” attribute to an element of the tool shape. It will be judged as
9 HOLDER
interference if a “holder” element hits the workpiece.
12-4
4. Copying data
Follow the procedure below to create a new tool model by modifying an existing one.
(1) Position the cursor on the TOOL MODEL item in the TOOL DATA display, press the
[MODEL SELECT] menu key, select the desired model in the resulting window and press
the [MODEL COPY] menu key.
カーソルを合わせます。
3. Selecting the model

to be copied
4. Selecting [MODEL
COPY]
2. Selecting [MODEL 1. Positioning the cursor

SELECT]
(2) Set in the resulting window the name under which the selected model is to be copied, and
finally click the [OK] button with the mouse, or press the INPUT key INPUT , to complete the
copying procedure.
12-5
5. Deleting data
Follow the procedure below to delete the existing data.
(1) Position the cursor on the TOOL MODEL item in the TOOL DATA display, press the
[MODEL SELECT] menu key, select the desired model in the resulting window and press
the [MODEL ERASE] menu key.
3. Selecting the model

to be deleted
4. Selecting [MODEL
ERASE]
2. Selecting [MODEL 1. Positioning the cursor

SELECT]
! A delete confirmation window appears on the screen.

(2) Press the INPUT key INPUT , or click the [OK] button with the mouse.
- To cancel the deletion, press the [MODEL ERASE] menu key to clear the menu item of
highlighting.
6. If tool model is not set
If the tool model is not set, a simple model shape will be applied. The simple model shape is
determined based on the tool data and parameter settings.
12-6
12-2 INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD
1. Outline
In manual mode of operation, this function checks in advance machine actions for interference
on the basis of the models of the tool, the fixtures, and other machine components, and the
commanded amount of movement. If it judges that a machine component interferes with the tool,
it immediately displays a warning message and stops the axis movement.
2. Interference check
Setting a manual operation mode enables the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function.
A. Work number selection

Select the work number of the program for which to perform setup operation.
Selecting a work number reads the models concerned of material, fixture and tool.
The material model and fixture model must be set in the 3D SETUP display. For details, refer to
Section 12-4.
B. Machine interference check mode

To enable the machine interference check mode, set a manual operation mode (for rapid
traverse, zero point return, cutting feed, or handle feed). The check mode is disabled in other
than these manual operation modes.
During manual interruption in the automatic mode of operation as well as in manual mode for
step feed, the machine interference check mode is disabled with the corresponding massage
(INVALID SHIELD) displayed on the screen.
In the initial state of the machine interference check mode all of the interference check menu
items ([CHECK MACHINE INTER.], [CHECK MATERIAL INTER.], [CHECK FIXTURE INTER.],
and [CHECK TOOL INTER.]) are highlighted. Interference check is executed for each model for
which the menu item is highlighted.
CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK
MACHINE MATERIAL FIXTURE TOOL
INTER. INTER. INTER. INTER.
If it is judged that interference occurs, an alarm message of the format INTERFERE <HEAD*>
<PALLET*> will appear with the movement of all axes stopped. However, the spindle will not
stop.
* denotes the model that caused interference.
Use the RESET key to clear the alarm.
Note: If the barrier function is enabled, the axis movement will also be stopped by the check
function in the case of interference with the barrier around the components.
C. Cancellation of interference check mode

The machine interference check mode can be cancelled in a manual operation mode so as to
allow the workpiece or fixture to be machined or formed, as well as the TEACH function to be
used for tool tip measurement.
With the POSITION display on the screen in the manual mode of operation, press the menu
selector key to call up the menu page for interference check functions.
12-7
<Interference check menu>

CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK 3D
MACHINE MATERIAL FIXTURE TOOL MONITOR
1 2 3 4
1. CHECK MACHINE INTER.

Select this menu function, or highlight this menu item, by pressing the corresponding menu
key to enable the machine interference check mode. The selection of this item causes the
other functions ([CHECK MATERIAL INTER.], [CHECK FIXTURE INTER.], and [CHECK
TOOL INTER.]) to be automatically selected.
Cancel this menu function, or clear the highlighting of this menu item, by pressing the
corresponding menu key to disable the machine interference check mode. The cancellation
of this function causes the other functions ([CHECK MATERIAL INTER.], [CHECK
FIXTURE INTER.], and [CHECK TOOL INTER.]) to be automatically cancelled.
2. CHECK MATERIAL INTER.
key to enable the interference check mode in particular for the material model.
corresponding menu key to disable the interference check mode for the material model.
3. CHECK FIXTURE INTER.
key to enable the interference check mode in particular for the fixture model.
corresponding menu key to disable the interference check mode for the fixture model.
4. CHECK TOOL INTER.
key to enable the interference check mode in particular for the tool model.
corresponding menu key to disable the interference check mode for the tool model.
Note 1: The above menu functions cannot be selected or cancelled during axis movement.
Note 2: The selection of the [CHECK MATERIAL INTER.], [CHECK FIXTURE INTER.], and
[CHECK TOOL INTER.] menu functions is conditioned on the selection of the [CHECK
MATERIAL INTER.] item.
12-8
D. Interference check
Setting a manual operation mode also sets the machine interference check mode.
In the machine interference check mode, the NC reads ahead the tool position moved through
the interference check distance (which is set by a parameter) to execute an interference check.
If the NC judges that interference does not occur, it allows the axis movement to be performed to
that read-ahead position.
Read-ahead position Current popsition
Interference
check distance
D740S3088
If the NC judges that interference occurs, it causes the axis movement to decelerate and stop
immediately.
Interference
foreseen
Movement during
deceleration
D740S3089
Note: In the machine interference check mode, the axis movement speed will be clamped
according to the interference check distance. However, the clamping speed for manual
rapid traverse will be applied if it is slower.
12-9
E. Two-phase interference check

The INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD function carries out an interference check in two phases.
The axis movement speed is fast in the first phase and slow in the second phase.
Stopped in the second

interference check phase
Checked at the first-
phase interference
check distance
Movement by checking at
the second-phase inter-
ference check distance
D740S3090
- First interference check phase

In the first interference check phase, the axis movement speed is clamped so that an inter-
ference check occurs at the first-phase interference check distance (set in a parameter).
If it is judged that interference occurs in the first interference check phase, the alarm message
INTERFERE (in blue) appears and the axis movement stops.
When the axis movement is started again, an interference check will then occur at the second-
phase interference check distance (set in a parameter).
Note 1: Press the CANCEL key to clear the blue alarm.
Note 2: Pressing the RESET key causes the NC to return to the first-phase interference
check.
- Second interference check phase
In the second interference check phase, the axis movement speed is clamped so that an
interference check occurs at the second-phase interference check distance (set in a
parameter).
If it is judged that interference occurs in the second interference check phase, the alarm
message INTERFERE (in red) appears and the axis movement stops.
Pressing the RESET key in the second interference check phase causes the NC to return to
the first-phase interference check.
F. Restrictions on interference check

- The machine interference check function is disabled in the automatic operation mode (Memory
or Tape), MDI mode, during manual interruption in the automatic mode of operation as well as
in manual mode for step feed.
- Interference check does not occur for the operation of the parts catcher and pallet changer.
12-10
- In case the models are too complicated for the NC to execute an interference check, the alarm
message INTERFERE CHECK DATA OVERLOAD appears (at the work number selection or
model setting) and the axis movement stops (but the spindle will not stop). If this occurs, press
the RESET key and then take the following measures:
[1] Use a simple tool model,
[2] Use a simple material or fixture model. Alternatively, cancel the check function concerned
([CHECK MATERIAL INTER.] or [CHECK FIXTURE INTER.]).
- The target can be passed over, without causing an interference alarm, during movement
through the interference check distance. Set the interference check distance to the smallest
possible value.
Next position
Current position
Interference
check distance
Fixture or another
component
D740S0274
- The machine interference check function is not enabled till completion of the initial zero-point
return after power on.
- The model data will be updated if the material information, setup information, and/or tool data
are changed. The interference check function is disabled (with the message INVALID SHIELD
displayed) while the model data is updated. Do not attempt axis movements until the update of
the model data is completed.
- If it is judged that interference occurs in the manual mode of handle feed, the manual pulse
handle will be ineffective for 3 seconds after stoppage.
- Do not change the axis selector switch setting while operating the manual pulse handle. Doing
so may prevent correct interference check.
- If there is a clearance between the material model and the fixture model, or between the
blade/shank element and the holder of the tool model (see the figure below), the target will not
be detected if it is located in the clearance range. Be sure to create models correctly.
No interference is detected in this improper

clearance between the blade/shank element
and the holder of the tool model.
D740S3061
12-11
12-3 3D MONITOR Display
Function:
- Displays the machine, material, fixture, and tool models real-time so that the actual positional
relationship among the machine components can be grasped.
- If interference is judged to occur by the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD, the portion causing
the interference will be highlighted.
If a machine interference is foreseen by the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD (function to check
the machine interference in manual mode of operation), the portion causing the interference will
be highlighted.
In the first interference check phase, the interfering portion will be shown in yellow.
In the second interference check phase, the interfering portion will be shown in red.
Note 1: The material model remains as created and cannot be cut.

Note 2: The POSITION display will appear if the operation mode is changed to other than
manual operation modes.
Note 3: Even if the interfering portion is shown in red, no actual collision has yet occurred.
12-3-1 Data display
1. Displayed data
<With positional information based on the machine coordinate system>
[1]
[2] [5]
[3]
D740S3062E
12-12
<With positional information based on the workpiece coordinate system>
[1]
[2] [5]
[4]
D740S3063E
[1] WNo. — Work number of the program currently selected
[2] TNo. — Number and name of the tool mounted in the milling spindle
mm (in.)
[3] MACHINE Positional information based on the machine coordinate system
degrees
mm (in.)
[4] POSITION Positional information based on the workpiece coordinate system
degrees
Graphical representation of the machine, tool, material, and fixture

[5] Graphic display —
models
12-13
12-3-2 3D monitor menu

The 3D MONITOR display provides the following menus.
VIEW VIEW ZOOM ROTATION MOVE INTERF. POSITION POSITION

CANCEL CHANGE IN/OUT SETTING DISP
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK POSITION
MACHINE MATERIAL FIXTURE TOOL
8 9 10 11
1. VIEW CANCEL
To hide component models selectively, press the [VIEW CANCEL] menu key to open the
following window.
Position the cursor on the name of the component model to be hidden and then press the
CANCEL key. This removes the light-blue background of the model name, indicating that
the component is hidden in the 3-D model display. To show a hidden component anew,
select the component with the cursor and press the INPUT key INPUT .
2. VIEW CHANGE
To change the viewpoint of the 3-D model display section, press the [VIEW CHANGE]
menu key to open the following window.
Position the cursor on the desired viewpoint and press the INPUT key INPUT .
3. ZOOM IN/OUT
Press the [ZOOM IN/OUT] menu key and use the cursor keys as follows:
to enlarge the model view.
to reduce the model view.
12-14
4. ROTATION
Press the [ROTATION] menu key and use the cursor keys as follows:
to rotate the model around the horizontal axis in the normal direction.
to rotate the model around the horizontal axis in reverse direction.
to rotate the model normally around the axis perpendicular to the table surface.
to rotate the model in reverse around the axis perpendicular to the table surface.
5. MOVE
Press the [MOVE] menu key and use the cursor keys as follows:
to move (translate) the model upward.
to move (translate) the model downward.
to move (translate) the model leftward.
to move (translate) the model rightward.
6. INTERF. SETTING
Press the [INTERF. SETTING] menu key to enable or disable the interference check
function for each component of the machine model.
7. POSITION DISP
Used to select the reference for the digital indication of the current position: machine origin
or workpiece origin.
8. CHECK MACHINE INTER.
Select the [CHECK MACHINE INTER.] menu function, or highlight the menu item, to enable
the machine interference check mode.
9. CHECK MATERIAL INTER.
Select the [CHECK MATERIAL INTER.] menu function, or highlight the menu item, to
enable the interference check mode in particular for the material model.
10. CHECK FIXTURE INTER.
Select the [CHECK FIXTURE INTER.] menu function, or highlight the menu item, to enable
the interference check mode in particular for the fixture model.
11. CHECK TOOL INTER.
Select the [CHECK TOOL INTER.] menu function, or highlight the menu item, to enable the
interference check mode in particular for the tool model.
Note: The results from the operations with the menu functions VIEW CHANGE, ZOOM
IN/OUT, ROTATION and MOVE are not retained, and the initial viewing conditions will
be restored next time the 3D MONITOR display is called up.
When the interference check function (INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD) is disabled in manual
mode of operation, the corresponding warning message (INVALID SHIELD) is displayed on the
following displays:
- POSITION display
- TRACE display
- EIA MONITOR display
- MACHINING - MONITORING display
- 3D MONITOR display
12-15
12-4 3D SETUP Display
Function:
- Used to set the material and fixture models to be used in the INTELLIGENT SAFETY SHIELD
and Virtual Machining functions.
- The use of parametric models and CAD models enables more accurate interference checks.
12-4-1 3D SETUP display
1. Displayed data
[2]
[1]
D740S3064E
3D shape tree display

[1] — Current arrangement of the 3D models
section
[2] Graphic display — Graphical representation of the 3D models
12-16
12-4-2 3D setup initial menu
The 3D SETUP display provides the following initial menu:
WORKPCE FIXTURE LOCATE
MATERIAL
SETUP SETUP MANUALLY
1 2 3
<Menu functions>
1. WORKPCE MATERIAL SETUP
Select this item to set the shape of the material model.
2. FIXTURE SETUP
Select this item to set the shape of the fixture model.
3. LOCATE MANUALLY
Select this item to locate and arrange the material and fixture models.
12-4-3 3D setup functions

The 3D SETUP display is used for the following three settings:
- Material model setting
- Fixture model setting
- Arrangement of the material and fixture models
1. Model setting methods

The model types and setting methods available for the programming types are as follows.
": Available —: Unavailable
Material model Fixture model
PARAMETER
3D SETUP display 3D SETUP display
display
Parametric
Parametric model CAD model Table CAD model
model
MAZATROL - WPC
" " " " "
Initial-point scheme
EIA/ISO " " " " "
12-17
2. Material model
A. Parametric model
Set simple material models by giving dimensions to the basic shapes. The following nine types of
material shape are available. The setting procedure is detailed under 2 in Subsection 12-4-4.
ROUND SQUARE HEXAGON
SQUARE PIPE L-TYPE BLOCK SQUARE (POCKET)
SQUARE (SLOT) SQUARE (SQUARE BOSS) SQUARE (LONG BOSS)
B. CAD model
CAD data can be imported as a material model. The setting procedure is detailed under 3 in
Subsection 12-4-4.
3. Fixture model
A. Table model
The table model is set according to the parameter settings concerned.
12-18
B. Parametric model
Set simple fixture models by giving dimensions to the basic shapes. The following 23 types of
fixture shape are available. The setting procedure is detailed under 2 in Subsection 12-4-5.
LOCATING BLOCK
MULTI BLOCK (LARGE) MULTI BLOCK (SMALL) SUPPORT BLOCK
(SQUARE)
WORK GRIPPER (OD) WORK GRIPPER (ID) PALLET PALLET (H-MC)
LOCATING BLOCK
VISE SWING CLAMP UNIVERSAL CLAMP
(ROUND)
CENTER CLAMP FIXTURE BASE FIXTURE BASE (H-MC) ANGLE PLATE (2 SIDES)
ANGLE PLATE (2 SIDES)

POINT CLAMP JACK ANGLE PLATE (4 SIDES)
(H-MC)
ANGLE PLATE (4 SIDES) PALLET SUBTABLE

PALLET SUBTABLE
(H-MC) (H-MC)
12-19
C. CAD model
CAD data can be imported as a fixture model. The setting procedure is detailed under 3 in
Subsection 12-4-5.
4. Initial state of the 3D SETUP display

The table is initially displayed as appropriate for MAZATROL as well as EIA/ISO programs.
A parametric or CAD model of the material or fixture, once set, is retained and will initially be
displayed next time the 3D SETUP display is called up.
12-4-4 Material model setting

Select the [WORKPCE MATERIAL SETUP] item from the initial menu of the 3D SETUP display
to display the material-model setting menu that is used to set a parametric or CAD model as a
material model.
1. Material-model setting menu

<Material-model setting menu>
WORKPCE WORKPCE DELETE LOCATE EDIT WORKPCE FINISH >>>
MATERIAL MATERIAL WORKPCE MATERIAL
DATABASE CAD FILE MATERIAL DATABASE FILE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
<Menu functions>
1. WORKPCE MATERIAL DATABASE
Used to set the material model by selecting a parametric model from the material database.
2. WORKPCE MATERIAL CAD FILE
Used to set the material model by selecting a model created using a CAD system.
3. DELETE WORKPCE MATERIAL
Used to delete the existing material model.
4. LOCATE
Used to locate and arrange the material model.
5. EDIT DATABASE
Used to edit the database of the parametric models (by adding, changing, and deleting data;
see Subsection 12-5-1).
6. WORKPCE MATERIAL FILE
Used to manage the existing material models (by saving, renaming, copying, and deleting
data; see Subsection 12-6-1).
7. FINISH
Used to terminate the material-model setting mode.
12-20
2. Setting a parametric model
Follow the procedure below to set the material model by selecting a parametric model from the
material database.
(1) Select from the material-setup structure tree a mother item under which to add a new
material model.
(2) Press the [WORKPCE MATERIAL DATABASE] menu key.

! The existing parametric models are listed up in a window.

(3) Use the cursor keys and to select the desired parametric model from the
database, and then press the INPUT key INPUT .
Selection with
Determination with INPUT
! The SELECT WORKPIECE MATERIAL window appears on the screen.
12-21
(4) Edit the current data as required and finally press the INPUT key INPUT .
The current
settings (material
and dimensions)
can be modified.
! The material model is set definitively.
Note: In the material database nine types of shape can be selected: ROUND, SQUARE,
HEXAGON, SQUARE PIPE, L-TYPE BLOCK, SQUARE (POCKET), SQUARE (SLOT),
SQUARE (SQUARE BOSS), and SQUARE (LONG BOSS).
12-22
3. Setting a CAD model
A. Setting procedure
Follow the procedure below to set the material model by selecting a model created using a CAD
system.
(1) Press the [WORKPCE MATERIAL CAD FILE] menu key.

! The existing CAD models are listed up in the IMPORT WORKPIECE MAT. CAD FILE
window.
(2) Use the cursor keys and to select the desired CAD model, make the desired
selection for auto-adjustment, and then press the INPUT key INPUT .
Selection with
AUTO ADJUST YES/NO
AUTO ADJUST YES.....Places the CAD model in a proper position.

NO.......Places the CAD model according to the coordinate system used
in its creation.
! The material model is set definitively.
B. Restrictions on CAD models

- The CAD models available in the 3D SETUP display are 3-D CAD files in the Parasolid format.
- A Parasolid format 3-D CAD files has the file extensions x_t (text), xmt_txt (text), x_b (binary),
and xmt_bin (binary).
- A Parasolid format file cannot be read if it contains any of the following. Attempting to do so
causes the alarm CAD FILE FORMAT ERROR.
- Assembly model (a model assembled with multiple shapes)
- Surface model (a model whose shape is represented by only surfaces, which is a collection
of planar elements without any content)
- Model containing any invalid shape (detected in entity checking)
Note: An assembly model can be read, however, as a fixture model.
12-23
C. Changing the folder containing CAD models

Follow the procedure below to change the folder containing 3D-CAD files.
(1) Click the [CHANGE FOLDER] button in the IMPORT WORKPIECE MAT. CAD FILE
window.
Click the [CHANGE FOLDER] button with the mouse.

Alternatively, move the focus onto that button with the Tab key
and then press the space key.
! The CHANGE FOLDER window opens to show the drive name and the folder list.
Current folder of 3D-CAD files

Current drive (changeable)
Select the desired folder with and
, and then press INPUT .
Folder list
(2) In the folder list, select the desired folder using the cursor keys and , and then
press the INPUT INPUT key.
! The contents of the new folder are shown. Select [..] in the CHANGE FOLDER window
as required to view the contents of the upper-level folder.
(3) Finally select the desired folder and click the [OK] button. The CHANGE FOLDER window
closes and the files in the selected folder are listed in the IMPORT WORKPIECE MAT.
CAD FILE window.
Note 1: ”C:\” is selected as the default folder. The change in folder setting is retained.
Note 2: Move the focus to the drive name field with the Tab key and use the cursor keys
and to change the drive.
12-24
4. DELETE WORKPCE MATERIAL
Proceed as follows to delete the current material model.
(1) Press the [DELETE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu key.

! The material model is deleted.
The material model

has been deleted.
12-25
5. LOCATE
The material and fixture models can be located and arranged manually.
(1) Select the material model to be arranged manually.
(2) Press the [LOCATE] menu key.

! The submenu for manual arrangement will be displayed.

MOVE MOVE ROTATE FINISH >>>
SETUP SETUP
X-AXIS Y-AXIS Z-AXIS X-AXIS Y-AXIS Z-AXIS CONTACT FINISH >>>

MOVE MOVE MOVE ROTATE ROTATE ROTATE SURFACE
(3) Use the above menu functions as required for manual arrangement.
See Subsection 12-4-6 for a detailed description.
6. FINISH
The specified material model cannot be made effective for the 3D interference checking
(SAFETY SHIELD) and Virtual Machining functions until the [FINISH] menu key is pressed to
terminate the material-model setting mode (and, as a result, to return to the initial menu of the 3D
SETUP display).
(1) Press the [FINISH] menu key.
Note 1: If the total number of material model faces and fixture model faces exceeds 4000,
alarm 2064 MAX NUM. OF MODEL FACES EXCEEDED will be displayed and the
face quantity check window opened.
Note 2: Even if the total number of faces ranges from 4000 to 8000, the models specified in the
3D SETUP display will be made effective, indeed, for the SAFETY SHIELD and Virtual
Machining functions, but alarm 1105 SAFETY SHIELD CALCULATING may be prone
to occur or the Virtual Machining may decrease in operation speed.
Note 3: If the total number of faces exceeds 8000, the models specified cannot be made
effective at all for the SAFETY SHIELD and Virtual Machining functions.
12-26
12-4-5 Fixture model setting
Select the [FIXTURE SETUP] item from the initial menu of the 3D SETUP display to display the
fixture-model setting menu that is used to set a parametric or CAD model as a fixture model.
Note: When multi-piece machining is set up in the program, assigning fixtures as a daughter
of (or subordinate to) a material model in the manual layout structure tree will cause the
fixtures to be arranged on the multiple pieces for the SAFETY SHIELD and Virtual
Machining functions. CAD models as well as the following types of parametric model
can be arranged subordinate to a material model.
- MULTI BLOCK (LARGE)
- MULTI BLOCK (SMALL)
- SUPPORT BLOCK
- LOCATING BLOCK (SQUARE)
- LOCATING BLOCK (ROUND)
- SWING CLAMP
- UNIVERSAL CLAMP
- CENTER CLAMP
- POINT CLAMP
- JACK
1. Fixture-model setting menu

<Fixture-model setting menu>
FIXTURE FIXTURE DELETE LOCATE EDIT FIXTURE FINISH >>>
DATABASE CAD FILE FIXTURE DATABASE FILE
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
<Menu functions>
1. FIXTURE DATABASE
Used to set the fixture model by selecting a parametric model from the fixture database.
2. FIXTURE CAD FILE
Used to set the fixture model by selecting a model created using a CAD system.
3. DELETE FIXTURE
Used to delete the existing fixture model.
4. LOCATE
Used to locate and arrange the fixture model.
5. EDIT DATABASE
Used to edit the database of the parametric models (by adding, changing, and deleting data;
see Subsection 12-5-2).
6. FIXTURE FILE
Used to manage the existing fixture models (by saving, renaming, copying, and deleting
data; see Subsection 12-6-2).
7. FINISH
Used to terminate the fixture-model setting mode.
12-27
2. Setting a parametric model

Follow the procedure below to set the fixture model by selecting a parametric model from the
fixture database.
(1) Select from the MODEL LAYOUT structure tree a mother item (material and fixture) under
which to add a new fixture model.
(2) Press the [FIXTURE DATABASE] menu key.

! The existing parametric models are listed up in a window.

(3) Use the cursor keys and to select the desired parametric model from the
database, and then press the INPUT key INPUT .
Selection with
Determination with
INPUT
! The FIXTURE SETUP window appears on the screen.
12-28
(4) Edit the current data as required and finally press the INPUT key INPUT .
The current settings

(dimensions) can be
modified.
! The fixture model is set definitively.
3. Setting a CAD model

Follow the procedure below to set the fixture model by selecting a 3-D CAD model.
(1) Select from the MODEL LAYOUT structure tree a mother item (material and fixture) under
which to add a new fixture model.
12-29
(2) Press the [FIXTURE CAD FILE] menu key.

! The IMPORT FIXTURE CAD FILE window appears to list up the existing CAD models.
(3) Use the cursor keys and to select the desired CAD model, make the desired
selection for auto-adjustment, and then press the INPUT key INPUT .
Selection with
AUTO ADJUST YES/NO
AUTO ADJUST YES.....Fixtures are arranged so that the center of the right parallelepi-
ped including the CAD models lies on the center line of the table.
NO.......Places the CAD model according to the coordinate system used
in its creation.
! The fixture model is set definitively.
Note: If the number of specified fixture model faces exceeds 5350, alarm 2064 MAX. NUM.
OF MODEL FACES EXCEEDED will be displayed and the face quantity check window
opened. Moreover, fixture models with more than 8000 faces cannot be set up at all.
12-30
4. DELETE FIXTURE
Proceed as follows to delete the current fixture model.
(1) Select the fixture to be deleted from the MODEL LAYOUT structure tree.
(2) Press the [DELETE FIXTURE] menu key.

! The DELETE FIXTURE window appears on the screen.
Selection with or and
determination with INPUT
(3) Confirm the [YES] selection by pressing the INPUT key INPUT to delete the selected fixture
with its subordinate ones.
The selected fixture has been

deleted with its subordinate
ones.
12-31
5. LOCATE
(1) Select from the MODEL LAYOUT structure tree the fixture to be arranged manually.
(2) Press the [LOCATE] menu key.

! The submenu for manual arrangement will be displayed.

SETUP SETUP

(3) Use the above menu functions as required for manual arrangement.
See Subsection 12-4-6 for a detailed description.
6. FINISH
The specified fixture model cannot be made effective for the 3D interference checking (SAFETY
SHIELD) and Virtual Machining functions until the [FINISH] menu key is pressed to terminate the
fixture-model setting mode (and, as a result, to return to the initial menu of the 3D SETUP
display).
(1) Press the [FINISH] menu key.
12-32
12-4-6 Manual arrangement of the material and fixture models
Select the [LOCATE MANUALLY] item from the initial menu of the 3D SETUP display to display
the manual arrangement menu.
WORKPCE FIXTURE LOCATE
MATERIAL
SETUP SETUP MANUALLY
1. Manual arrangement menu
<Manual arrangement menu>

SETUP SETUP
1 2 3 7

4 4 4 5 5 5 6 7
<Menu functions>
1. MOVE
Used to move (translate) as well as rotate the model on the selected plane.
2. MOVE SETUP
Used to setup the linear distance by which the model is to be moved.
3. ROTATE SETUP
Used to setup the angular distance by which the model is to be rotated.
4. X/Y/Z-AXIS MOVE
Used to move the model along the particular axis.
5. X/Y/Z-AXIS ROTATE
Used to rotate the model around the particular axis.
6. CONTACT SURFACE
Used to mate two selected faces.
7. FINISH
Used to terminate the manual arrangement.
2. Restrictions on manual arrangement

The restrictions imposed on the manual model arrangement are as follows.
- Manual model arrangement is available only for parametric and CAD models.
12-33
12-5 Editing the Database
12-5-1 Editing the material database

Select the [EDIT DATABASE] item from the material-model setting menu to enter the material-
database edit mode.
1. Material-database editing menu

<Material-database editing menu>

NEW COPY AND EDIT DELETE aaEDITaa
CHANGE DATABASE
1 2 3 4 5
<Menu functions>
1. NEW
Used to add a new parametric model to the material database.
2. COPY AND CHANGE
Used to add a parametric model to the material database by modifying an existing model.
3. EDIT
Used to edit a parametric model in the material database.
4. DELETE
Used to delete a parametric model from the material database.
5. EDIT DATABASE
Clear the menu item of highlighting to terminate the edit mode.
2. NEW
Follow the procedure below to add a new parametric model to the material database.
(1) Press the [NEW] menu key.
CHANGE DATABASE
12-34
- The No. field is filled in advance with the smallest available number in the database.
(2) Perform data settings as required.

- Set the number (No.), make selection for WORK MATERIAL and SHAPE, and enter the
dimensions (a to h).
(3) Finally press the INPUT key INPUT , or click the [OK] button with the mouse, to add the new
material model to the database.
Note 1: A preview appears in the 3-D display section when the setting of all the necessary
dimensions is complete. The change of a dimension will update the preview as soon as
the data item is left by pressing the Tab key .
Note 2: Available types of material shape are: ROUND, SQUARE, HEXAGON, SQUARE PIPE,
L-TYPE BLOCK, SQUARE (POCKET), SQUARE (SLOT), SQUARE (SQUARE BOSS),
and SQUARE (LONG BOSS).
Note 3: An attempt to register an additional model under a number (No.) which is already in
use will only lead to an alarm.
Note 4: An attempt to register a model with an item being unset or incorrectly set will only lead
to an alarm.
3. COPY AND CHANGE

Follow the procedure below to add a parametric model to the material database by modifying an
existing model.
(1) Use the cursor keys and to select the desired model from the database.
Selection with
12-35
(2) Press the [COPY AND CHANGE] menu key.

CHANGE DATABASE
(3) Edit the current data as required.

- Change the number (No.) and change the data (WORK MATERIAL and SHAPE settings
and dimensions a to h) as required.
(4) Finally press the INPUT key INPUT , or click the [OK] button with the mouse, to add the new
material model to the database.
Note: See the above description of the [NEW] menu function for the information on the
preview function and alarms concerned.
4. EDIT
Follow the procedure below to edit a parametric model in the material database.
Selection with
12-36
CHANGE DATABASE
(3) Edit the current data as required.

- Change the data (WORK MATERIAL and SHAPE settings and dimensions a to h) as
required.
(4) Finally press the INPUT key , or click the [OK] button with the mouse, to register the
INPUT
changed material model into the database.

Note 1: The data in the No. field cannot be changed.
Note 2: See the above description of the [NEW] menu function for the information on the
preview function and alarms concerned.
5. DELETE
Follow the procedure below to delete a parametric model from the material database.
Selection with
12-37
(2) Press the [DELETE] menu key.

CHANGE DATABASE

(3) Press the INPUT key INPUT , or click the [YES] button with the mouse.
! The selected model is deleted from the database.
- To cancel the deletion, use the Tab key or cursor keys to move the focus to [NO]
and press the INPUT key INPUT .
12-5-2 Editing the fixture database

Select the [EDIT DATABASE] item from the fixture-model setting menu to enter the fixture-
database edit mode.
1. Fixture-database editing menu

<Fixture-model setting menu>
<Fixture-database editing menu>

CHANGE DATABASE
1 2 3 4 5
<Menu functions>
1. NEW
Used to add a new parametric model to the fixture database.
2. COPY AND CHANGE
Used to add a parametric model to the fixture database by modifying an existing model.
3. EDIT
Used to edit a parametric model in the fixture database.
4. DELETE
Used to delete a parametric model from the fixture database.
5. EDIT DATABASE
Clear the menu item of highlighting to terminate the edit mode.
Remark: The fixture-database editing menu is to be used in the same way as for editing the
material database. See Subsection 12-5-1 for the details.
12-38
12-6 Managing the Material/Fixture Models
12-6-1 Managing the material models

Select the [WORKPCE MATERIAL FILE] item from the material-model setting menu to manage
the existing material models in data files.
1. Material-model managing menu

<Material-model managing menu>
SAVE RENAME COPY & DELETE WORKPCE
WORKPCE MATERIAL
MATERIAL RENAME FILE
1 2 3 4
<Menu functions>
1. SAVE WORKPCE MATERIAL
Used to save the material-shape model as CAD data in a file.
2. RENAME
Used to rename the file of a material-shape model.
3. COPY & RENAME
Used to copy the file of a material-shape model.
4. DELETE
Used to delete an unnecessary file.
2. SAVE WORKPCE MATERIAL

Follow the procedure below to save the material-shape model as CAD data in a file.
(1) Press the [SAVE WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu key.
aaSAVEaa RENAME COPY & DELETE WORKPCE
WORKPCE MATERIAL
! The SAVE WORKPIECE MATERIAL window appears on the screen.
12-39
(2) Key in the name of the file.
Name the file.
(3) Finally press the INPUT key INPUT , or click the [OK] button with the mouse.
! The material model is saved in a file with the specified name.
Note 1: The data to be saved is currently valid material shape data.
Note 2: All the shape components are integrated and saved as a single shape.
Note 3: The file format is “x_t”. If the file name does not have an extension, “x_t” will be added
automatically.
Note 4: If the length of the file name is in excess of 256 characters or if the length of the file
path is in excess of 260 characters, alarm 2039 FILE NAME TOO LONG will be
displayed.
3. RENAME
Follow the procedure below to rename an existing file of material-shape model.
(1) Select the file to be renamed in the WORKPIECE MATERIAL FILE window.
Selection with
(2) Press the [RENAME] menu key.

SAVE aRENAMEa COPY & DELETE WORKPCE
WORKPCE MATERIAL
12-40
! The RENAME window appears on the screen.
(3) Key in the new name.
! The file is renamed as specified.
Note 1: The extension cannot be changed. The same extension as the extension assigned to
the current file name is added automatically.
Note 2: If the specified name is already assigned to an existing file, a message demanding
confirmation of overwriting will be displayed.
displayed.
4. COPY & RENAME

Follow the procedure below to copy the file of a material-shape model.
(1) Select the file to be copied in the WORKPIECE MATERIAL FILE window.
Selection with
12-41
(2) Press the [COPY & RENAME] menu key.

SAVE RENAME ACOPY &a DELETE WORKPCE
WORKPCE MATERIAL
! The COPY AND RENAME FILE window appears on the screen.
(3) Key in the name of the new file for the copied data.
! The file is copied under the new name.
Note 1: The extension cannot be changed. The same extension as the extension assigned to
the current file name is added automatically.
Note 2: If the specified name is already assigned to an existing file, a message demanding
confirmation of overwriting will be displayed.
displayed.
12-42
5. DELETE
Follow the procedure below to delete an existing file of material-shape model.
(1) Select the file to be deleted in the WORKPIECE MATERIAL FILE window.
Selection with
(2) Press the [DELETE] menu key.

SAVE RENAME COPY & aDELETEa WORKPCE
WORKPCE MATERIAL
(3) Finally press the INPUT key INPUT , or click the [YES] button with the mouse.
! The specified file is deleted.
Note: To cancel the deletion, use the Tab key or cursor keys to move the focus to [NO]
and press the INPUT key INPUT .
12-43
12-6-2 Managing the fixture models

Select the [FIXTURE FILE] item from the fixture-model setting menu to manage the existing
fixture models in data files.
1. Fixture-model managing menu

<Fixture-model managing menu>
SAVE RENAME COPY & DELETE aFIXTURE a
FIXTURE RENAME FILE

1 2 3 4
<Menu functions>
1. SAVE FIXTURE
Used to save the fixture-shape model as CAD data in a file.
2. RENAME
Used to rename the file of a fixture model.
3. COPY & RENAME
Used to copy the file of a fixture model.
4. DELETE
Used to delete an unnecessary file.
2. SAVE FIXTURE
Use the menu function to save the fixture model as CAD data in a file.
The saving procedure is similar to that described under 2 in Subsection 12-6-1.
3. RENAME
Use the menu function to rename the file of a fixture model.
4. COPY & RENAME

Use the menu function to the file of a fixture model.
5. DELETE
Use the menu function to delete an unnecessary fixture-model file.
12-44
12-7 3D Display Operation

This section describes how to manipulate the material and fixture models displayed on the
screen.
<Display operation menu>

ZOOM ROTATION MOVE ZOOM >>>
IN/OUT TO FIT
1 2 3 4
XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE 3D VIEW >>>

180° 180° 180°
5 5 5 5 5 5
TABLE FIXTURE W/P MAT COUNT >>>

SHOW / SHOW / SHOW /
HIDE HIDE HIDE FACES
6 7 8 9
1. ZOOM IN/OUT
Follow the procedure below to enlarge or reduce the model view.
(1) Press the [ZOOM IN/OUT] menu key.
IN/OUT TO FIT
(2) With the menu item being highlighted, use the cursor keys as follows:
to enlarge the model view.
to reduce the model view.
D740S3065
(3) Finally press the [ZOOM IN/OUT] menu key (to clear the menu item of highlighting) to
terminate the ZOOM IN/OUT mode.
12-45
2. ROTATION
Follow the procedure below to rotate the contents of the 3-D display section.
(1) Press the [ROTATION] menu key.
IN/OUT TO FIT
to rotate the model upward.
to rotate the model downward.
to rotate the model leftward.
to rotate the model rightward.
D740S3066
(3) Finally press the [ROTATION] menu key (to clear the menu item of highlighting) to
terminate the ROTATION mode.
12-46
3. MOVE
Follow the procedure below to move (translate) the contents of the 3-D display section.
IN/OUT TO FIT
to move (translate) the model upward.
to move (translate) the model downward.
to move (translate) the model leftward.
to move (translate) the model rightward.
D740S3067
(3) Finally press the [MOVE] menu key (to clear the menu item of highlighting) to terminate the
MOVE mode.
12-47
4. ZOOM TO FIT
The currently displayed model can be fitted entirely in the display section, without changing its
orientation.
(1) Press the [ZOOM TO FIT] menu key.
IN/OUT TO FIT
! The model in its entirety will fit in the display section.
ZOOM ZOOM
TO FIT TO FIT
D740S3068
12-48
5. XY/YZ/ZX PLANE and XY/YZ/ZX PLANE 180°
The plane and direction of the view can be selected as required.
(1) Select one of the menu items concerned (1 to 6 below).
XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE XY PLANE YZ PLANE ZX PLANE 3D VIEW >>>
180° 180° 180°
1 2 3 4 5 6
! The view plane is changed accordingly.
XY PLANE
(from + side of Z)
YZ PLANE 180° YZ PLANE

(from – side of X) (from + side of X)
Ｚ
Ｙ
ZX PLANE 180° ZX PLANE

(from – side of Y) (from + side of Y)
XY PLANE 180°
(from – side of Z) D740S3069
(2) Finally press the [3D VIEW] menu key to retrieve the initial three-dimensional view.
12-49
6. TABLE SHOW/HIDE
The table model can be hidden and shown as required.
(1) Press the [TABLE SHOW/HIDE] menu key.
TABLE
SHOW /
HIDE
TABLE
SHOW /
Table shown HIDE Table hidden
D740S3070
7. FIXTURE SHOW/HIDE
The fixture model can be hidden and shown as required.
(1) Press the [FIXTURE SHOW/HIDE] menu key.
FIXTURE
SHOW /
HIDE
FIXTURE
SHOW /
Fixture shown HIDE Fixture hidden
D740S3071
12-50
8. W/P MAT SHOW/HIDE
The material model can be hidden and shown as required.
(1) Press the [W/P MAT SHOW/HIDE] menu key.
W/P MAT
SHOW /
HIDE
W/P MAT
SHOW /
Material shown HIDE Material hidden
D740S3072
9. COUNT FACES
(1) Press the [COUNT FACES] menu key.
! The COUNT FACES window appears on the screen.

The COUNT FACES window shows the total number of the faces of the material model and the
fixture models.
12-51
12-8 VIRTUAL MACHINING Display

Function:
Simulates both the cutting operation and the machine movement.
Remarks:
- Virtual Machining comprises two elements: “Work simulation” simulates the process of cutting
the workpiece and “Machine simulation” simulates the movement of the machine.
- Virtual Machining can be performed even in parallel with automatic operation.
12-8-1 Outline
Virtual Machining is the collective name for “Work simulation” that simulates the process of
cutting the workpiece and “Machine simulation” that simulates the movement of the machine.
- Work simulation
This simulation checks if the tool interferes with the material and the fixtures. The cutting
process can be checked while viewing the actual cutting image, facilitating the early discovery
of cutting failure and the reduction of the setup time.
- Machine simulation
This simulates the movement of machine components (including the tools) to check if inter-
ference occurs among these machine components.
12-8-2 Data display
1. Displayed data
<Work simulation>
[1]
[2] [6]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
D740S3073E
12-52
<Machine simulation>
[1]
[6]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[7]
D740S3074E

[1] WNo. — Work number of the program being simulated
[2] UNo. — Number of the unit being executed
[3] TNo. — Number and name of the tool mounted in the spindle
mm (in.) Current position with respect to the machine origin (COORDINATE) or the
[4] COORDINATE
degrees workpiece origin (POSITION)
[5] CYCLE TIME hh:mm:ss Time of machining
[6] Simulation — Graphical representation of Work simulation or Machine simulation
[7] Alarm — Display of alarms generated during simulation
12-53
3. Virtual Machining menus

<First menu for Work simulation>
SIMULATN SIMULATN DRAW ZOOM ROTATION MOVE PROGRAM TOOL MACHINE
WORKPCE
CONTINUE STEP MATERIAL IN/OUT EDIT PATH SIMULAT.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
<Second menu for Work simulation>

INTERFER ALARM RESTART STORE 3D PROGRAM MACHINE
ALARM
HISTORY HISTORY SETUP MONITOR SIMULAT.
10 11 12 13 14 15 9
<First menu for Machine simulation>

SIMULATN SIMULATN REPEAT ALL AXIS ZOOM ROTATION MOVE PROGRAM TOOL MACHINE
CONTINUE STEP ZERO RET IN/OUT EDIT PATH SIMULAT.
1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9
<Second menu for Machine simulation>

INTERFER ALARM RESTART VIEW VIEW 3D INTERF. PROGRAM MACHINE
ALARM
HISTORY HISTORY CANCEL CHANGE SETUP SETTING MONITOR SIMULAT.
10 11 12 14 15 9
<Menu functions>
1. SIMULATN CONTINUE
Used to execute the simulation continuously. The menu item remains highlighted during
execution. The highlighting is cancelled by pressing the CLEAR key , at the end of the
program, or by pressing the [SIMULATN STEP] menu key (to change the execution mode).
2. SIMULATN STEP
Used to execute the simulation stepwise. The menu item remains highlighted during execu-
tion of the step. The highlighting is cancelled by pressing the CLEAR key , at the end
of the program, or by pressing the [SIMULATN CONTINUE] menu key (to change the
execution mode).
3. DRAW WORKPCE MATERIAL
Used to redraw the material shape before machining. Only available to Work simulation.
4. ZOOM IN/OUT
Used to enlarge and reduce the 3-D view. See Section 12-7 for more information.
5. ROTATION
Used to rotate the 3-D view. See Section 12-7 for more information.
6. MOVE
Used to move, or translate, the 3-D view. See Section 12-7 for more information.
7. PROGRAM EDIT
Used to divide the screen for simultaneous view of the VIRTUAL MACHINING and
PROGRAM displays, allowing the program data to be edited.
8. TOOL PATH
Used to return to the TOOL PATH CHECK display.
9. MACHINE SIMULAT.
Press the [MACHINE SIMULAT.] menu key (to highlight the menu item) to select Machine
simulation mode. With this item deselected (menu item in normal display), Work simulation
mode is active.
12-54
10. INTERFER ALARM HISTORY
Used to display the history of interference alarms generated during simulation.
11. ALARM HISTORY
Used to display the history of alarms related to machine operation.
12. RESTART
Used to specify the restart position for the simulation.
13. STORE
Used to store the current display contents. The storage continues as long as the menu item
is highlighted. Only available to Work simulation.
14. PROGRAM MONITOR
Used to monitor the program data on the screen. The monitor remains displayed as long as
the menu item is highlighted.
Note 1: As for Machine simulation (by the [SIMULATN CONTINUE] or [SIMULATN STEP]
menu function) of contour-parallel machining type, the material may be partially uncut
depending upon the shape of the tool used.
Note 2: See Subsection 12-8-4 for a description of the menu items proper to the Machine
simulation.
12-8-3 Work simulation
1. DRAW WORKPCE MATERIAL

Follow the procedure below to redraw the material shape before machining together with the
fixture. This function is available even during simulation.
(1) Select the [DRAW WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu item.

WORKPCE
! The material shape before machining is redrawn.
DRAW
WORKPCE
MATERIAL
D740S3075
Note 1: If the redraw function is selected during simulation, an alarm may occur because of
interference.
Note 2: The redraw function is available to Work simulation only.
12-55
2. PROGRAM EDIT
Use the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu function to divide the screen for simultaneous view of the
VIRTUAL MACHINING and PROGRAM displays.
(1) Select the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu item.
WORKPCE
! The screen is divided into two sections.

- The program display section shows the data of the currently simulated program, be it
MAZATROL or EIA/ISO type, allowing the program data to be edited.
MAZATROL program EIA/ISO program
- Select the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu item anew to return to the Work simulation display.
Note 1: Selecting the [PROGRAM EDIT] menu item during simulation causes the running
simulation to be stopped, as when the CLEAR key is pressed, and the program
edit display section appears.
Note 2: The program edit mode is enabled as soon as the program edit display section
appears.
Note 3: In the initial state of the program edit display section, the cursor is placed at the
beginning of the unit (MAZATROL) or the block (EIA/ISO) just simulated.
Note 4: The screen division in question can occur even in the replay mode, and the termination
of the program edit mode by pressing the [PROGRAM COMPLETE] menu key
resumes the simulation display with the replay mode being intact.
Note 5: The simulation display resumed by the termination of the program edit mode is no
different from that before the screen division, with the workpiece being cut and the
machine components shown as they were. However, the [SIMULATN CONTINUE] or
[SIMULATN STEP] menu function is cancelled.
Note 6: If the POSITION display or another is called up without pressing the [PROGRAM
COMPLETE] menu key, the return to the divided screen mode is not possible. To
return to the VIRTUAL MACHINING display, press the [PROGRAM], [TOOL PATH],
and [VIRTUAL MACHIN.] menu keys in that order.
12-56
3. ALARM HISTORY and INTERFER ALARM HISTORY
Use these menu functions to view the history of alarms generated during simulation.
Menu item Function
INTERFER ALARM To view interference alarms generated during simulation.

HISTORY 24 alarms are saved per page, and a maximum of 48 alarms can be examined.
To view other alarms generated during simulation.
ALARM HISTORY
24 alarms are saved per page, and a maximum of 72 alarms can be examined.
(1) Select the [INTERFER ALARM HISTORY] or [ALARM HISTORY] menu item (1 or 2
below).
ALARM
1 2
! The history of the corresponding alarms is displayed.
INTERFER ALARM HISTORY ALARM HISTORY
Note 1: The display format is the same as for the DIAGNOSIS (USER) - ALARM HISTORY
display.
Note 2: On the DIAGNOSIS (USER) display, select or deselect the [Work Number Name
Display] item under [Setup] on the menu bar to select the desired display type.
Note 3: The alarms generated during simulation are excluded from antomatic saving in a text
file (even when parameter F83 bit 0 ist set to 0).
Note 4: While the history display is shown, the contents of the alarm history will not be updated
even if a simulation is running. Cancel the menu function concerned temporarily and
select it again to view the updated history.
Note 5: The history display is cancelled when another menu item ([RESTART], [STORE],
[PROGRAM MONITOR] or [MACHINE SIMULAT.]) is selected.
4. RESTART
Use the following procedure to restart the simulation at the specified position of the currently
selected program.
A. Restart procedure
(1) Press the [RESTART] menu key.
ALARM
12-57
! A window for restart setting appears on the screen.

The format and contents of the window depend on the type of the currently selected
program, as shown below.
For MAZATROL programs For EIA/ISO programs
- Refer to Part 4, Subsection 1-2-2 for a detailed description of the required setting in this
window.
(2) Specify the restart position and start the search.
! The following window remains on the screen during search.
- To stop the search for restart position, select the [RESTART] menu item again, or press
the CANCEL key . The interruption of the restart search causes the alarm 2120
RESTART PT SEARCH INTERRUPTED.
- When the restart position search process is completed, the SEARCHING window closes.
The simulation is in a state of temporary stop at the restart position.
(3) Start the simulation.

- Select the [SIMULATN CONTINUE] or [SIMULATN STEP] menu item (1 or 2 below).
WORKPCE
1 2
Note 1: Restart position search will be cancelled if the display is changed for the TOOL PATH
CHECK display or another.
Note 2: Interference check does not occur during restart position search.
12-58
Note 3: The [SIMULATN CONTINUE] and [SIMULATN STEP] menu function cannot be
selected or deselected during restart position search.
Note 4: It takes some time to complete the search process because a work simulation is
executed internally until the specified restart position is reached.
B. Difference in restart process between operation and simulation

<For MAZATROL programs>
Operation Simulation
Restart position to be specified Process Process
REPEAT TIMES Can be set Can be set
Up to 6 codes
M-codes for preparation Cannot be set
(MDI mode is also available)
Restart from an EIA/ISO
Executable Executable
subprogram
<For EIA/ISO programs>

Operation Simulation
SUB PROG. No. SUB PROG. No.
SEQUENCE No. SEQUENCE No.
Restart position to be specified
BLOCK No. BLOCK No.
REPEAT NUMBER REPEAT NUMBER
G On the POSITION display
No display
S 1 code (Upon completion of the search the simulation is
Display of search results F 1 code in a state of temporary stop at the restart
T 2 codes position, with the [SIMULATN CONTINUE]
menu item being highlighted.)
M 35 codes
Up to 6 codes
M-codes for preparation Cannot be set
(MDI mode is also available)
Restart from a MAZATROL
Executable Executable
subprogram
C. Restrictions on restart position search

- For multi-piece machining, the restart position search function cannot be used because the
Restart window does not show data for such machining.
- If a non-existent subprogram number is specified for the EIA/ISO program, the restart position
search function will search up to the end of the program.
- If the subprogram count (REPEAT NUMBER) specified for the EIA/ISO program is larger than
the actual count, the restart position search function will search up to the end of the program.
12-59
5. STORE
Follow the procedure below to retain the last image of the display before display change. The
retained display image is restored when the Work simulation display is called again.
(1) Select the [STORE] menu item.
ALARM
- The mode turns ON and OFF each time the [STORE] menu key is pressed. The ON/OFF
state is retained even if the display is changed.
[STORE] ON [STORE] OFF
Change for another display
The state before switching The model image is

the display is retained. initialized.
D740S3076E
Note 1: The [STORE] ON setting is retained until the power is turned off.
Note 2: Selecting another work number with the STORE mode ON and then switching to the
VIRTUAL MACHINING display restores the retained material/fixture. To display the
material/fixture corresponding to the selected work number, press the [DRAW
WORKPCE MATERIAL] menu key.
Note 3: The STORE function is available only during Work simulation (unavailable to the
Machine simulation).
12-60
6. Work interference check
The Work simulation function checks if interference occurs among the “tool,” “material,” and
“fixture” components. If interference occurs, the alarm message 2102 WORK INTRF will be
shown.
The display changes automatically to the Machine simulation display when the work simulation
stops temporarily according to the settings in the INTERFERENCE SETUP window.
A. Displaying shape of each component

For the Work simulation function to check for interference, the following parameters and other
data must be set beforehand so as to display the material, fixtures, and holder.
Machine origin
Tool section
Tool holder
No. B C
1 BA28 BA29
B 2 BA31 BA32
C
3 BA34 BA35
4 BA37 BA38
Workpiece (Material)
A-axis S26
Fixture
S25: Center of the tilting table’s top surface (VARIAXIS)

Center of the tilting table’s top surface, in machine
coordinates of the orthogonal axes.
S25 S26: Center of rotation of the tilting table (VARIAXIS)
Center of rotation of the tilting table, in machine
coordinates of the orthogonal axes.
Tilting table
C-axis
D740S3077
The holder will be displayed at a position apart from the tool tip by a distance of the tool length.
The parameter settings for the holder vary depending on the holder type (Type 1 to 4) as shown
in the table below.
Parameter
Type 1 BA28 BA29
Type 2 BA31 BA32
Type 3 BA34 BA35
Type 4 BA37 BA38
12-61
B. Work interference check

A work interference check will be carried out in the following combination.
": Checked
Cutter Shank Holder
Material — " "
Fixture " " "
Note 1: If the tool hits the interference check target, an alarm will be generated to indicate the
occurrence of interference.
Note 2: The portion ground during occurrence of interference will be shown in red.
Note 3: Multiple eventual sections of interference during one step of simulation can all be
indicated and treated as having been removed, indeed, but the alarm can only refer to
the section of the first interference.
Holder
Shank
Cutter
A combination of contact other than that

of the material with a cutter causes an
interference error and the erroneous
contact is displayed in red.
The contact surface of the material and

Material
the cutter is displayed as a cutting
surface in yellow.
D740S3078
7. Setting display color

<COLOR SETUP window>
No. Item Data description

Components for Assign a check mark to the desired component and select the color from
1
color change the palette (2).
2 Color palette Colors available are displayed.
3 TRANSPARENT Assign a check mark to the component to be displayed translucently
12-62
12-8-4 Machine simulation
1. Replay (REPEAT menu function)

The Machine simulation function can reproduce the machine movement for the period of 30
seconds before the machining is stopped. Follow the procedure below to review, for example,
the machine movement immediately before the occurrence of the interference.
(1) Press the [REPEAT] menu key.

- Select the [REPEAT] menu item to enter the replay mode.
SIMULATN SIMULATN REPEAT ALL AXIS ZOOM ROTATION MOVE PROGRAM TOOL MACHINE
CONTINUE STEP ZERO RET IN/OUT EDIT PATH SIMULAT.
(2) Press the [SIMULATN CONTINUE] or [SIMULATN STEP] menu key.

- When [SIMULATN CONTINUE] is selected, the machine movement will be reproduced
for the period of 30 seconds.
- When [SIMULATN STEP] is selected, the machine movement will be reproduced in units
of the interference distance.
- The progress of replay will be indicated in the counter as a percentage.
Progress of
replay
Note 1: During replay, machine interference is checked based on the interference check setting.
Interference errors are indicated as usual during replay, but not recorded, as
appropriate, in the simulation alarm history.
Note 2: During replay, the workpiece shape that was displayed in Machine simulation at the
selection of the [REPEAT] menu item is displayed. The displayed workpiece will not be
cut during the replay mode.
Note 3: Switching to the Work simulation display during replay causes the highlighting of the
[REPEAT] menu item to be cleared.
Note 4: The [REPEAT] menu function cannot be selected if the Machine simulation function
has not yet been executed at all (by selecting [SIMULATN CONTINUE] or [SIMULATN
STEP]), since there is no data to replay.
12-63
Note 5: If a change for a display of other type, e. g. for the program edit display, occurs during
replay, the replay mode will be cancelled, and the restored Machine simulation display
cannot reproduce any more the particular machine movement.
Note 6: Change for the Work simulation display, however, does not cancel the replay mode of
the machine simulation display.
2. ALL AXIS ZERO RET menu function

Press the [ALL AXIS ZERO RET] menu key to perform zero-point return operations for all axes
as required for simulation.
In the following cases, zero-point return for all axes is required before executing simulation.
- The machine stopped during machining.
- A software limit alarm has occurred.
Interference check and cutting operations are not performed when zero-point return for all axes
is in progress.
Zero-point
return
completed
Note: Zero-point return for all axes cannot be carried out when simulation (continuous or
stepwise), replay, search for restart position or restart operation is in progress.
12-64
3. VIEW CANCEL menu function
Partial ‘Show/Hide’ can be selected for the machine model in the simulation display. Interference
checks will be conducted even for the ‘hidden’ components.
Select the desired component with the or key and then press either the INPUT key for
‘Show’ or the key for ‘Hide.’
In the example shown below, the base and the column are ‘hidden’ to allow the operation of the
spindle and the table to be viewed more clearly.
Base and column shown Base and column hidden
Remark: The components capable of being hidden are: Base, Column, Table, Pallet, Saddle,
Head, Receiver (MMS), Coolant and Tool.
4. VIEW CHANGE menu function
The viewing point in the simulation display can be changed as required. Select the desired
viewing point with the or key and determine the selection with the INPUT key.
Given below is an example of display with the LEFT-OVER viewing point selected.
Remark: Available points of view are: INITIAL, FRONT, RIGHT, LEFT, BACK, LEFT-UNDER,
and LEFT-OVER.
5. INTERF. SETTING menu function

Use this menu function to turn on and off the interference check mode for each component.
12-65
6. Machine interference check

The Machine simulation function checks if interference occurs among the “machine model
components,” “tool,” “fixture,” and “material.”
During Machine interference checks, the following alarms may be generated.
Conditions Alarm
Interference warning 2101 NEAR MISS
Interference 2100 MACN INTRF
With the STOP AT 1ST PT OF INTERFERENCE option selected in the INTERFERENCE SET-
UP window, the display changes automatically to the Work simulation display when the Machine
simulation stops temporarily due to work interference.
A. Interference check during machine simulation

A machine interference check will be carried out in the combination of the machine components,
tool, fixture, and material. There are two types of interference checks as follows.
Interference check Simulation display

The target components will be shown in yellow if they come closer to each other
Interference warning
than the set interference distance.
Interference The target components will be shown in red if machine components interfere.
The clearance between yellow components The red components (Head and Table in
(Head and Table in this example) is shorter this example) interfere with each other.
than the interference distance.
D740S3079
B. Setting for interference check

To perform settings for interference check, select the [Interference Setup] item under [Setup]
on the menu bar to open the corresponding window.
With the [Interference Setup] item being highlighted, press the INPUT key INPUT to open the
INTERFERENCE SETUP window.
12-66
Detailed description of the INTERFERENCE SETUP window
Category Item Description Application Setting Default

Select whether or not to Machine simulation
perform interference checks.
INTERFERENCE (Interference check is
With this item OFF, all of the ON/OFF ON
DETECTION always active in Work
following interference
settings are disabled. simulation mode.)
When ON, the simulation

STOP AT STAND- stops temporarily if the target
Machine simulation ON/OFF ON
OFF DISTANCE comes within the interference
distance.
STOP AT 1ST PT When ON, the simulation Work simulation
OF INTER- stops temporarily if inter- Machine simulation ON/OFF ON
FERENCE ference occurs. (Remark 1)
When OFF, the simulation
stops according to the above
settings only when
interference is detected the Work simulation
STOP AT ALL
first time. Machine simulation ON/OFF OFF
INTER- INTERFERENCE
When ON, the simulation (Remark 1)
FERENCE stops temporarily whenever
OPTIONS an interference warning or
interference occurs.
When ON, the simulation
STOP WHEN OUT
stops temporarily if the target
OF INTER- Machine simulation ON/OFF OFF
gets out of the interference
FERENCE
distance.
0: Interference
warning judg-
ment disabled.
Set the interference warning Metric: 1.00 to
INTERFERENCE distance. An interference 100.00 mm
STAND-OFF warning will be generated if Machine simulation Inch: 0.00001 to 3
DISTANCE the component is within the 4.00000 in.
set distance.
※ The minimum
value depends
on the machine
model.
12-67
Category Item Description Application Setting Default

Set the frequency of
updating the machine 0: Updating
DISPLAY INTER. CALC / simulation display. Use this disabled.
Machine simulation 4
RATE DISPLAY setting if updating the display
every time slows down the 1 -: Frequency
performance.
Remark 1: With the STOP AT 1ST PT OF INTERFERENCE option selected, the display
changes automatically to the Work simulation display when the Machine simulation
stops temporarily due to work interference.
Remark 2: The Work simulation display changes automatically to the Machine simulation
display when the work simulation stops temporarily according to the settings in this
window.
12-8-5 Display of material, tool, and fixture
1. Material shape drawing

A right parallelepiped of the optimum dimensions for the selected program is displayed as a
workpiece material. Display specifications depend upon the type of the unit.
A. Point machining units

The types of point machining units shown below are available, and such right parallelepipeds
that include the respective patterns are displayed.
(A) POINT (B) LINE (C) SQUARE (D) GRID
(E) CIRCLE (F) ARC (G) CHORD
12-68
B. Line machining units
Such a right parallelepiped that includes the machining shape of the line machining unit is
displayed.
Line machining unit (LINE) Line machining unit (ARC)

D740S3080
C. Face machining units

A right parallelepiped that includes the machining shape of the face machining unit is displayed.
Face machining unit (SQUARE) Face machining unit (CIRCLE)

D740S3081
D. 3D machining units
A right parallelepiped that includes the machining shape of the 3D machining unit is displayed.
3D machining unit
D740S3082
12-69
E. Compensating for (nominal) tool diameter

- For line machining or face machining
On the basis of the calculated machining shape, the appropriate right parallelepiped is dis-
played by allowing for the (nominal) tool diameter in accordance with the type of the machining
unit: LINE-RGT, LINE-LFT, LINE-CTR, LINE-OUT, or LINE-IN.
Compensating for tool diameter (in Line/Face machining)
LINE LFT/IN LINE CTR LINE RGT/OUT

The tool size is not incorporated at The radius of the tool is added The diameter of the tool is
all into the calculated machining since the tool center moves on added since the tool only
contour since the tool only moves the machining contour. moves outside the machining
inside the contour. contour.
Tool
Tool path
Machining contour (Arrow: Moving direction of the tool)
D740S3083
Remark: For LINE IN machining with only one straight line specified, the tool size will not be
allowed for since the IN-side cannot be identified.
- For point machining
The tool radius is added to the right parallelepiped that includes all the specified points.
Compensating for tool diameter (in Point machining)
Right parallelepiped
including all the points
Right parallelepiped
with added tool radius
D740S3084
- For 3D machining
The tool radius is added to the right parallelepiped that includes the locus of points of tool
movement.
12-70
F. Adding offset area
If Work simulation is executed for a material for which the tool size only is added to the
programmed machining shape, all the material may be chipped off and no display made at the
end. In order to avoid this, a fixed offset value is added to the machining shape so that the shape
of the as-machined workpiece can be readily understood.
An offset of 10 mm (or 1 in.) is set up in both the X- and Y-directions of the machine coordinate
system in such a way as to encompass the right parallelepiped including the machining shape.
As for the Z-direction, an offset of 10 mm (or 1 in.) is set up at the bottom side of the surface to
be machined.
Adding offset area
Y Unit: mm
Material shape Clearance
(F136) Offset
10
Y max. 150
Offset
Offset 10
10 Clearance 120
Machining
Clearance area (F136)
(F136)
Y min. 50
40
Offset
Clearance 10
Reference
point (F136)
X
Machine 40
coordinate
system X min. X max.
(50) (150)
40 X
Machine
coordinate
system
Machining
area
10
Offset
Z 10
D740S3085
G. Setting up a clearance (margin)

For the material shape with an added offset, the value of parameter F136 is added in both the X-
and Y-directions of the machine coordinate system in such a way as to encompass the shape of
the material. (No clearance added in the Z-direction)
Remark: The material will not be displayed if the size of one side with both the offset and the
clearance added to the machining shape exceeds 1000.0 mm or 39.37 inches.
Note: During machining from multiple directions, alarm 2102 WORK INTRF may be dis-
played to indicate interference at the offset and clearance area.
12-71
H. Rotation around the C-axis and A-axis

Rotation around the C- and A-axis, as specified in the WPC, WPC SHIFT, or INDEX unit, is also
taken into consideration as follows: The material will be a right parallelepiped that includes a right
parallelepiped formed by rotating the right parallelepiped including the machining shape. That is,
the material will be a right parallelepiped whose sides are parallel to the X-, Y-, or Z-axis of the
machine coordinate system.
Right parallelepiped formed by

rotating the right parallelepiped
including the machining shape
Right parallelepiped that includes

a right parallelepiped formed by
rotating the right parallelepiped
including the machining shape
D740S3086
2. Setting from the CHANGE MAT. SIZE window

Select the [Change Material] item under [Setup] on the menu bar and use the resulting window
(named CHANGE MAT. SIZE) to change the coordinates (X, Y, Z) of the material’s reference
point (BASE) and dimensions (SIZE) along the X-, Y- and Z-axis.
Note: The [Change Material] function is not available for a material which is set in the 3D
SETUP display. Change the material as required with the menu functions concerned.
3. Display of the fixtures

Fixtures are displayed according to the fixture models that are prepared on the 3D SETUP
display. See Section 12-4 for the details.
12-72 E
OTHER FUNCTIONS 13
13 OTHER FUNCTIONS
13-1 Voice Advisor
Function:
Outputs a voice message at NC power on (greeting message) or for operational safety or
maintenance.
Remarks:
The greeting message can be changed as required.
13-1-1 Outline
This function outputs a voice message when operational safety or maintenance is required.
It supports 14 languages.
13-1-2 Change settings

In addition to the language, the sound volume and tone may be changed as desired.
1. Displaying the VOICE SETUP window

(1) Call up the DIAGNOSIS (USER) display on the screen.
(2) Press the window key , select [Voice Setup] under [Help] on the menu bar and then
press the INPUT key INPUT .
! The VOICE SETUP window will be displayed.
H740S3N040E 13-1
13 OTHER FUNCTIONS
2. Displayed data of the VOICE SETUP window

<Displayed data>
[1]
[3]
[2]
[4]
[5] [6]

[1] ON/OFF — ON: When pressed, the voice advisor function is enabled.
OFF: When pressed, the voice advisor function is disabled.
[2] LANGUAG — Set the language used for the voice advisor function.
[3] TYPE — Set the tone (male or female) of the voice message.
[4] VOLUME — Set the sound volume by moving the slider left and right.
[5] [OK] — Click this button to reflect the voice settings.
[6] [CANCEL] — Click this button to cancel the voice settings.
13-2
OTHER FUNCTIONS 13
13-1-3 Greeting Message
The greeting message is output when the NC power is turned on. This message can be set as
desired in the appropriate text file.
1. Greeting message text file

Write a message you want to output as the “greeting message” in the text file located in the
specified folder (C:\nm64mdata\eng\voice.txt).
For example, to output an English message “Let’s have a safe work day.” as the greeting
message, write it in the following text file using your text editor.
Text file: C:\nm64mdata\eng\voice.txt
Contents: As shown below
Let’s have a safe work day.
The greeting message will be output as specified.

Note: “eng” in the specified file name (C:\nm64mdata\eng\voice.txt) corresponds with the
selected language.
13-1-4 Exclusion of alarms from warning

The Voice Advisor has a function that warns against an alarm. It is possible to exclude particular
alarms from the vocal warning.
1. Setting alarms to be excluded

Open the text file concerned (C:\MC_sdg\voice\ExcludeAlarmVoice.txt) with the aid of a
commercially available editor.
[ExcludeAlarmVoice]
001 = 128
002 = 129
003 = 0
004 = 0
005 = 0
006 = 0
007 = 0
008 = 0
009 = 0
:
:
As shown in the above example, register the numbers of the alarms to be excluded and then
save the file.
13-3
13 OTHER FUNCTIONS
13-2 Custom Menu Function
Function:
Registers software applications to the menu items so that they can be started from the NC
display.
13-2-1 Outline
Use the [SPECIAL MENU] function to register the desired software applications to the NC menu
so that they can be started from the NC display. The function provides five custom menus, each
allowing the registration of up to 8 applications.
1. Menu operation
(1) Select the [SPECIAL MENU] item.
WORK MACRO EIA SET UP NAVIGAT. ADDITION VIRTUAL SPECIAL
OFFSET VARIABLE MONITOR INFO. RESULT MACHIN. MENU
! The custom menu items will be displayed.

>>> SPECIAL
MENU
A software application can be registered to each of the blank menu items.

Pressing the [>>>] menu key displays the next menu page.
To return to the initial menu, press the [SPECIAL MENU] menu key to clear the highlighting.
2. Setting Special Menu items

Edit the text file “CustomMenu.txt” in the “C:\MC_sdg\CustomMenu” folder to set the required
custom menu items.
(1) Open CustomMenu.txt using a text editor such as Notepad.
- This file is normally blank when opened.

Note: Depending on the machine specifications, the custom menu may already contain
some registered applications.
13-4
OTHER FUNCTIONS 13
(2) Register software applications in the following format.
- Edit the file in the required format and save it properly.
<Format>
[Menu- ] [1]
MenuName= [2]
FilePath= [3]

Specify the custom menu item number to register the application.
The relationship between the custom menu numbers and the item
numbers is shown below.
First menu: 1 to 8
[1] [Menu= ] —
Second menu: 9 to 16
Third menu: 17 to 24
Fourth menu: 25 to 32
Fifth menu: 33 to 40
- Specify the item name to display in the custom menu.
An item name consists of up to 24 characters. It will be displayed
[2] MenuName= — in three lines, the top, middle, and bottom, each containing up to
8 characters.
- Double-byte characters cannot be used.
[3] FilePath= — Specify the full path to the folder where the application is stored.
(3) Turn the NC off temporarily and then turn it back on.
- New custom menu items cannot be made valid until the NC is ‘turned’ on.
3. Setting example
To register the WordPad application to the item number 1 in the custom menu, edit the
“CustomMenu.txt” file as follows.
For custom menu item No. 1
Name of the custom menu item
Specify the full path to the WordPad.
When the NC is turned back on, the new item will be displayed as follows.
Note: Depending on the machine specifications, the custom menu may already contain some
applications. If so, use different menu item numbers to register new applications.
13-5
13 OTHER FUNCTIONS
- NOTE -
13-6 E

Operacion CNC MAZAK

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Operacion CNC MAZAK

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

OPERATING MANUAL

Issued by Manual Publication Section, Yamazaki Mazak Corporation, Japan

: Failure to follow these instructions could result in loss of life.

: Failure to observe these instructions could result in serious harm to a human

: Failure to observe these instructions could result in minor injuries or serious

Remarks on the cutting conditions recommended by the NC

! Before using the following cutting conditions:

Sample program Machines of INTEGREX e-Series Turning machines

! If axis-by-axis independent positioning is selected and simultaneously rapid feed selected

BEFORE USING THE NC UNIT

Keeping the Backup Data

1 PREPARATION FOR AUTOMATIC OPERATION ............................... 1-1

1-1 Preparation Steps for Automatic Operation ........................................................1-1

2 DISPLAY OVERVIEW .......................................................................... 2-1

2-1 Name of the Components of Each Display.........................................................2-1

2-2 Types of Displays ...............................................................................................2-3

2-3 Configuration of Displays....................................................................................2-4

2-3-1 DISPLAY MAP display............................................................................................ 2-6

3 DATA SETTING METHODS................................................................. 3-1

3-1 Setting Data and Address...................................................................................3-2

3-2 Selecting Menu Data ..........................................................................................3-3

3-3 Erasing Data.......................................................................................................3-3

3-4 Modifying Data ...................................................................................................3-4

3-5 Incremental Input................................................................................................3-4

3-6 Saving Data onto the Hard Disk .........................................................................3-4

3-7 Naming Machining Programs .............................................................................3-5

4 DISPLAYS RELATED TO THE MACHINE OPERATIONAL

4-1 POSITION Display..............................................................................................4-1

4-1-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 4-1

4-1-2 Data registration ..................................................................................................... 4-5

4-2 TRACE Display...................................................................................................4-7

4-2-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 4-7

4-2-2 Displaying machining shape and tool tip ................................................................ 4-8

4-2-3 Plane select ............................................................................................................ 4-9

4-2-4 Change of scale values ........................................................................................ 4-10

4-2-5 [Counter Erase]..................................................................................................... 4-11

4-3 AUTO MEASURE Display ................................................................................4-12

4-3-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 4-12

4-4 EIA MONITOR Display .....................................................................................4-14

4-4-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 4-14

4-4-2 EIA/ISO monitor function ...................................................................................... 4-15

4-4-3 Editing functions ................................................................................................... 4-15

4-4-4 Restart 2 unmodal function................................................................................... 4-16

4-5 MACHINING - MONITORING Display..............................................................4-17

4-5-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 4-17

4-5-2 Selecting graphs to be displayed.......................................................................... 4-18

4-5-3 Setting the display time scale ............................................................................... 4-20

4-6 DRILL - MONITOR Display ..............................................................................4-22

4-6-1 Data display .......................................................................................................... 4-22

4-6-2 Setting the threshold............................................................................................. 4-23

4-6-3 Scale change ........................................................................................................ 4-24

4-6-4 Setting the display time scale ............................................................................... 4-25

5-1 SET UP RECORD Display .................................................................................5-1

5-1-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 5-1

5-1-2 Data saving/reading................................................................................................ 5-3

5-1-3 Data registration ..................................................................................................... 5-3

5-2 TOOL LAYOUT Display (Tool Layout Mode)......................................................5-5

5-2-1 Data display ............................................................................................................ 5-5

5-2-2 Tool layout procedure ............................................................................................. 5-6

5-2-3 Clearing pocket numbers...................................................................................... 5-11

5-2-4 Specifying a spare tool ......................................................................................... 5-11

5-2-5 Erasing spare tool data......................................................................................... 5-12

5-2-6 Erasing procedures for registered tool data.......................................................... 5-12

5-2-7 Other functions ..................................................................................................... 5-13